DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOE THE SCHOOL INTER­ MEDIATE EXAMINATION, DECEMBER, 1920 AND FEBRUARY, 1921.

1.—ENGLISH. (a) An essay of about 400 words, i.e., of about one and a half pa^es. (b) Accidence; leading- rules of syntax; analysis of sentences into clauses, with explanation of tbe grammatical function of each clause; recognition of simple English metres with mark­ ing of stresses. The piece of verse set will not exceed six lines. Any recognised scheme of analysis will be accepted. (c) The interpretation of the meaning of passages of prose and verse, including some Australian verse. A sufficient number of passages of prose and verse must bo studied to enable candidates to answer questions in this section. (d) Discussion of one of Shakespeare's comedies, and of a historical novel. N.B.—Candidates will be expected to illustrate their answers with apt quotation and allusion. A sugsrested course of reading will be found in the courses of study recommended.

2. LATIN— (a) Translation into English of easy unprepared! passages of Latin prose. Accidence and the leading rules of Syntax. Translation of easy sentences from English into- Latin, as a test of grammatical knowledge. (b) Portions of easier Latin prose and verse, together not exceeding 1200 lines, from Caesar's Gallic War and Virgil's Aeneid, or their equivalent Questions may be set involving translation, scansion, grammar, and subject-matter. Candidates will be required to pass in both (a) and (b). Special Books: — Virgil, Aeneid II., 1-566 (Page). Caesar, Gallic War II. (Brown).

.31. -444 DETAILS OF 8UBJHCT8.

3., GREEK— (a) Translation into English of easy unprepared passages of Greek.prose. • Accidence and the leading rules of elementary Syntax. Translation of easy sentences from English into Greek, as a test of grammatical knowledge.

4. FRENCH— (a) Translation into English of easy passages of French prose. (b) A short original composition in French on a sub­ ject to be set (two alternatives will be given: (a) a picture, or (b) a simple topic of a non- abstract nature for which a very brief skeleton outline will'be furnished.) (c) Translation into French of short easy English sentences. • (d) Questions on accidence and the leading rules of syntax. (e) Either (i.) A short piece of simple dictation, or (ii.) Written answers in French, to a few ' simple printed questions in French on matters well within tbe knowledge and experience of pupils of 16 years of age, or (iii.) Transcription of a passage of phonetic script of about 180 words into ordinary French—the subject matter of the passage to be of the same standard as the piece chosen for dictation. '': N.B.—A suggested course of reading will be -found in the courses of study recommended. ' INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 445

-6. GERMAN— (a) Translation into English of easy passages of German prose. (b) A short original composition in German on a subject to be set (two alternatives to be given j (a) a picture, (b) a simple topic of a non- abstract nature, for which a very brief skeleton outline will be furnished), (o) Translation into German of short easy English sentences. (d) Questions on accidence and the leading rules of . syntax. (e) Either (i.) A short piece of simple dictation, or (ii.) 'Written answers in German to a few simple printed questions in German on matters well within the knowledge and experience of pupils of 16 years of age. or (iii.) Transcription of a passage of phonetic script of about 130 words into ordinary German—the subject matter of the passage to be of the same standard as the piece chosen for dictation. - N.B.—A suggested course of reading will be found in the. •courses of study recommended.

•6. HISTORY*AND CIVICS— 1. British— ' (a) From tbe earliest times to 1688. (b) From 1688 to 1901. 2. European— (c) Greek and Roman. As in Grant's Outlines of European History, pp. 1-134. . (d) Mediaeval. As in Grant's Outlines of Euro­ pean History, pp. 184-238. • (e) Modern. A sin Grant's Outlines of European History, pp. 239-362. 8. Civics (see the syllabus given in the coarse of School Study). Candidates must satisfy the examiners in Civics, and either •in- one of the divisions marked (a), (b), or in, two- of the -divisions marked (c), (d), (e), together with the illustrative geography in each case. 446 . DETAILS OP BUfUBOTS. r.—ARITHMETIC AND ALGEBRA*— A.' Arithmetic (Note: Algebraic ideas and methods to be freely used)— . - Integral and fractional numbers in rational opera­ tions (i.e., operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division). Resolution of integral numbers into prime factors, with application to H.C.F. and L.C.M., and to- finding square root. The division-transfor­ mation (i.e., determination of quotient and remainder, from dividend and divisor); general method of finding H.C.F. of integral , '. numbers. Decimal expression of fractional ' numbers, and application of the rational opera­ tions to numbers so expressed; elementary ; • '. principles of approximation. The metric system, and the decimalisation of measurements in British systems ; calculations involving such measurements. , Proportion, direct and inverse, simple and com­ pound. Percentage: application to profit and) loss; to simple interest (and the elementary principle of compounding interest at fixed intervals, but exclusive of difficult questions on compound interest); to rates and taxes; to insurance; £o trade discounts and commis­ sions. Mensuration of plane and solid rectangular figures, and of the circle and circular cylinder. Easy graphical methods, and the use., of rough

- [Note: Approximate calculation by use of tables of logarithms should if possible be taught in the - - Arithmetic course.]

* Tmeben ore strongly urged to study earetally the " counM ol atudy " in to* Handbook. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 44,7

B. Algebra— Algebraic representation of the rational operations . of arithmetic. ' Negative numbers, integral and fractional, and the application to them (along with the posi­ tive numbers) of the rational operations. Transformation ' and simplification of rational algebraic expressions. Substitution. .The division-transformation, when the . dividend and divisor are integral algebraic expressions in one variable; application to finding H.C.F. of such integral algebraic expressions. Distribution of the product of two binomial expres­ sions; factorisation, by inspection, of quad­ ratic expressions in one variable (and equiva­ lent forms) with numerical coefficients. Factors of binomial expressions of the form z"izyn for positive, integral values of n not greater than 4. And factorisation based upon these Solution of equations, of the first and of the second degree, in one variable; and of simultaneous equations, one of the first, the other of the first or of the second degree, in two variables.; the coefficients being in each case either numeri­ cal or algebraical. Easy problems. [Note: Graphical ideas should- be introduced in the teaching]. N • Candidates must show a sound knowledge of i both Arithmetic and Algebra. The two. parts of tbia' com­ bined subject will not necessarily be kept separate in the paper.

8.—GEOMETRY AND TRIGONOMETRY.*— A.. Geometry—Theoretical and Practical—. . Elementary Plane Geometry of Straight Lines, Angles, Triangles; Parallels; of Area.- (tri­ angles and parallelograms), including ' the geometrical theorems corresponding' to 'ele­ mentary cases of the distribution of algebraic 'products;' add of the' Circle; with doire- 448 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

spending constructions. Easy deductions and! problems based so far as possible upon practical applications) ' - The scope of this geometrical syllabus is that of the main text in the standard text-books on tbe subject. See also- the'conrse of study in the Handbook. .B. Trigonometry— Elementary definitions of the trigonometric ratios, from the right-angled triangle; approximate- evaluation of the ratios by measurement; exact evaluation for 0°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°, by elementary geometrical methods. ' ' - The elementary relations between the six trigono­ metric ratios. Simple trigonometric identities, in one angle. Solution of right-angled triangles, with use of trigo­ nometric tables; easy problems. The elementary triangle-identities for acute-angled ' - triangles, and their extension to the obtuse- angled triangle (but not " solution of triangles"). . Note.—The fact that a ratio is a number, and the importance of distinguishing between numbers and geometrical' quantities (lengths, angles, areas, etc.), are to be emphasised. The'examination paper shall consist'of (a) six questions on the standard bookwork of Geometry, (b) six easy geomet­ rical exercises, and (c) four questions on Trigonometry; "Mot more than twelve questions in all to be attempted. The only restriction on the candidate's freedom of choice 'shall be that evidence, satisfactory to the examiners, of Trigonometric knowledge must be shown.

9. GEOGRAPHY— Introductory .Note.—Wherever possible the teaching of Geography should.be based upon observations in the field 'and be illustrated by pictures, maps, models, diagrams and sections. Candidates may be expected'to fill in important

* Tsacben are strongly urged to study carefully tbe " courses ol study la the, Handbook. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 44 J> details in outline maps of tbe world,, or of any continent, or of the British Isles, or of Victoria, copies of which will be supplied in the examination. They will also be expected to interpret simple topographical maps. A. Astronomical— 1. The shape of the Earth (elementary consideration only)— 2. Movements of the Earth:— a) Rotation—effects of Rotation, b) Revolution—effects of Revolution. 8. Recognitiof n of the limits of the Zones (Tem­ perate, etc.). B. Meteorological and I'hytical— l.v, Temperature—effect of Latitude, Altitude, Diur­ nal and Seasonal changes, etc. 2. Atmospheric Pressure—relation to variations of Temperature and . Humidity — Isobars — ISCK hyets—Winds (with special reference to the Trade Winds, Land and Sea Breezes and Monsoons.) Cy­ clones and Anticyclones. An elementary study of Australian weather charts as given in the daily papers. 8. Ocean' Currents. 4. Factors determining Climate—the climatic zones of theContinentsin outline—tbeclimate of Australia in fuller detail—the Australian Weather Chart —Factors producing Desert Conditions (ele­ mentary). 5. The Earth's surface:— (a) The work of running water in altering the earth's surface. (b) Elementary knowledge of the causes which operate to produce Plains, Plateaux, River Basins, Lakes, Mountains and Coastal Fea­ tures. ,• (c) The build of each continent, showing the arrangement of the chief Mountain sys­ tems. Plateaux; River-basins. Plains and' Lakes. The build of Australia and Victoria* . in fuller detail. (This section should be illustrated by maps showing.relief, and by, cross sections). 450 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

6. - Practical work—The keeping of Temperature and -Pressure charts, rain-gauge records, and ob- ' servations in the Field of the work of running water, and of such land forms as may be, pre­ sent in the district.

C. :The Commercial Geography of Australia— Under this heading are considered the natural re­ sources of Australia, the nature and location of manu­ factures and the control over these exercised by clinlatio considerations such as the distribution of the isohyets. - The work may be subdivided as follows:— 1. The general distribution of natural vegetation and its relation to the isohyets. Desert, Saltbush areas. Grasslands, Forests. - [Note.—Tropical forests confined to north-east / coast. Temperate forests confined to tbe east and south coasts.] 2. The Pastoral Industry. Cattle live in warmer, wetter, rougher country—Sheep in drier regions —Dairies confined to wetter regions. - 3. The Agricultural Industry as exemplified by (a) wheat (grows best between 10 and 20 inch isohyet) (b) sugar. 4. Principal mining areas and areas of Artesian Water. [NOTE.—Tbe mining areas are mostly confined to the older rocks—the artesian areas are mostly in the newer rocks]. 6. The principal harbours. , 6. The principal manufactures—their distribution con- - " • trolled by factors such as facilities for distribu­ tion, including harbours, railways, topography, labour supply, climate, coal, etc. '. 7. ' Australian Exports and Imports. 8. The control exercised • by climate and natural . resources on the distribution and density of population in Australia. * '' Candidates.mast be able to show these economic areas approximately in sketch maps. . [NOTB.-!—This.part of the work is dealt with in Griffith Taylor's book," Australia, Physiogi-aphical and Economia"] INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 451

. £•. Qtneral Commercial and Political Geography— 1. The Chief Economic Products of the World. 2. The distribution of the great Industries of Man­ kind. 3. The relationship between the growth of cities and the Natural Resources of the District. -4. The great Ocean Trade Routes. -5. The principal Cable Routes connecting Australia and Europe. 6. The principal Countries of the world, with their Capitals and types of Government. 7. The distribution of the principal Races and Re­ ligions of Man. E. Geographical Correlations— The more important Cities, Mountains, Rivers, Lakes, - Plateaux. Plains, Deserts, Headlands, Seas, Inlets, Harbours, Islands, Straits, Canals, etc., of the world, treated chiefly from the point of view of their relation to man and his activities. Special Work for 1920. , The following are apecified for pictorial treatment and in fuller detail: — Mountains—Rocky Mountains, Mt. Buffalo. Rivers—Yarra, Ganges. Lakes—Geneva, Caspian. Canal—Suez. Headland—Cape of Good Hope. Harbour—Hobart. Desert—Central Australia. - Cities—A Victorian Town or City, Glasgow,' Toulon, Chicago, Broken Hill, Jerusalem,' Tokio, Con­ stantinople, Rome, Grenada, London, Cairo. Industries—Wheat. • '- The following may be token as' illustrating the scope •of the work required:— The Alps—Mountain range—as barrier—as affecting rainfall, as source of great rivers, snowfield, glaciers, avalanches, snowline, mountain lakes. 452 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

mountain torrents, mountain passes, the wea­ thering of mountains, the life of Alpine herds­ men and guides, the changes of climate and1 vegetation with the ascent of the Alps, differ­ ences in the Northern and Southern slopes, strategic value, etc. The Murray Biver System—Sources, tributaries,, floods, irrigation, plains of Murray Basin, en­ grafted river system, month, principal -towns and reasons for their location, relation to in­ dustry and commerce. Melbourne—Growth of Melbourne from early days-,, reasons for location, distribution of residen­ tial, commercial and manufacturing centres in relation to physiography, growth of methods of transport, harbour facilities, trade, etc, Venice—Founded as refuge from Huns, trade begins- with salt and fish—reasons for great demand for these in middle ages—discovery of suitable mineral deposits in vicinity leads to manufac­ ture of gloss and mosaics—trade with East and through Brenner Pass, influence on her trade of Crusades, discovery of Cape route to- India; opening of Suez Canal, changes in form of government. Pictures of Venice and its chief buildings, supplemented by descriptions- from good writers.

Books for reference for teachers:— The Geography of Victoria—J. W. Gregory. A Geography of Australasia—Griffith Taylor. Physical Geography for Schools—Bernard Smith. Junior Geography—A. J. Herbertson. . Physical Geography—Tarr. ' Victorian Hill and Dale—T. S. Hall. . The Climate and Weather of Australia—H. A. Hunt,. Griffith Taylor and E. T. Quale. Land Forms and Cities, Part II.—A, and C. Black. ' Australian School Atlas—Bartholomew and Cramp. ' ;'• Australia, Physiographic and 'Economic—Griffith) : Taylor. : INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 45$

10. PHYS1C3- The subject should be treated wherever possible from an experimental standpoint. Importance will be attached to a knowledge of-simple applications of physical prin­ ciples in every-day life. The units of quantities specified in the syllabus are to be those belonging to the centimetre—gram —second system of units. Additional units where required ore expressly mentioned. ' Configuration-—Length. Angle. Specification of position. Area. Volume. Motion.—Time. Displacement. Velocity. Uniform acceleration. Measurement of acceleration by Atwood's Machine or inclined plane. Addi­ tion and subtraction of directed quantities. Statics.—Force. The pound weight. Equilibrium of a particle under action of ooplanar forces. Un- like parallel forces. Couples. Centres of gravity experimentally. The balance. The maximum efficiency of a screw, and combination of pulleys. Dynamics.—Newton's First Low. Mass. Weight. Conservation of Mass. Momentum. Newton's- second and third Laws. Work. The foot­ pound weight. Potential and kinetic energy. The conservation of these forms of energy. Power. The Watt. The horse-power. Gravitation.—Newton's Law. Determination of g by Atwood's machine or inclined plane. Laws of freely falling bodies. , Hydrostatics.—The unit of pressure the bar ( = dyne/cm*). Pressure at a point. Pressure at a depth h. Archimedes' Principle. . Mano­ meters. The aneroid. Properties of Matter—Density. Boyle's Law. Hooke's Law. Simple experiments illustrating- surface tension. Heat.—Gas. and Mercury—in glass thermometers. Ex­ pansion of solids, liquids and gases. Charles'' Law. Maximum density of water: effects in nature. Calorimetry. The calorie. Measurement 454 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

of Specific heats and the latent heats of water. Fusion. Evaporation. Effect of pressure on ' boiling point. Convection. Ventilation. Simple . experiments illustrating conduction. - Simple ' phenomena of radiant heat. All candidates, except those from Schools in Class A and from other Schools in which, after inspection by inspectors nominated by the Schools Board, the laboratories have been .approved by the Board, must submit for examination their Laboratory J^ote books, which must contain a record of at least 20 independent experiments distributed over the work prescribed above. (See general .note in .'Handbook concern­ ing Laboratory Note-books).

11. CHEMISTRY— The simpler physics and chemistry, of the atmosphere and its two chief constituent gases. Examples of chemical - change as opposed to physical change. - Combination and decomposition. The chemistry of combustion. Conservation of moss. Common fuels and their products. Tbe three states of- aggregation - of matter and the 'transition from one state - to another, as illustrated by water. The simple chemistry of water and of its elements. Water as a solvent for solids and gases and tbe simple phe­ nomena of solution, such as crystallisation, saturation, and -super-saturation. The chemistry of, carbonate of lime, lime, calcium, car­ bonic acid (carbon dioxide), carbonic oxide (carbon mono­ xide), carbon (charcoal, graphite,'and diamond); of com­ mon salt, chlorine, hydrochloric acid, sodium, caustic soda, and the sodium carbonates; of sulphuric acid, sulphurous -acid, hydrogen sulphide, sulphur, and the sodium sulphates; of magnesium, magnesia, and magnesium carbonate; of nitre, nitric acid, the oxides of- nitrogen; 'ammonia, and -ammonium chloride, sulphate, and nitrate. Acids, bases, .normal and acid salts. Double decomposi­ tion. Basic and acidic oxides.' INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 459 i The fundamental chemical lows of definite, proportions, multiple' proportions, equivalents, and reacting gaseous volumes, as illustrated by a practical study of the above.. The laws of Boyle and Charles. The density of gases. The general characteristics of mixtures, compounds and elements (metallic and non-metallic), allotropic modifica­ tions. The atomic and molecular theory may be taught in its simpler developments, but should not be treated as a sub­ ject of examination. The general scope of the work and the mode of treat­ ment may be gauged from: Donington's; " A Class Book of Chemistry,' Parts I. and II., or Jamieson's "Chemistry for Australasian Schools," Part I.

Practical Exercises. All candidates, except those from Schools in Class A and from other schools in which, after inspection by inspectors nominated by the Schools. Board, the laboratories have been approved by the Board, must submit for examination their Laboratory Note-books. (See general note in Handbook on Laboratory Note-books).

12. BOTANY— The study of this subject requires a previous acquaint­ ance with the principles of Chemistry and Physics, such as is contained .in Macmillan's Science Primers on these subjects by.Roscoe and Stewart. (1) Systematic: (a) The characteristic features of the following groups:—Fungi (Mucor and Agoricus), Algae (Spirogyra ana Fucus or Hormosira), Vascu­ lar Cryptogams (Pteris), Angiospermae ' (Monocotyledons and Dicotyledons). . . (b) The characteristic features of the following natural orders:—(1) Liliaceae, (2) Gromineoe, (3)- Rannnculaceae, (4) Leguminosae, (6) Myr- tooeoe, (6) Oompositoe, with reference to the general distribution of - the order, '.dud to the common weeds and economic plants included in it. I 456 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. i (2) Morphology and Anatomy: (a) The general morphology of the root, stem, buds, leaf, inflorescence, flower, fruit and seed, (b) The general arrangement, structure and functions of the. leaf and young stem and root ot Mono­ cotyledon and Dicotyledon, and the outlines of secondary growth. (c) Function and detailed structure of young cell (cell wall, protoplasm, nucleus, plostidsT. and the folio-wing adult tissues:—Parenchyma, sclerenchyma, vascular tissue (sieve tubes and vessels), epidermis, including cuticle, stomata and cork. (3) Physiology: (a) An outline of Plant Physiology, including the principles of Absorption, Nutrition, Respira­ tion, Germination and Movement, Pollination, Dispersal ol fruits and seeds. Elementary facte of adaptation to environment.

Practical Exercises. Ail candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory Note-books. (See general note in Handbook on Laboratory Note-books). The Note-books must give evidence that candidates have performed the following practical work: — (a) Have examined as follows the types mentioned in Section 1. (a): The microscopic structure of . the vegetative and' reproductive ports of the Algae and Fungi, the macroscopic structure of Pteris and the microscopic structure of its sorus and sporangia.

membranes and in secretory organs. Nerve eel) and nerve fibre. Connective tissue' including- blood. Muscular tissue; skeletal, cardiac ana involuntary. (2) Special Histology of Man in brief outline only: —Alimentary tract. Respiratory tract. Cir­ culatory tract. Renal tract. Skin and its- appendages. (c) General Physiology: ' (1) The organism as a whole, with special reference, to the physiology of a typical protozoan', in­ cluding repair, growth, response to environ­ mental change, sources of energy, work per­ formed; digestion and excretion. 2) Chemical constituents of the animal body; elementary. chemistry of carbohydrates, water,, fats, lipoids and proteins. The nature of enzyme reactions. Diffusion, osmosis and permeability of membranes. ' -(d) Special Physiology of Man: (1) Elementary .Survey of Nervous System:—Origin- ' and significance of afferent impulses; destina­ tion and action of efferent impulses; reflex action, including functions of nerve roots. (2) Physical and chemical characters of foods; die­ tetics; action, of cooking on foods. !3) Digestion and absorption. 4i Excretion. w 5r Circulation. 6) Respiration. The approximate standard for the above is that indi­ cated by Foster and Shore's Physiology for Beginners io so far as it deals with the requirements. Leonard Hill's- Manual of Physiology (last 'edition) is recommended as a reference book for teachers.

Practical Exercises. All candidates 'must submit for examination their Laboratory. Note-books. - (See general 'note in Handbook on Laboratory Note-books)-. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 459

The Note-books must give evidence that candidates have learnt either by actual dissection or by demon­ stration t— (1) The main macroscopic features in regard to the alimentary, circulatory, excretory and respira­ tory organs and nervous system (except cranial nerves) of tbe Frog. (2) The macroscopic ' structure of trachea, lungs, heart, liver, pancreas and kidney. (3) The microscopic structure of striated muscle, fibrous connective tissue, hyaline cartilage and bone, blood and nerve. (4) Some form of Frotozoon.- The Notes should distinguish between those 'which are the result of observations of demonstrations and experi­ ments by the teacher and those which ore the record of •candidates'own dissections and experiments.

14. AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE— Preliminary Note—This syllabus is intended to indicate the scope of the work but not the order in which the -topics ore to be treated throughout the course. The proper method of teaching agriculture includes:— (a) Instruction in the fundamental principles of agriculture. Indoor experiments illustrating the principles. . Outdoor work in the school agricultural plots or iS. garden, and, where practicable, on the school farm. (d) Excursions to neighbouring farms, agricultural shows and factories. (e) The keeping of records of the experimental work and excursions. '

I. THE SOIL. I. General— (a) Origin; composition; fauction and nature of soil and subsoil. 0>) Soil-forming agencies. (c) Classification of soils; " light" and " heavy " soils i mechanical analysis of soils. .32 460 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

2. Relation.o/ Soil to Water and Heat— (a) Constitution of the soil, pore space, density. lb) Water content and water-holding capacity, (c) Regulation and conservation of soil moisture p irrigation, evaporation, soil mulching, drainage. Factors influencing soil temperature. Optimum temperatures for germination and plant- 8 growth. 8. TTie Fertility of the Soil— (a) Plant food—deficient elements, available and un­ available plant food. (b) Fertilisers— Nitrogenous, phosphatib, potossic, and general- . manures. (c) Improvement-of soils— * Fertilization, draining, liming, tillage, green manuring, pasturing, crop rotation.

II. TBE PLANT AND ANIMAL. ' 1. Structure and Function— Elementary structure and functions of seeds, roots,, stems, leaves of a typical monocotyledon (such as wheat or maize) and a dicotyledon (such as- pea or bean). 2. Elementary Knowledge of the general characters of the- following plants— a) Cereals—Wheat, oats, barley, rye. !b) Roots—Potatoes, turnips, onions, mangels, (c) Forages—Maize, millet, rape. d) Legumes—Peas, beans, lucerne, !e) Pastures—Grasses and clovers, (f) Weeds—Annual, Perennial and Parasitic—types of —and their control. . 3. The Composition of Animal Foods— Carbo-hydrates, proteins, fats, mineral matter and- water. Composition of milk, testing and valuation of milk, milk' records. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 461

All candidates must submit for examination their note books giving records of all practical work preiormed. (See general note in Hand Book concerning Laboratory Note Books). For Text-Books see at end of details for Leaving Examination. ' 16. DOMESTIC SCIENCE— The study of the subject requires a previous acquaint­ ance with the principles of Chemistry and Physics, such as is contained in Macmillan's Science Primers by Rosooe and Stewart. Section A.—Bioloqy. An elementary knowledge of the following: — Typical green unicellular plant: its structure and physiology in outline. Yeasts and moulds. Fermentation. Nature of fer­ ments. Principal ferments at work in every­ day life—i.e., in bread making. Bacteria. Occurrence and characteristics. A state­ ment of the most common useful and disease- producing forms. Bacteriology of water and milk (very briefly treated). Principles of bacteriological'cleanliness. Life history of the fly, mosquito and clothes moth. b. Section B-—Anatomy and Physiology. (a) Man: The organs and processes of nutrition, includ­ ing assimilation. The organs and processes of respiration, circulation, excretion. The spinal cord. The skin. Animal heat. Joints and limb movements. [As Treated in Foster and Shaw.] (b) Frog: Anatomy of the alimentary, circulatory, excretory, and respiratory organs. Section C.—The Chemistry of Foods and Dietetics. Carbohydrates, proteins, fate, mineral matter and water. .82* 462 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

Principles of feeding. Mixed diet. Effect of heat on food. Objects, methods and prin­ ciples of cooking. Composition of milk. Testing and valuation of milk. Milk records.

Section D.—Elementary Hygiene. (a) Household Hygiene— Sanitation. Situation, construction, warming, lighting, beating and cooling of house. Dangers of flies and mosquitoes. Water. Sources and modes of supply. Impurities and means of purification. Air. Impurities ana ventilation. Sterilisation. • (b) -Personal Hygiene— Necessity of right exercise and of rest. . Cleanliness. Clothing. Prevention of infectious diseases.

Practical Exercises. All candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory note-books (see general note in Hand-book on Laboratory note-books). The note-book must give evidence that candidates have performed ot least 25 experiments of which a minimum of 4 must have been selected from each of the four sections (a), (b), (c), (d).

16. COMMERCIAL PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE— Commercial Arithmetic:—Extensions. Calculations of interest. Use of Ready Reckoners and Interest . Tables. . . •-• ('Printed Interest Tobies not necessary.) ' Correspondence.-—Precis of passages in commercial and • • trade reports and correspondence. Practice in writing more difficult letters connected with Trading. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 463

Book-keeping.-—Double ' Entry—Books and accounts used—Entering—Posting—Balancing. Extract­ ing Trading and Profit and Loss Accounts and Balance-sheets from Trial Balances—Consign­ ments Accounts—Provisions for Bad Debts and Depreciation—Sundry Creditors and Debtors. General.- —Example of a simple telegraphic code. Description of a simple card system and of loose leaf books. Explanation of Commercial terms and abbre­ viations.

17. DRAWING— In the following details of subjects the amount of know­ ledge required is indicated, but the teacher need not adhere to the order of the syllabus in treating the different parts of the subject. Not less than three periods per week should be devoted to drawing between the ages of 12 and 16 and not less than four periods per week between the ages of 16 and IS for candidates taking the Intermediate and Leaving Examinations respectively. 1. Practical Geometry. The use of the T-square, set-square, protractor, com , passes and dividers. (a) Drawing an angle equal to a given angle or to contain a given number of degrees, and to draw lines parallel and perpendicular to each other by construction. The construction and use of scales; plain, metric, and diagonal. Proportionals, areas, similar figures. Easy problems on the construction of triangles, quadrilaterals and polygons, in accordance with given conditions. Easy prob­ lems on the circle, together with the inscription and circumscription of circles, circles tangent to lines and circles. Construction of ellipse by use of intersecting arcs, pencils, or trammels. The drawing of plans, elevations, and sections of simple solids and structures. (1} hours). 464 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

(b) Simple geometrical problems associated with pattern drawing. Arrangement and analysis of simple geometrical patterns. Drawing to scale simple objects or structures (11 hours). 2. Elementary Perspective, instrumental and freehand. Tuo Freehand Perspective is intended to tost the candidate's power to apply the principle of linear perspective to the drawing of simple objects. (1 hour). 8. Drawing from geometrical models and from common objects. Groups of not more than three geomet­ rical models or common objects. (14 hours). 4. Memory Drawing. Drawing common objects and simple structures from memory, (i hour). Candidates must take all four sections, and for a Pass must satisfy the examiners in three of them. Tbe standard and amount of knowledge required in Practical Geometry and Perspective is such as is contained in Sponton's Geometrical Drawing and Design, or Morris's Geometrical Drawing for Arts Students, and Petty's Elemen­ tary Perspective, Parts I. and II. For sections I mid 2 an H or HH pencil should be used,' tor sections 3 and 4 an HB or B pencil.

18. MUSIC— ' The certificate of the University Music Examination Board in Grade III. Theory and Practical, passed at the one examination, will be accepted. ' Note.—No harmonization or counterpoint other than the figuring of basses will be set. This standard can be reached by pupils at the age of 14 if tbey begin learning at the age of 10 and have regular practice of nt least 30 minutes daily up to 12 years and of 45 minutes daily from 12 !o 14 years. •DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOB THE SCHOOL LEAV­ ING EXAMINATION, DECEMBER, 1920, AND FEBRUARY, 1921. a—ENGLISH. Pass. (a) An essay of about 400 wordS, i.e., of about one page and a half. (b) One of Shakespeare's English historical plays, or one of his Roman plays.

(f) Syntax and historical accidence; prosody;, out­ lines of the history of the English language, as set forth in tbe second part of the English Grammar, by R. S. Wallace and T.-G. Tucker,

2. LATIN— Pass. (a) A book of Virgil's Aeneid and a portion of a - book of Livy, or their equivalent, together . amounting to not more than 2000 lines. The questions set will require attention to gram­ mar, scansion and subject-matter not less thorn to translation. (b) Translation at sight from comparatively easy Latin prose or verse similar in style to the- prescribed booka; Translation of a compara­ tively easy English passage into Latin prose. The outlines of Roman History to the death of Augustus, together with the geography- involved. Candidates will be required to pass in both (a) and (b). Special Books: — Livy XXI;. cc. 1-4. 6-15, 21-24. 26 38, (Trayes or Capes and Melhuish). Virgil: Georgics TV., 1-218, 315-erid (Page). . Ovid. Stories from tbe Metamorphoses (Slater), the , whole.

Honours- (a) A more advanced treatment of the Special Books- prescribed for the Fau examination. (b) Passages for translation at sight chosen from authors not earlier than Cicero or later than Tacitus. (c) -Translation from English into Latin prose. The > outlines of Roman History to the death of Augustus, together with the geography in­ volved. The outlines of the History of Latin- Literature and of Antiquities such as is con­ tained in Wilkins* Primer of Latin Literature- . and Gow's. Companion to School Classics, pp- 158-237, .257-262. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 467

3. GREEK—

(a) One of the easier Greek plays {omitting the lyrical passages), together with a portion of comparatively easy Greek prose in the Attic dialect, approximately equivalent to the Apology of Plato. The questions set. will re­ quire attention to -grammar, scansion and subject-matter not less than to translation. (b) Translation of a comparatively easy passage into Greek prose. Translation at sight from comparatively easy Greek prose. • , The outlines of Greek History to tbe death of 'Alexander, together with the geography in­ volved. Candidates will be required to pass in both (a) and (b). Special Books:— - Sophocles, Fhiloctetes (Jebb & Shuckburgh), Iambic Dialogue only.- Thucydides I., co. 89-118, 128-138. (Rise of the Athenian Empire, Macmillan's Ele­ mentary Classics.) Honours. (a) A more advanced treatment of the Special Books prescribed for tbe Pass examination. (b) Passages for translation at sight, consisting of verseand"prose in the Attic dialect. (c) Translation from English into Greek prose. The outlines of Greek History as for Pass. The outlines of the History of Greek Literature and of Antiquities, such as is contained. in Jebb's Primer of Greek Literature and Gow's Companion to School Classics, pp. 90-146, 263- 290. Special Books:— Sophocles, Pbilnctetes, the whole. Thucydides, as for Pass. The First Paper in both Latin and Greek will contain passages for Composition and Unseen. Translation; the 468 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. Second Paper will contain questions on the Special Books and on History (Pass), or History, Literature and Antiqui­ ties (Honours).

4. FRENCH— pau (a) Translation into English of passages of French. (b) Questions on the main outlines of French History > and Literature during the 17th, 18th, and 19th centuries with special reference to the life and works of: Moliere, La Fontaine, A. de Chenier, V. Hugo, Michelet. (c) A short original composition in French on a sub­ ject to be set. (Three alternatives to be given; one on an historical, one on a literary, and one on a general subject). (d) Translation into French of short, easy passages of English. (e) Dictation and Reading aloud. Honours. A more advanced examination in the above with the addition of the following authors to those in clause (b):— Comeille, Racine, Hon. de Balzac, Lamartine, Daudet; and of Conversation to clause (e). Note.—Candidates for honours will be required to show a fuller knowledge of the outlines of the History of France and of French Literature.

5. GERMAN— PaM (a)•Translation into English of passages of German. (b) Qaestions on the mam outlines of German History and Literature from 1740 A.D., with special reference to the life and works of:—Freytag, Goethe, Heine, Schiller, Uhland. (c) A short original composition in German on a subject to be set. (Three alternatives to be giveu; one.on an historical, one on a literary, and one on a general subject). - ' (d) Translation into German of short, easy passages of English. ( ) Dictation and Reading-aloud. LEAVING EXAMINATION 469

Honours. A more advanced examination in the above, with the addition of the following authors to those in clause, (b);— Geibel, Lessing, Morike, Wieland, Grillparzer; and of Conversation to clause (e). Note—Candidates for honours will; be required to show a fuller knowledge of the outlines of the History of Germany and of German Literature.

€. HISTORY— Po«8. 1. British History from 1688 to 1901. 2. Australian History to 1901. Honours. 1. British History from 1688 to 1901. 2. Special Study—"Warren Hastings" (Sir Alfred Lyoll). 3. Australian History to 1901, with more attention to constitutional points.

7 ALGEBRA*— Pass. As prescribed for the Intermediate Certificate (more advanced treatment), together with: — Involution and evolution, and extension of the for­ mer to positive and negative rational ex­ ponents; involution theorems (or "laws of indices"), and the transformation and sim­ plification of elementary surd*expressions. En sy equations involving surd-expressions. Elementary logarithm theory, so far as re­ quired for intelligent use of Tables. [Note. —Pupils should be taught that no adequate proofs of the logarithm theorems can be given at this stage, because of the fact that the logarithms commonly r-sed are not rational numbers.]

* Teachers are strongly urged to study carefully the " courses ot study' in tbe Handbook. 470 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

The binomial theorem for a positive integral exponent, with the necessary elements of permutations and combinations. Elementary series—with terms in A.P., G.P., H.P. Sum to infinity of geometric series. Easy applica­ tions of the geometric series to compound in­ terest, etc., and to the recurring decimal. Definition of ratio (of two physical quantities of the same kind) as a number; and of pro­ portional relationships between physical quantities of different kinds. The algebraic expression of the facts of joint proportional variation, direct and inverse. Graphs of the first degree expression a.ts+b, of tbe second degree expression a.x^ + o.x + c, and of the expression al(b.x + c). Graphical solution of equations by means of such graphs. Solution of simultaneous equations in two variables, in so far as this con be achieved by elemen­ tary reduction to quadratic equations in a single variable; also of simultaneous equa­ tions of the first degree in three variables. Elementary elimination. Remainder theorem. Relations between roots and coefficients, for the cases of the quadratic and the cubic. Theory of the quadratic equation. Examples and problems, based, so far as possible upon practical applications. Additional for Honours. More advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass, including a fuller treatment of permutations and combination^, and the principles of summation of finite series' with application to standard types. The method of " partial fractions. ' Elementary principles of inequalities, with appli­ cation to standard cases.. Elementary properties of determinants, and of con­ tinued fractions. Elements of the theory of equations. [Note-—The scope of this work in Higher Algebra is to be understood as excluding questions of intrinsic mathematical difficulty; in particular, theory of infinite series is definitely excluded. The subject-matter is con­ tained in the standard text-books on Algebra.] LKAVINO EXAMINATION. 471

«. GEOMETRY*— • •Paw. As prescribed for the Intermediate Certificate, to­ gether with:— Inscribed and escribed circles of triangle; circumscribed and inscribed circles of regular polygon;. construc­ tion for regular pentagon (using medial section). Ratio and proportion in Plane geometry: thestand- . ard elementary theorems on straight lines, triangles and parallelograms, and on circles; similarity of tt-ian^les and of polygons. Elements of solid geometry of straight lines and ' planes, and of polyhedral angles (but not of polyhedra, etc.). • Elementary properties of the parabola, dedncible directly from the focus - directrix definition. Constructions for tangent and normal at a point, and for tangents from a point. (Tangent should be defined as limiting secant, as early as - possible in the course on geometry). Easy deductions and problems, based so far as pos­ sible on practical applications.

Additional for Honours. Elementary modern plane geometry: the standard "centres" associated with tbe triangle. Sim- son's Line,, Ceva's and Menelaus' theorems. Common tangents, centres of similitude, and radical axis, of two given circles. The two types of systems of coaxal circles. Harmonic division. Pole and polar properties of the ' circle; and inverse points. Easy examples of -'• '. - loci, and of maxima and minima. Elementory theory of solid figures: parallelepipeds, prisms; tetrahedra, pyramids; the five regular polyhedra; circular cylinder, circular cone, sphere. Teachers are strongly urged to study carefully the " courses ot study in tbe Handbook. 472 ' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

Focus-directrix definition of the ellipse and the hyperbola, and the figures of these oonios. Deductions and problems, based so far as possible upon practical applications. [Note.—The subject-matter of the coarse in Geometry is to be foand in the standard text-books on Geometry.]

9. TRIGONOMETRY* t— Pass. Elementary Trigonometry os prescribed for the Intermediate Certificate, together with:— General definitions of the trigonometric (or "circular") functions, and their graphs. The inverse func­ tions and their graphs. General solutions of the equations cos0=cosa, sin0=sina, tan#=tana- ' and of trigonometric equations readily reducible to these. The addition-theorems (proved only for the case of two acute angles, of which the sum is on acute angle: the general truth of these theorems to- be assumed in so far as may be necessary), and the standard elementary theorems deduo- . ible from them. The triangle-identities and their inter-relations (in particular, the fact that aU are deducible from three). " Solution of triangles." with application to other plane, figures, using mathematical tobies; degree of approximation of results to be considered. Expressions for the radii of circumscribed, inscribed, and escribed circles. Circular measure, and the expressions for arc-length and area of a circle-sector. Problems, based, so far as possible, on practical applications.

Teachers are strongly urged to study carefully the " courses of study "• in tbe Handbook. tThe Syllabus for Honours in Trigonometry includes Analytical Geometry. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 473

Honours. • A. Trigonometry.— As prescribed for Pass, with more advanced treatment, including the principles of orthogonal projection, and the general proofs, by orthogonal projection, of the addition-theorems. Easy simultaneous trigonometric equations; and easy eliminations (of standard types). Extension of the addition-theorems, to three or more angles, and the use of the elementary Demoivre^identity to facilitate the process of expansion. Summation of finite trigonometric series; standard cases, and easy trigonometric examples of the principle of summation. - Problems, based, so far as possible, upon practical applications. B. Analytical Plane Geometry. The straight line and the first degree equation: standard elementary theory,.using rectangular cartesian coordinates. - Elementary locus problems. An introduction to the simplest forms of equa­ tions for the circle and the conic sections (ex­ clusive of any use of the general methods- applicable to second degree equations, and of theory essentially dependent on the application of such methods).

10. MECHANICS— Pass. Rectilinear motion with uniform acceleration. Composition and resolution of velocities and accelera­ tions. Newton's laws of motion. Composition and resolution of forces in one plane.' Simple examples on projectiles. Uniform motion in a circle. Momentum and simple examples on impact. 474 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

Work and power. Equilibrium of particle and rigid body under co-planar , forces. Simple machines. Centroids. Book for reference :— C. M. Jessop's Elements of Applied Mathematics. ' Honours. More advanced treatment of the work prescribed for tbe Pass examination. Book for reference:— S. L. Loney's Elements of Statics and Dynamics.

11. PHYSICS^ POM. As prescribed for the Intermediate Examination (more advanced treatment) together with :— The units of quantities specified in the syllabus are to be those belonging to the centimetre—gram —second system of units, and in the case of electrical quantities,, the electromagnetic and practical units. Additional units where required are expressly mentioned., Mechanics.—Uniform motion of a particle in a circle. Equilibrium under action of coplanor forces. Impulse. .Hydrostatics.—The surface of a liquid at rest. Centre of buoyancy. Hydrometer. Heat.—Pressure coefficient of a gss. Vapour Pressure. Dalton's Law of Partial Pressure. Humidity. Dew Point. Wet and dry bulb hydrometer. Heat a form of energy. The mechanical equivalent of heat. Conductivity. .Electrostatics. — Conductors and . non • conductors. Two kinds of electrification. Electroscopes. Induction. Faraday's ice-pail experiments. 'He elect'rophoras. Quantity of electricity. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 475

Electrostatic unit of charge. Potential. Unit of potential. Electromotive Force. The electric field. Lines of force. Distribution of electricity. Electricity resides on external surface of a con­ ductor. Capacity of a conductor. The centi­ meter unit of capacity., . The Electric Currents.—Voltaic cell. Electromotive force. Kesistance. Ohm's Law. Tbe ohm. volt and ampere. Resistance of conductors in series and in parallel. Wheatstone's Bridge. Electrolysis.—Faraday's laws. Magnetism.—Simple qualitative experiments with magnets. The law of force between poles. The magnetic field. Lines of force. Field due to magnet in the end on and broadside on positions. The electromagnet. The earth's field. Dip and declination, elementary treatment. Magnetic field due to a current.—Field due to long straight conductor. Field due to solenoid. Moving magnet galvanometer. Action of mag­ netic field on conductor carrying a current. Moving coil galvanometer. Electromagnetic Induction.—Lenz's and Neumann's laws. Experiments illustrating electromagnetic induction. The induction coil. One type of direct current generator (such as the shunt field drum wound armature) in moderate detail. The subject should be treated wherever possible from an experimental standpoint. Importance will be attached to a knowledge of simple applications of physical prin­ ciples in every-day life.

Practical Work. All candidates, except those from Schools in Class A and from other schools in which, after inspection by inspectors nominated by tbe Schools Board, the laboratories have been approved by the Board, must submit for examination their Laboratory note-books, which most contain a record of 20 independent experiments distributed over the work prescribed above. (See general note in Handbook con­ cerning Laboratory Note-books). 476 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

Honours. More advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass, but not including Hydrostatics and Heat. Mechanics.—The conical pendulum. 'Measurement of power. Simple Harmouic Motion. Period of a simple pendulum. Properties of Matter Young's modulus. Rigidity. Torsion in cylindrical rod. Heat.—Reflection and refraction of radiant heat. Analogies to light. The quality and quantity of Radiant Heat from a source depend on its temperature. Electricity.—Wimshurst machine. Condenser: Leyden Jar. Capacity. Capacity condensers in parallel and series. Condensing electroscope. The Potentiometer. Heat produced by passage of a current through a resistance. Elements of magnetic induction in iron. . Sound.—Elements of wave motion. Relation between frequency, wave length, and velocity. Graphic representation. Resonance. Propagation of sound: reflection. Velocity of sound. The physical basis of the sensation of loudness, pitch and quality. Pitch. Vibration of strings and organ pipes. Beats. Light-—Intensity. Propagation : reflection, refrac- . • tion. One method for determining the'velocity of light. Plane and spherical minors." Prisms. Single thin lens. Refractive index : 'detevmina- . tion by means of a prism and by total reflection. Dispersion. Thespeotrum. Astronomicalrefract­ ing telescope. Microscope.

• Practical Work. All candidates, except those from Schools in Class A and from other schools in which, after inspection by inspectors nominated by. the Schools Board, the laboratories have been approved by the Board, must submit for examination their Laboratory notebooks, which must contain a record of 10 independent experiments distributed over the work prescribed for honours. (See general- note in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note-books). LEAVING EXAMINATION. ' 477

12. CHEMISTRY-

POM. A fuller treatment of the work prescribed for tbe In­ termediate Examination, and a more detailed study of the following elements and their more important compounds with one another, in­ cluding the simple hydrocarbons, methane, ethylene, and acetylene : Hydrogen, chlorine, oxygen and sulphur; nitrogen and phosphorus; carbon and silicon; sodium and potassium; calcium and magnesium; copper, zinc, alumin­ ium, silver and iron. * The chemistry, but not the technical details, involved in the simpler methods of extraction of the elements mentioned above, and of tbe manufac­ ture of their more important products, such as glass, superphosphate, alkali, bleaching powder, coal-gas. The atomic and molecular theory. Avogadro's hypo­ thesis. Vapour pressure. Vapour density. . Dulong and Fetit's law of specific heats. Dalton s law of partial pressures. Henry's law of solubility of gases. Graham's law of gaseous diffusion. The determination of molecular weights by the vapour density method. The determination of atomic weights. The nature of salts, basic and acidic radicles, and the more obvious phenomena of electrolysis. Dia­ lysis. Honours. The details prescribed for the Pass Examination with • the addition of the following elements and their more important compounds; bromine, iodine and fluorine; manganese; chromium; arsenic and antimony,- tin and lead; barium; mercury ; gold; argon and helium; platinum; cobalt and nickel (tbe methods of extraction of man­ ganese, chromium, arsenic, barium, platinum, nickel and cobalr being excluded). -The natural classification of the elements (Periodical Law). .8Si 478 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

The chemical nature, sources and general properties of alcohol, acetic acid, oxalic acid; mineral oil; coal-tar, benzine ;' fat, soap, glycerine; the typi­ cal sugars, starch and cellulose. The principles of homologous series as exemplified by tbe paraffins, alcohols and fatty acids. The determination of molecular weights by the freezing-point and boiling-point methods. Reversibility of actions, gaseous dissociation, mass- action and equilibrium treated in a simple manner. Electrorytes and non-electrolytes: an elementary treatment of the ionic theory of electrolysis,'of "strong" and "weak" acids and of double decomposition. The scope - and standard of the work for Pass and Honours are indicated by the following book: Shenstorie's Inorganic Chemistry, edited by Currant.

Practical Exercises—Pass and Honours. All candidates, except those from Schools in Class A and from other schools in which, after inspection by inspector? nominated by the Schools Board, the laboratories have been approved by tbe Board, must submit for examination their Laboratory Note.-books. - (See general note in Handbook on Laboratory Note-books).

13. GEOGRAPHY— Pass. Note.—Candidates may sit for examination In sections A and B, or in sections A and C.

Section A. Astronomical— 1. Observational—Determination of: — (a) North and South Line by method of equal shadows. (b) Meridian altitude of the sun. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 479

(c) Latitude at equinoxes or solstices. (a) Solar time. (e) Approximate Longitude by comparison of Zone Time and Solar. Time. .(f) Variation in time and place of sunrise and sunset. 2. Rotation:—General proofs and effects of rotation. Shape of Earth— Curvature:—General proofs, including Bedford level experiment. JtfeteorotojicaZ and Physical— Hygromctric state of air, dew point; formation of dew, rain, hail, snow, etc. Study of Aus­ tralian weather charts as given in daily papers. Special study of Australian climate. Cyclones, Anticyclones, Barometric Gradient, Planetary circulation of the atmosphere and its causes. Aerial currents generally. Buys Ballot's Law of the Winds. Vegetation or Climatic Zones. Distribution and origin of Desert Areas (both general and special causes). Ocean currents, their distribution and relation to convection and wind currents respectively. The continental shelf, continental slope, ocean deeps and general configuration of the ocean bottom round Australia and the Pacific. Work of sea along cooste. Origin of different coast types, such as Atlantic. Pacific and modified Pacific types. Work of running water, activity of river in moun­ tain, valley and plain tracts. The Geogra­ phical Cycle of Erosion. Work of Ice. Nature and origin of glaciers and ice sheets, ice movement, ice erosion, deposits left by land and floating ice. Modifications of land sculpture in a region formerly glaciated. Study of Volcanoes, types of oones, distribution of active volcanoes, relation to weak parts of crust. Nature and distribution of Earthquakes. 480 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

Nature, origin and classification of the principal land forms— Plains:—Coastal Plains, Alluvial Flats, Flood Plains', Delta Plains, Lava Plains, Plains- of Marine Denudation, Peneplains. Plateaux:—Young and dissected. Basins and Lakes. , Mountain Types:—Volcanic, Residual, Al­ pine, Block, Highlands. The build of each continent, illustrated by sketch maps and cross sections. Commercial— - This must include a knowledge of the principal in­ dustries and manufactures of the countries of.the- British Empire, with Australia in fuller detail,. United States of America, Argentine, France, Germany, Denmark, Japan, and the various- factors influencing their development, i.e., physio­ graphic features, soil, climate, mineral wealth,, labour, harbour facilities, markets, etc.—The development of trade—Principal trade routes. Chief centres of industry, the distribution of the- principal railways and their relation to topograph­ ical features in the above countries. Political— The method of government of the countries specified- above. The boundaries of tbe chief countries of tbe world, their coincidence or departure from- natural topographical features.

Section B. Historical Geography— (i.) Outline of the travels of Columbus, Vasco da Qoma,. Magellan, Captain Cook, Livingstone and Scott, and a consideration of the geographical and commercial importance ot their discoveries. (ii.) Distribution of religions and of the races making up the chief nations of the world. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 481

, (iii.) The development of geographical knowledge of Australia, illustrated by maps of different • periods (see Australian School Atlas—Barthol­ omew and Cramp). (iv.) The development of cities of great historical im­ portance, with some knowledge of famous •historical buildings. (See list of cities below).

Section C. Use of Terrestrial Globes. Relation of a mop to a globe. Construction of maps by methods of Conical and Mercator's Projection. Variation in length of a degree. Mopping by means of the Plane Table—Contouring—Construction of . Relief Mope. Map reading, including the drawing of sections, and descriptions of the physiography of various areas. Books for reference:— Geography of Victoria—J. W. Gregory. Structural, Physical and Comparative Geography— J. W. Gregory. Senior Geography—A. J: Herbertson.- • Physical Geography—Tarr. Victorian Hill and Dale—T. S Hall. Australia, Physiographies! and Economic—Griffith Taylor. The Climate and Weather of Australia—H. A. Hunt, Griffith Taylor and E. T. Quale. Year Book of Australia (Latest Edition). The Practical Geography, Part I., Chapter I, and Fart II., Chapter 1 (for mapping work)—J. F. Unstead. Praettcol Exercises—Pass. All candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory and Field Note Books. (See general note in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note-books). Tbe note-books should give a record of the field excur­ sions and of the practical work perforuied by the candidate, but the following ore the minimum requirements that will be accepted:— 482 . DETAILS OF SUBJECTS

- Section A.—Descriptions, with sketches and sections of not less than five geographical field excursions (geological information should be included only when relevant to a discussion of the physical geography of the area described). Maps with cross-sections showing the build of each of the continents. Section B.—Descriptions, illustrated by mops and sketches of the following cities:— ' Jerusalem, York, Athens, Paris, Cairo. Section C— 1. A rough plane table survey of a school yard or other convenient area. 2. A contoured plan of some small area. 3. Rough contoured -topographic plans represent­ ing three ideal or real xreas of distinct and diversified relief, accompanied by descriptions of the physical geography of each area, and by topographic sections. Note.—Nos. 1 and 2 may be copies of maps surveyed under the supervision of the teacher, but each student must have taken a share in their production.

• Honours. Note.—Candidates may sit far examination is sec­ tious A and B or in sectious A and 0. The Examination for Honours will be set on the work prescribed for the Pass Examination, together with the following addi­ tional work: — Section A. Astronomical.— Foucault's pendulum experiment. Hit ape of the Earth.— Tetrahedral theory of the shape of the earth. Physical-— The continental shelf, continental slope, ocean deeps and configuration of the ocean bottom, and distribution of oceanic deposits through- LEAVING EXAMINATION. ' 483

out the world. Temperature of the sea at various depths in open oceans and in restricted seas, such as the Mediterranean. The pro­ duction of tides and their effects in .open oceans and along coast lines contrasted. The cycle of erosion in a humid climate. The cycle of erosion in an arid climate. Volcanoes—Types of eruptions, geysers. Earthquakes. Method of recording earthquakes by the seismograph. . Land forms. The characters, structures and origin of continental and oceanic islands. The structure of the Main Divide of Eastern Aus­ tralia, ' including Victoria, illustrated • by sketch maps and cross sections. A study of the development of rivers, with special atten­ tion to the history of the Tarra, Goulburn, , and Mitchell. Commercial— All the principal countries of the world must be treated on the lines set out for the countries specified under pass. Political. The methods of government of the principal coun­ tries of the world. The boundaries of the chief countries of the world, the shifting of •boundaries, their coincidence or departure from natural topographical features and the recognition of how far political boundaries correspond to or depart from racial and re­ ligious divisions.

Section B. Historical Geography-— (1) Outline of the travels of Marco Polo, Hudson. Speke, Mungo Park, Nansen, Peary and' Mawson. (2) The development of geographical knowledge and racial distribution, as illustrated by maps of different periods. 484 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. • (3) Tbe development of cities of great historical im­ portance, with some knowledge of famous- historical buildings. (See additional list of cities- below). Section C. A more detailed treatment of tbe work set for Pass.

Practical Exercises—Honours. All candidates must submit -for examination their Laboratory and Field Note Books. (See general note in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note-Books). - These note books may include those which have been submitted for Pass, but where the number of excursions, maps, etc., required for Honours exceeds those required for Pass, such additional work must be recorded in tbe note books submitted. The note books should give a record of the field excur­ sions and of the practical work performed by the candidate, but the following are the minimum requirements that will be accepted:— Section A.—Descriptions, with sketches and sections of not than less eight geographical field excur­ sions. Maps with cross-sections showing the buifd of each of the continents. section B.—Descriptions, illustrated by maps and sketches of the following cities:— Rome, Athens, Venice, Constantinople, Paris, Ant­ werp, London, York, Delhi, Jerusalem, Cairo. Section C.— 1. Rough plane table surveys of two. small areas. 2. Contoured plans of two small areas. 3. Rough contoured topographic plans representing six ideal or real areas of distinct and diversified relief, accompanied by descriptions of the physi­ cal geography of each area, and by topographic sections. LEAVING EXAMINATION. * 485-

14. GEOLOGY— Pats. Dynamical Geology—Geological agents which act upon rocks of the earth's crust considered especially as agents of denudation, transport and deposition. Movements of subterranean water and the posi­ tions of springs, wells and soakages. Organic and chemical agencies; their constructive effects as in the formation of carbonaceous and calcar­ eous deposits; their destructive effects as in the weathering of rocks, and the production of soils. Subterranean agencies—the movements of the ' earth's crust, including the formation of anti­ clinal and synclinal folds and overfolding; fault­ ing, including the formation of normal, stop, ridge and trough faults ; earthquakes and volcanoes; mountain building (simpler aspects). The chief types of igneous intrusions. Petrological Geology—the origin, composition, struc­ tures, classification and field relations of the more important stratified,, igneous and meta- morphic rocks. Historical Geology—A recognition of the prominent characters of the great -subdivisions of the invertebrates and .plants, and their valne when found in the fossil state. Methods of fossilization. Classification of the stratified rocks. The great geological groups, their- principal subdivisions, and the broad outlines of the life forms on the globe during their formation. An elementary knowledge of the. stratigraphy of Victoria. Mineralogy—The' physical properties, chemical com­ position and modes of occurrence of the common ores and rock-forming minerals. The types of Minerals, Rocks and Fossils to be studied are set out under practical exercises. Books for preference:— W. W. Watts' Geology for Beginners. Rutley's Mineralogy. 486 * DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

For Stratigraphy of Victoria, see chapters on Geology in the following books:— Federal Hand Book, British Association Meeting, 1914. Economic Geology and Minei-al Resources of Victoria, . Bulletin No. 34. Geological Survey of Victoria. For geological mapping and section work, consult:— A. R. Dwerryhouse, Geological and Topographical Maps (Edward Arnold).

f Practical Exercises. All candidates must submit for examination tl-eir Laboratory and Field Note-books. (See general note in Handbook on Laboratory Note-books). The note-books should give a record of the field excur­ sions and of the practical work performed by the candidate, but the following ore the minimum requirements that will be accepted:— (a) Descriptive notes with sections of not less than five geological excursions. (A) Not less than six geological diagrams or plans (not necessarily hand-drawn) representing dif­ ferent ideal or real areas bf diversified geology, , with geological sections and descriptions of the geology of eaeh area! . (c) Descriptive notes with sketches illustrating the physical characters, etc., of thefollowingMineriils, Rocks and Fossils :— .Minerals—Quartz, Orthoclase, Plogioclase, Biotite, Muscovite, Hornblende, Augite, Olivine, Calcite, Fluorite, Gypsum, Talc, Garnet, Kaolin, Aragonite, Magnesife, Graphite, Chiastolite, Hematite, Magnetite, Limonite, Pyrite, Chal- copyrite. Sphalerite. Galena, Casaitente, Stibnite. Rocks—Conglomerate, Breccia, Sandstone, Mudstone, Shale, Limestone, Slate, Chiastolite Slate, Mica-schist, Gneiss, Obsidian, Rhyolite, Quartz- porphyry, Granite, Pegmatite, Graphic-granite, Grano-diorite, Trachyte, Syenite, Dacite, Dio- i-ite. Basalt, Gabbro, Pumice, Tuff. LEAVING'. EXAMINATION. 487

fossils—Specimens of each of the following groups. The numbers in brackets after each group in­ dicate the number of genera to be studied: Foraiuinifera (2), Uraptolites (3), Corals (2), Kcliinoderms (2). Bnvcliiopods (3), Lamelli- bi-anrba (3), Gastropods (3), Cephalopoda (2), Crustacea (2), Fossil Plants (3).

Honours- The Examination for Honours will be set- on the work presented for the Pass Examination, together with the following additional work: — Dynamical Geology.— The mineralogical and chemical changes by which the valuable constituents of soil are made available for plant food. Formation of mono- clinal folds, reversed and thrust faults and the relationship between folds and faults. The chief types of mountains and the processes involved in mountain building. The chief types of igneous intrusions and their modes of origin. Historical Geology.— The great geological groups, their principal sub- divisions, including the recognition of ter­ restrial, lacustrine, marine, glacial and vol­ canic periods, and periods of great crustal activity, with special reference to Victoria. Economic Geology.— The nature, distribution and modes of occurrence • of important economic rocks, such as build­ ing and ornamental stones, road-mecals, etc. and of economic minerals, and ores, as repre­ sented in Victoria. , Books for reference: (See under details for "Pass.)

Practical Exercises Honours. All candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory and Field Note Books.' (See general note in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note Books). 488 DETAILS OF 'SUBJECTS.

- These Note Books may include those which hove been submitted for Pass, but where the number of excur­ sions, maps, etc., required for Honours exceeds those required for' Pass, such additional work must be recorded in the Note Books submitted. The note-books should give a record of the field excur sions and of the practical work performed by the candidate, but the foUowing are the minimum requirements that will be accepted:— (a)' Descriptive notes with sections of not less than eight geological excursions, (b) Not less than twelve geological diagrams, or plans (not necessarily hand-drawn) representing different ideal or real areas of diversified geology, with geological sections and descriptions of the geology of each area, (e) Descriptive notes with sketches illustrating the physical characters,etc.,of thefollcwingMinerals, Rocks and Fossils: Minerals—Quartz, Ortboclase, Labradorite, Opal, Biotite, Muscovite, Hornblende, Augite, Oli vine. Tourmaline, Calcite, Pluorite, Gypsum Talc, Apatite, Topaz, Garnet, Kaolin, Ara gonite, Magnesite, Cbabazite, Graphite Chiastolite, Pyrrhotite. Siderite, Hematite, Arsenopyrite, Molybdenite, Magnetite, Lim onite, Pyrite, Chalcopyrite. Malachite, Sphal erite. Galena, Cerussite, Cossiterite, Stibnite, Wolfram. Rocks—Conglomerate, Breccia, Sandstone, Mudstone, Shale, Limestone, Chert, Quortzite, Slate, Hornfels, Chiastolite Slato, Mica-schist, Talc- schist, Gneiss, Obsidian, Rhyolito Quartz- porphyry, Granite, Pegmatite, Graphic-granite, Grano-diorite, Trachyte, Syenite, Dacite, Dio rite. Basalt, Diabase, Gabbro, Pumice, Tuff. Fossils—Specimens of each of the. foUowing groups. The numbers in brackets after each group in dicate tbe number of genera to be studied, Foraminifera (2), Graptolites (4), Corals (2) Echinoderms (2), Brachiopods (4), LameUi branchs (4), Gastropods (4), Cephalopoda (3) Crustacea (2). Fossil Plants (8). LEAVING EXAMINATION. 489

15. BOTANY Pass; Revision and extension of work required for previous examinations. (1) Systematic: (a) A more advanced and comparative knowledge of the types set for the Intermediate examination with the addition of the following:—Bacteria, Yeast, Mncor Yeast, Marchantia or Lunuluria, one additional Vascular Cryptogam (Selaginella).

(b) Orchideoe, Rosaoeae, Cruciferoe, Solanoceoe, Labjatae, Proteaoeae, (2) Morplwlogy and Anatomy: • • A more detailed and comparative knowledge of the subject as outlined for the Intermediate examination, with the addition of:—Develop­ ment of adult tissues from a young cell; De­ tails of secondary growth; Growing points. (3) Physiology: A more detailed and advanced knowledge of the subject as outlined for the Intermediate exami­ nation, and in addition an elementary know­ ledge of Plant distribution, including the modes of dispersal of plants, and the elemen­ tary facts of distribution and of adaptation to environment (as in Ewart's Matriculation Botany). Practical • Exercises- (a), (b). As for the Intermediate examination, but in greater detail, and with a similar knowledge in regard to the microscopic and macroscopic structure of the types mentioned and tbe morphology of the additional orders. In the case of all natural orders, one example at least should be indigenous to or naturalised in Victoria. ' (c) In addition to the work done in the Intermediate course, a number of demonstrations, about 10, should be carried out, together with a greater variety of experiments in Plant Physiology, some of which must be personally performed. 490 .DETAILS OF SUBJKCT8.

The standard required in regard to Morphology and Physiology will be .approximately that of Lowson's Second Stage Botany. Teachers are recommended to consult more advanced Text-books (see ander Honours).

Honours. A more advanced knowledge involving a phylogenetic comparison of the reproduction of the members of the groups in section (1) (u) and (b), to be illustrated by the following or similar additional types: , Algae—Sphaerella, Vaucheria, Polysiphonia, or some other member of the Florideae. Fungi—rPythium, Saprolegnia, ' Claviceps (Ergot), Ustilago (Smut), Penicillium or Aspergillus (Eurotium), Puccinia, (Rust), -Lichens. Musci—A moss. Pteridophy ta—Lycopodium. Gymnospermae—A pine and a cycad. The following additional natural orders—Rutaceae, Epacrideoe, and Umbellifeioe, treated as for the Pass.

Practical Exercises. Additional experiments in plant physiology (about 10) should be carried out. , The standard required is approximately indicated by (1) Systematic Botany by J. W. Oliver, (2) Text Book of Botany by Strosburger, (3) Plant Physiology by Reynolds Green so far as the subjects are respectively dealt with in those works. Such larger works as " The Natural History of Plants," by Kerner and' Oliver, " Plant Distribution," by Schim- per, and " Physiology of Plants," by Pfeffer, are recom­ mended for reference by teachers in regard to matters incompletely discussed in the smaller works. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 491

16. ANIMAL MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY— Revision and extension of work required for previous examination. Pass. (a) Macroscopic Morphology: The alimentary, circulatory, excretory and respira­ tory tracts, also central nervous system of shark, frog and rabbit; life history of the Frog, in outline. (b) Microscopic .Morphology: The histology of the epithelial, muscular, nervous, and connective tissues, of the alimentary, cir­ culatory, excretory and respiratory tracts, the skin and its appendages, spinal cord, cerebel­ lum and organs of special sense of a mammal. (o) Human Physiology: The material basis of the body; the blood, the con­ tractile tissues, the conducting tissues, the vascular mechanism, lymph ana tissue fluids, the mechanisms of digestion, respiration, excre- - tion, metabolism, ductless glands, special

The approximate standard for the above is that indicated by Huxley's Physiology and Schafer's Essentials of Histology. Teachers are recommended to consult more advanced works (see Honours list). (d) Practical Exercises- Each candidate will be required to produce satisfactory evidence that he has had demonstrated to him (1) dis­ sections of shark, frog, and rabbit, Ulastrating the macro­ scopic feoture mentioned above; also dissections of the mammalian heart and eye; (2) sections illustrating the microscopic morphology mentioned above; and. (8) simple test-tube experiments in digestive juices. AU candidates mast submit for examination their Labora­ tory Note Books (See general note in Handbook on Labora­ tory Note Books). .34 492 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

• Honours- A more detailed and advanced knowledge of the above and in addition candidates must produce satisfactory evidence that they have (1) dissected the frog, mammalian heart and eye, and (2) performed simple test-tube experi­ ments on blood and also experiments not involving any complex apparatus on the special senses. The Standard is indicated by Bainbridge and Menzies' - -"Essentials of Physiology." Teachers are recommended to consult more advanced works, such as Halliburton's Handbook of Physiology (lost edition) and Plimmer's Prao- . tical Organic and Bio-Chemistry. All candidates must submit for examination their Labor­ atory Note-books (see general note in Handbook on Labor­ atory Note-books).

17. AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE— Pass. A fuller and more detailed treatment of the work set out for the Intermediate Examination and in addition the following subjects:— Water Requirements of farm crops. Absorption and transpiration of water by plants. The food requirements of plants. The conditions requisite for plant growth. Natural fertility and sterility. The relative importance of nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and calcium in Australian agriculture. Unit values and the calculation of the commercial value of fertilizers. , Bacteria—Structure and reproduction of a typical form, e.g., B. sublilis. Relation to soU fertility Symbiosis, root tubercle bacteria. Nitrification and fixation of nitrogen. Bacteria in relation , to milk supply. Life history of a typical mould fungus (e.g. Muuor) The main facts regarding rust, smut, Irish blight. Hethoda'. of cultivation of wheat, potatoes, maize, lucerne and mangels. Maintenance and im provement of pastures. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 493

The main facts regarding the liver flake, codlin. moth, and cutworm caterpUlar. The anatomy of the foot of the horse and the udder of the cow. The elementary physiology of digestion and absorption in horse and cow. The circulation of the blood. The principles of feeding. Balanced rations. Composi­ tion and uses of the chief form food staffs.

Honours. A more detailed treatment of these subjects, with in addition: - Classification and physical and chemical characteris­ tics of the chief types of Victorian soils. - The principles of plant breeding, and the laws of variation and heredity. Text Books.—Reference may be made to the chapters (bearing on the subject in Fream — Principles of Agriculture; and Patterson—Nature in Farming. Special articles in the Victorian Journal ef Agriculture, in Howell—Soil Problems in Wheat growing, and in Cherry- Victorian Agriculture, may be read. Assistance in the -experimental work will be found in the Text Books of 'Warren and of McLennan' and Refshaage. All candidates must submit for examination their Labora­ tory Note-books. (See general note in Handbook on Labora­ tory Note-books).

18. MILITARY SCIENCE— Pass. I.—Written Examination- Papers will be set on the subjects, either separately or -combined. Candidates will be required to illustrate their answers by the regulation conventional signs, and by sketches drawn to scale. Marks will be given for draughtsman­ ship. Sketches, etc., will be executed in pencil-and coloured chalks. . .34* 494 ' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

(a) Todies. The subject matter contained in Infantry Training, 1814, Chapters IX. to XIV. and Chapter XVI., and in Field Service Regulations', Part I., 1909 (Reprint 1914), Chapters I. and III. (Sections 24, 25, 26, 27, 30, 31 and 32 only); or corresponding matter contained in any subsequently issued manuals.

(6) Military Engineering. The subject matter contained in the Manual of Mili­ tary Engineering, 1911, Definitions Pages 1 to 6, Chapters I., II., III. (omitting Section 23), V. (omitting Sections 39, 40 and 41), VI. (Sections 42 and 48 only), VII. (omitting Sections 62 and 56), VIII., IX. (Sections 59, 61, 62, 63 and 67 ' only); or corresponding matter contained in any subsequently issued manuals.

(c) ifop Beading and Field Sketching.. The subject matter contained in Manual of Map Reading and Field Sketching, 1912 (Reprint 1914), Chapters I. to VI., Chapter VIII.; or corresponding matter contained in any sub­ sequently issued manuals.

II.—Practical and Oral Examination. (o) Drill. At least two qaestions wiU be asked on each of the foUowing sub-heads:— Infantry Training, 1914— (1) Squad DriU—with and without arms; (2) Section, Platoon, and Company Drill; (3) Extended Order Drill; (4) Battalion DriU j Ceremonial—Guards; or corresponding matter contained in any subsequently issued manuals. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 496

(b) Musketry. Subject matter contained in Musketry Regulations, Fart I., 1909 (reprint, 1912, with amendments) :— (1) Chapter II., Sections 2, 3, 5. 9,10,11.12; (2) Chapter II I., omitting trajectory tobies; (3) Chapter IV., Sections 36 54, A3, 64; (4) Chapter V., Sections 65-67; or corresponding matter contained in any subsequently issued manual. Honours. A more extended treatment of the pass work.

19. DOMESTIC SCIENCE AND ARTS— Pass. Section A. Botany.—A revision of the work as outlined for the In­ termediate Examination, with the addition of o study of the general structure (without detail) of a typical Angiosperm, (b) a general account of the following natural orders, with sole reference to the species of economic importance:— Compositae, Rosooeae, Cruciferae, Leguminosae, Gromineoe, Labiotae, Umbelliferae, Lilia- ceoe, Solanoceoe. Section B. Anatomy and Physiology.— (a) A more advanced knowledge of the work as set for the Intermediate Examination. The standard, to be such as is indicated in' Huxley, 1916 edition. (b) Rabbit—Anatomy of the alimentary, circulatory, excretory, and respiratory organs. Section 0. The Chemistry of Foods and Dietetics.—Revision and elaboration of the work as set for the IntermediateExami- notion. The standard to be such as indicated in Osborne's -{Elements of Animal Physiology, chapters 4, 5, 6, and 18, pp. 133-135. 496 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS..

Section D. General.-*- (a) The more common animal parasites transmissible to man by-meat and vegetables. (b) Occurrence and importance of household animal pests. (c) The origin- and care of animal and vegetable fabrics in common use. (d) Common poisons and their antidotes. (e) The first treatment of common accidents (not fractures) and simple illnesses. (f) Organisation of work and finances of household. Practical Exercises. All candidates must submit for examination their laboratory notebooks. (See general regulation re labora­ tory notebooks.) The candidates must give evidence that they have (1) examined personally at least one example of a plant of economic importance belonging to the orders - named in Section A.; (2) seen demonstra­ tions of the dissection' of the frog and rabbit, as far as concerns the digestive, circulatory, ex­ cretory and respiratory systems; (3) performed not less than 6 additional experiments illustrative of Section C. (Intermediate Examination), and of Section C. (Leaving (Examination); (4) spent at least 21 hours (under super­ vision) in the practical application of the principles in­ volved in cooking, laundry-work and house-cleaning. (It is suggested to candidates that a coarse in First Aid and in Nursing will be very helpful, either before or after this Examination, although not necessary for this Examination.) Honour*. Candidates wiU do the Pass paper, and on additional one.on; the same syllabus, consisting of qaestions demand­ ing a more advanced treatment. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 49.7

20, COMMERCIAL PRINCIPLES— f'ass. Lav. Contracts, Agency, Partnerships, Negotiable Instru­ ments, Insurance, Bills of Lading and Charter Parties, Trustees, Arbitration, Affreightment. Text Books recommended: — Munro and Pease, Commercial Law. BirreU, Rights and Duties of Trustees. Honours. The Pass Work and in addition the foUowing statutes:— Insolvency Act, Companies Act.

21. COMMERCIAL PRACTICE— Pass. The standard of examination will be that of the Inter­ mediate Examination of the Incorporated Institute of Accountants, Victoria, and of the Federal Institute of Accountants. (o) Bookkeeping. Errors in Trial Balance; Adjustments before closing Books—Payments in advance and Rebating; Single Entry problems; Conversion of Single Entry into Doable Entry; Statement of Affairs; Accounts Current—-(i.) Calculation of interest by use of tables; (ii.) Calculation of interest by products; Self-balancing ledgers and adjustment accounts; Partnership ac­ counts—formation and dissolution—interest on capital—salaries—and division of .profits; contingent assets and liabilities; preliminary expenses; difference between Profit and Loss Account and Receipts and Expenditure State­ ment. (6) Auditing. Introductory, Errors of Principle, Technical Errors, Fraud, Continuous Method, Periodical Method, Scope, Starting Point, Receipt of ' Money, 498 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.

Vouchers, Bank Pass Book, Wages, Petty Cash, Postings, Additions, Verification of Journal Entries, Verification of Existence and Valuation of Assets.

Honours. (a) Book-keeping. Company" Accounts—Capital—Preference Shares, Cumulative and non-cumulative—Deferred Shares; Special books—Shore Register, Ap­ plication and Allotment Books, Transfer Jour­ nal; Distinction between Reserve Funds and Reserve—Reserves, Reserve Funds, Sinking Funds, and methods of creating same; Depre­ ciation; Executorship Accounts; Deficiency Accounts; Royalty Accounts and Redeemable Dead Rente; Branch Accounts. (b) Auditing of a higher standard than for pass.

22. DRAWING— - N.B.—See Note before the Intermediate Syllabus for Drawing. Pass. 1. Practical Geometry as in the Intermediate Exam­ ination, together with conic curves and simple spirals; isometric drawings; simple exercises in graphic arithmetic. (1 hour.) 2. Perspective. More advanced than in the -Inter­ mediate Examination: Treatment including elementary problems in the projections of sunlight shadows. '(1 hour.) 3. Drawing plant forms from nature in pencil, brush or pen, at the choice of the candidate. (11 hours.) 4. Memory Drawing. Subjects of o more difficult character than that of the Intermediate Examina­ tion. (4 hour.) Candidates must take all four sections and must satisfy the examiners in three sections. All candidates must pass in section 4. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 499

Honours. A higher standard in the subjects of the Pass examina­ tion together with 6. Drawing in light and shade from simple models or objects or from casts of plant forms or ornament (2 hours), - or The appUcation of simple plant and animal forms.to decorative design, for borders, panels and the like. (2 hours.) Candidates must indicate en their entries whether they take Light and Shade or Design. They must take all five sections and must pass in four ot them. All'candidates must pass in section 4. Should a candidate faU to obtain Honours, to obtain a pass he must pass in three oat of the sections 1 to 4, including section 4. ' The standard and amount of. knowledge required in Practical Geometry is such as is contained in Spanton's Geometrical Drawing and Design. Harrison and BoxandoU, Practical Plane and Solid Geometry is recommended for graphic arithmetic and isometric projection. For sections 1 and 2 an H or H H pencil should he used. For 2 and 5 water colour may be used.

.23. MUSIC— The certificate of the University Music Examination Board in Grade II. Theory and Practical, passed' at the one examination, wiU be accepted. Note.—To reach this standard a pupil should have at least 3 hours' practice per day and 11 hours' lesson per week, from 16 to 18 years of age, - FACULTY OF ARTS.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE. HELD IN THE' FOURTH TERM, 1920, AND- FIRST TERM, 1921.

THE ORDINARY DEGREE.

GREEK—PART I.— Translation from Attic Greek. Translation into Greek.Prose. Greek Accidence and Syntax. Special Subjects of Examination. Xenophon, Cyropaedia I. (Sbuckburgh). Euripides, Ipbigenia in Tauris (Jet-ram), omitting 1089- 1152, 1234-1283. LATIN—PAKT I.— . "' . Translation from Classical Latin. Translation into Latin Prose. Latin Accidence and Syntax. Special Subjects of Examination. Virgil, Aeneid VIII. (Calvert). Livy I. (Freeman), Preface and cc. 6-48. GREEK—PART II.— ' Translation from Classical Greek. Translation into Greek Prose. Greek Accidence and Syntax. Outlines (Primer) of History. Antiquities And Literature of Classical Greece. . ARTS. 601'

Special Subjects of Examination. Aeschylus, Choephori (Sidgwick). Aristophanes, Wasps (Graves), lines 1-1264. Plato, Protagoras (Adam). Demosthenes, PhUippics I.-III. (Davies). LATIN—PART II.— Translation from Classical Latin. Translation into Latin Prose. Latin Accidence and Syntax. Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Litera­ ture of Classical Rome.

Special Subjects of Examination. Martial, Select Epigrams (Stephenson), Books VI.,. VII.. VIII. Propertius, Select Poems (Postgate) Seneca, Select Letters (Summers), pp. 1-47. Livy I. (Freeman).

GREEK—PART III.— As for Greek, Fart II.; but candidates will take ther paper on the prescribed books set for Greek, Fart II., in the Coarse for the Degree with Honours. LATIN—PART III.— As for Latin, Part II.; but candidates will take the- paper on the prescribed books set for Latin, Fart U..,- m the Course for the Degree with Honours.

THE SCIENCE OP LANGUAGE.— The general principles of the Science of Language. Text-book: — Tucker—Introduction to the Natural History of Language (Blackde). COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.— The general principles of Comparative FhUology,. and the Comparative Grammar of the Greek and Latin Languages. -502 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1*20.

ANCIENT HISTORY— The History of Athens and Sparta. The History of the Roman Repablic. The Foundation of the Roman Empire. Books recommended:— Bury—The History of Greece. Zimmern—The Greek Commonwealth. Botsford and Sihler—Hellenic Civilisation. Mommscn—Tbe History of Rome, Book III., BooklV. Rook V., exclusive of chapters 2 and 3. - Tucker—Life in Ancient Athens.

HISTORY OP THE BRITISH EMPIRE—PART I.— The General History to lfi88 with special regard to the period from the commencement to 1066. Books recommended in addition to the various references to other works given in the Lectures:— Innes—History of England and the British Empire, Vols. I. and II. - WiUiamson—Foundation and Growth of the British Empire, Farts I. and II. (Macmillan). Hodgkim—Political History of England, Vol. I. (Longmans). The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle and Bede's Ecclesiastical History of England (Everyman's Library). Note—The three lost mentioned books should be read together.

HISTORY OP .THE BRITISH EMPIRE—PART II.— The General History from 1088 to the present time, with special regard.to the period from 1784 to 1816. Books recommended in addition to the various references to other works given in the Lectures:— -Trevelyan—England under the Stuarts, chapters xiv. and xv. AKT3. 503>

Grant Robertson—England under the Hanoverians. Grant Robertson—Select Statutes and Cases—especially pp. 260 to 311 (Methueu). Marriott—England since Waterloo. Egerton—History of British-Colonial Policy. Soott-=-Short History of Australia (Oxford University Press) Holland Rose—Pitt and the National Revival (Bell). Holland Rose—Pitt and the Great War (Bell).

EUROPEAN HISTORY— The general history of Europe from 1492, with special regard to the period from 1815 to 1914. " History of America in so far as it touches the general - history, e.g., the Monroe .Doctrine, etc. History of the European Colonies. Books recommended:—" Acton—Lectures on Modern History. Bassett—History of the United States (Macmillan). Hayes—Political and Social History of Modern Europe (Macmillan). Mowat—Select Treaties and Documents illustrating- the European States System. P. A. Ogg—Economic Development of Modern Europe- • (Macmillan). Grant Robertson and Bartholomew—Historical Atlas of Modern Europe (Oxford). POLITICAL ECONOMY— The scope and method of Economics. Outlines of development of Economic theory. Industrial Efficiency and Organisation of Industry. Value. Tbe distribation of Wealth between individuals and classes. Causes of vari­ ations in wages, profits, interest and rent. Unimproved), values. Monopolies. Money. Currency. Bonking. Credit. Foreign Trade. Taxation. The Tariff. The New Pro­ tection. Consumption. Outlines of Economic development of Great Britain and ot Australasia and of industrial legis­ lation. Trades Unionism and the New Unionism. Oatlinea ot some Socialistic theories. Present day tendencies,. Elements ot Statistics. -504 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Books'recommended in addition to the various reference* to other works given in the Lectures:— Smart—Theory of Value. Sykes—Banking and Currency. Clare—A. B. C. of the Foreign Exchange. • Qide—Principles of Political Economy. Marshall—Economics of Industry. McGregor—Evolution of Industry. Hearn—Plutology. Hobsen—Industrial System. I So far as Nicholson—Principles of Political Economy treated Adam Smith—Wealth of Nations in • Commonwealth Year Book [ Lectures.

•SOCIOLOGY.— Subject matter and methods of Sociology. Develop­ ment of sociological theory. (1) Social Evolution Early history of society. Development of social institutions and ideas. Underlying principles af Western civilisation. Growth ot modem Democracy. Evolution ot the social problem. The present social struc­ ture. .(2) Principles and Problems of Sociology Stan­ dards of social progress. Analysis ot social > institutions and social forces. Principles ' of communal development. The individual, , the family, and the State. Relation of soci­ ology to ethics, psychology and education. The present task of social science,. .Hooka recommended: — Myres—Dawn of History. Jenks—History of Politics. - Sidgwick—Development of European Polity. Brett—Government of Man. •Giddings—Elements of Sociology. •Dealey and Word—Text book of Sociology. •Hayes—Introduction to the Study of Sociology. Bagehot—Physics and Politics. Ely—Evolution of Industrial Society. •May be used as a text-book. ARTS. 505

IENGL1SH—PART I.— (a) History of early English Drama. (6) Some of the principal English writers:— Shakespeare—The Merchant of Venice and King Lear. Milton—Paradise Lost, Books I. and II. (Oxford Edition). Pope—Epistles to Dr. Arbuthnot and to Augns- - tus. Johnson—Life of Milton. Wordsworth—Prelude, Books I.-IV. and VI. Poems ot the Imagination (Oxford Edition, pp. 183-244). Sonnets dedicated to National In­ dependence and Liberty (Ox­ ford Edition, pp. 303-329). Coleridge—Literary Criticism (Edit, by MackaU: Oxford Press). Keats—Odes, Eve of St. Agnes and Hyperion. Golden Treasury, Books II. and IV. (c) English Grammar, descriptive and historical. (Wallace and Tucker). H. W. Fowler and F. G. Fowler—The King's English.

«NQLISH—PART 11.— (a) Shakespeare—Richard LI., Henry IV., Parte I. and II., Julius Caesar, Antony and Cleopatra. Students are. requested to use The Clarendon Press "Edition ot Holinshed's Chronicles, Richard II., and Henry V. (Wallace and Hansen), and Four Lives from .North's Plutarch (R. H. Can, Clarendon Press). : (6) Milton—Paradise Lost, Books HI.-TV., Samson Agonistes, Select Prose (Scott Library Edition). Burke—American Speeches, Letter - to a Noble Lord. Wordsworth—Prelude, Books XII.-XIV., Shorter Poems as studied in class. The Convention of Cintro (Clarendon Press Edition). Coleridge, Literary Criticism (Edit:, by Mockail: Clarendon Press). 506 - DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1020.

(e) Tennyson—In Memoriom. Browning—Men. and Women. Carlyle—Sartor Resartus. Matthew Arnold—Culture and Anarchy. (a) English Grammar, Descriptive and Historical (WaUace and Tucker). History of the English Language (Emerson). Students are recommended to use the Clarendon. Press- Editions oi Shakespeare/'MUton and Wordsworth.

ENGLISH, PART III.— (a) As for Fart II. (6) Shelley—Prometheus Unbound, Julian and Mad- dalo, Hellas, The Witch of Atlas, The Odes, Epipsyohidion, Peter BeU the Third, other Poems, as studied in class. The Defence of Poetry. (e) Malory—Le Morte d'Arthnr. Tennyson—Idylls of the King. William Morris—The Defence of Guinevere, and! other Poems. (Longmans, Green and Co.\ Swinburne—Tristram of Lyonesse, and The Tale of Balen. The Poems of Barns and Matthew Arnold con­ tained in the English Parnassus, and such other of their poems os may be studied in class. Matthew Arnold—Essays in Criticism (First and- Second Series). Stadente are recommended to use Sointsbury's Short History of English Literature.

OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH AND PHILOLOGY— The texts prescribed for Honours, Port I., 1918, and Honours, Part II., 1919. Beowulf—Lines 1889 to end. Andreas. Elene. Old English, Middle English, and Modem English. Grammar. ARTS. 507

FRENCH—PART I.— (a) Theory and practice of Phonetics (based on Passy's Sons du franeais). (b) Composition,Translation ot sight and Grammar. (c) Reading, recitation, writing from dictation, and conversation. (d) Outiinns of the- History of French Literature XLXth century). Petit de Julleville. Outlines of the History . of French Language. Petit de Julleville. Outlines ot French History (XLXth century—from 1804). E. Lovisse.

FRENCH—PART II — (a) Transcription into and from phonetics. (b) Composition, Translation at sight. Essay Writing and Grammar. (c) Reading, recitation, writing from dictation, and con­ versation. (d) Outlines ot History ot French literature from the XVth' Century to 1891. (Petit de JulleviUe.) Ontlines of French History (XVth, XVIth. XVTIth and XVIIIth cent, to 1804). E. Lavisse. History of the French Language (F. Brunot).

La litterature francaise au XXVQIe Siecle (P. Albert). 1 Vol. La Camedie de Moliere (G. Lorroumet). 1 Vol. MoUere et Shakespeare (Stopfer). 1 Vol. La Fontaine et ses fables (H. Taine). 1 Vol. Mottres d'autretois et Maitres d'aujourd' hui (V- Giraud). 1 Vol.

FRENCH—PABT III.— (o) Outlines of the History of French Language and Literature from the origins to the end of the XLXth century. (F. Brunot and Petit de Julleville). (b) Outlines ot the History ot France from the origins to the end ot the XlXth century (E. Lavisse). (c) Linguistique (Phonetique, Morphologic, Formation and Vie des mote, Syntoxe). (d) Dictation, reading. (e) Composition, translation. Essay writing and tran­ scription into and from Phonetics, (t) The Oxford Treasury of French Literature. (Vol. I.) A. G. Latham, M.A. 1 Vol. La Htterature francaise des Origines a la fin da XVIe Siecle (P. Albert). 1 Vol. La Poesie (P. Albert). 1 Vol. La Prose (P. Albert). 1 Vol. En lisant les beaux vieux liv.res (E. Faguet). 1 Vol. La famille et les amis de Montaigne (Stopfer). 1 Vol. Les Maitres de l' heure (V. Giraud). 2 Vols.

GERMANT-PART I. Phonetics, reading aloud, and composition. Grammar recommended: ' Lnboviiis—Port II. Translation at sight. Victor—Die- Aussprache des Schriftdeutschen. Schweitzer-Slmonnot—Lesebuch fur Quarto und Tertia. Gromaire—Deutsche Lyrik I. Freytag—Soil and Uaben. Die Journalisten. Schiller—Gescbichte des Dreiszigjahrigen Krieges. Scheffel—Ekkehard. , A itTs. 509

GERMAN—PART II. Grammar (recommended: \ Curme—Grammar of the German Language). Gromaire—Deutsche Lyrik II. History of German Literature from 1748 to 1848, after Vogtlin—Gescbichte der deutscheu Dichtung. Schweitzer-Simonnot—Lesebuch fur Sekunda, Prima und Oberprima. 0 ' Schiller—Wallenstein. Goethe—Egmont. Tasso. Iphigenie. Faust (Part I.). SchiUer and Goethe—Correspondence (ed. Robertson). Bielschowsky—Goethe (Vol. I. or II., about 50 pages).

GERMAN—PART III. Essay Writing. The History, of the German Language (Behaghel). Bachmann—Mittelhochdeutsches Lesebuch. VSgtlin—Gescbichte der deutschen Dichtung. Schiller's Dramas. Goethe—Faust (Farts I. and II.)..

PURE'MATHEMATICS—PART I. Elementary Functions.—The elementary, algebraic, trig­ onometric, exponential, logarithmic and hyperbolic functions, with their graphs and derivatives maxima and minima; elementary processes of integ­ ration ; the definite integral as the limit of a sum. . Text-book recommended:— Introduction to the Calculus, Gibson. A knowledge of tbe Mathematics prescribed for School Intermediate Examination, together with the theory- of similar triangles, wiU be assumed but no- use will be made of the binomial or other infinite series'.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART II. Plane Analytical Geometry.—Elementary methods and their appUcation to simple curves.

.89A ' 510 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1020.

Calculus.—Expansions, small coiTections, approximations to roots, functions of more than one variable, maxima and minima, plane infinitesimal geometry, single and double integrals, arcs, areas, volumes, moments, differential equations of the first order, linear differential - equations with constant co-. efficients. Text-books recommended:— Coordinate Geometey, Loney. Infinitesimal Calculus, Lamb.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART III. Soliil Geimelry.—Elementary methods and their applica­ tion to simple curves and surfaces. Calculus.—Solid infinitesimal geometry, multiple integ­ rals, ordinary and partial differential equations. TVxt-books recommended-.— Coordinate Geometry, Bell. Introductory Course in Differential Equations, D. A. Murray.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I. Kinetics.—Elements of uniplonar kinematics. Elements of uniplonar dynamics of particles and rigid bodies. Statics.—Transformation of forces on a rigid .body; equili­ brium ot solid pieces and simple combinations. • Hydrostatics.—Pressure of fluids under gravity-, equili­ brium and stability of floating bodies; tension in cylindrical and spherical shells; pressure in rotating liquid and along a stream line in inviscid liquid. Text-books recommended:— Elementary Dynamics, R. J.' A. Barnard. Elements of Statics, S. L. Loney. Elementary Hydrostatics, W. H. Besaat.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART II. Statics—General theories ot equilibrium and stability. Flexible and elastic linear systems. Analysis of stress and strain, with simple applications. AKT3. .511

Dynamics—The analytical treatment of the motions of particles and- rigid bodies in two and three dimen­ sions, including the elements of gyrodynamics. Text-books recommended:— Statics, H. Lamb. Treatise on Dynamics, A. and J. G. Gray.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PARI- lit. Elements nf Potential Theory. Elements of Hydrodynamics and Elasticity. Elements of Theory if Electricity. Text-book recommended:— Webster—Dynamics of Particles, Rigid, Elastic and Fluid Bodies.

PSYCHOLOGY. LOGIC AND ETHICS— I. Psychology.—Psychological Standpoint and Me­ thods. Analysis ot Mental lite: Sensibility and Purposive Behaviour. Stages of Mental De­ velopment : The Perceptual and Ideational Levels. Memory and Imagination, Thought, Language and Belief. II. Formal Logic—The Logical Standpoint. The Problem of Definition and Division. Tbe Laws of Thought. Formal Statement and Inference. Fallacies. Limits of Formal Logic. III. Ethics—The Psychological Basis. The Problem of Freedom. Stages in Moral Development. Society and' the Individual. The Nature of Virtue. The Moral Judgment. <

Books recommended:— Stout—Manual of Psychology, 3rd ed. (omitting Bk III., Part II.. and Bk, IV.. ch. 6-10). James—Text-Book of Psychology (ch. x., xi. and xxii.-xxvi). Gibson—The Problem of Logic (introduction, and sect. v. to ix.). Johnston—An Introduction to Ethics. 512 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

As a helpful Introduction to the Study of Psychology, James' Talks on Psychology and Life's Ideals may be speciaUy recommended. N.B.—A special discussion class in Psychology will be held daring the first term. A similar class for the practice of exercises ia Formal Logic wiU be started during the second term. [Note.- A Course in Experimental Psychology was given in 1919 and it is hoped it will be continued in 1920. It consists of 2 lectures a week (with demonstrations and experiments). It will be open to all students ot the University and also to others. Students attending the course may obtain a certificate, but, unless otherwise determined, and notified, tbe course wUl not count as a subject towards a Degree. The following topics will be dealt with:— The standpoint of Psycho-physics or Psycho-physiology. The experimental methods and apparatus. The senses. Expression of the emotions'. Reaction- experiments. Differential Psychology (study of differences in individual capacity and of types). The attempts to measure different grades of intelligence ("general intelligence" tests, etc.). The correlation - methods. The association- methods. Meaning and progress of psycho­ analysis].

ADVANCED ETHICS— There will be no course in Advanced Ethics in the year 1920. DetaUs for the course in 1921 wiU be published with the details for that year.

HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY— (i.) The History of Greek Philosophy from Tholes to Plato. Text Book :— Burnet: Early Greek Philosophy. ARTS. 513

For further reading or reference, in addition to the'class­ ical treatises of Zeller and of Gomperz, tbe following are apeciaUy recommended:— Burnet—Prom Thales to Plato. Adorn—The Religious Teachers of Greece. Plato—Phaedo. (ii.) The History of Modern Philosophy from Descartes te Kant, with special reference to Descartes, Spinoza, r,eibniz, Locke, Berkeley and Hume, Books recommended for reading or reference: Descartes—Philosophical Works (Haldane and Ross). Spinoza—Ethics (Every Man's Library). Leibniz—The Monadology, etc. (R. Latta). Locke—Essay . concerning Human Understanding. Books ii. and iv. (Open Court Publishing Company.) Berkeley—Principles of Human Knowledge. (Open Court Publishing Company.) Berkeley—-Three Dialogues between Hylos and Fhilonous. (Open Court Publishing Com­ pany.) Hume—Enquiry concerning Human Understand­ ing. (Open Court Publishing Company.) ' As an introduction to the Course on its modem side, Rogers' Student's History of Philosophy, pp 223-439, may lie recommended.

ADVANCED LOGIC— The Pass Course will include the following subjects:— (1) The Scope-of Logic. Logic and Methodology. (2) Outline of Scientific Method -.— . (a) The Spirit of Science and tbe Inductive Movement. Fact and Low: The Induc­ tive Principle. (b) Essentials of Induction : (i) Classification, (ii) Hypothesis and Verification, (iii) Induction and Deduction. 614 DETAILS OK SUBJECTS, 19S0.

(o) Inductive Methods: (i) Causal Explanation in Science. Ob­ servational and Experimental Me­ thods. The Elimination of Error, (ii) Probability and the Elimination of Chance. Theory of Statistical Averages. (3) Methodological Problems: (a) Postulates, Axioms and Definitions: their meaning and logical justification. The place of fiction and assumption in scien­ tific method. Tbe Ground of Induction. (b) Inference and Intuition. The Logical Foundations of Mathematica and Physics. Books recommended: — (a) for study— -Gibson—The Problem ot Logic (sect, x.-xiv.). Poincare'—Science and Hypothesis. ' (b) for further reading or reference— Sigwart—Methodology (Logic, Pni-t III., the intro­ duction and § § 72, 73, 78, 95-97a, 100, 105). l^arl Pearson—The Grammar of Science, Vol. I. (ch. 3-6, 8, 9, 10). Young—Fundamental Concepts of Algebra and Geometry. Royce—Article on "The Principles of Logic" in The Encyclopaedia of Philosophical Sciences— Vol. I. on " Logic." As a stimulating introduction to the whole subject, "Discovery," or the "Spirit and Service of Science," by R. A. Gregory, may be recommended.

METAPHYSICS— Courses will be delivered in the following subjects:—' (i.) The Problem, of Mind and Body. . Text Book.— McDougall—Body and Mind (ch. vii.-xxiv.). A UTS. 515

Further recommended -.— Bergsun—Matter and Memory. Consult also:— Sherrington—The Integrative Action of the Nervous System. i (ii.) The Theory of Knowledge. The lectures will discuss: — (i) The Intuitionistic and Critical solutions of the Problem, (ii) The dialectic of Hegel. (Hi1) Recent developments. Books recommended: — Hegel's Logic (tr. Wallace), ch. i-vi. and ch. vii. §§ 84-98. Eucken—Main Currents of Modern' Thought (sect. A and B). A. Seth.—Hegelianism and Personality. (iii.) Modern Philosophical Movements. The lectures will embody: — (a) An enquiry into the nature and function of the intellect, with special reference to the views of Bradley, Bergson and the Fragmatists. (b) An examination of Bradley's Theory of the Absolute. (c) A consideration of Bergson's view of the concept and his metaphysical method of Intuition. Books recommended: — Bradley—Appearance and Reality. Bergson—Creative Evolution. Stewart—Critical Exposition of Bergson'sPhilosophy. Aliotta—Idealistic Reaction.against Science. 516 . • DETAILS OF 8UBJKCTS, 10-20.

THE DEGREE WITH HONOURS.

A. SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY. The Course for the Degree with Honours consists ot the following subjects: — Greek, Parts I., II., and III. Latin, Parts I., II., and III. The Science of Language. Comparative Philology. The details of study and examination for the Annual Examinations are as follows:—

GREEK—PART I.— Translation into Greek Prose and Iambic Verse. Translation from unprescribed Greek authors. Greek Accidence and Syntax. Special Books: — (a) The books prescribed tor Greek, Part I. {Ordinary Degree), viz.: Xenbphon, Cyropaedia I. (Shuokbut-^h). Euripides, Iphigenia in Tauris (Jeimm), omitting 1089- 1152, 1234-1283. (b) Additional. Aristophanes, Wasps (Graves), lines 1-1264. Demosthenes, Philippics 1., II. (Davies).

LATIN—PART I.— Translation into Latin Prose, and Heroic and Elegiac Verse. Translation from unprescribed Latin Authors. Latin Accidence and Syntax. Special Books: — (a) The books prescribed for Latin, Part I. {Ordinary Degree), viz.: Virgil, Aeneid VIII. (Calvert). Livy I. (Freeman), Preface and.cc. C-4S. ARTS. 517

(b) Additional. Martini, Select Epigrams (Stephenson), Books VI., VII.. VIII. Seneca, Select Letters (Summers), pp. 1-47.

GREEK—PART II.— More advanced prose and verse composition and on- prescribed translation. Special Books: — Aeschylus, Choephoi-i (Sidgwick). ' Aristophanes, 'Wasps (Graves), 1-1264. Plato, Protagoras (Adam). Demosthenes, Philippics I.-III. (Davies). Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Litera­ ture ot Classical Greece. LATIN—PART II.— More advanced prose and verse composition and un­ prescribed translation. Special Books:— . Martial, Select Epigrams (Stephenson), Books VI., VII., VIII. Propertius, Select Poems (Postgate). Seneca, Select Letters (Summers), pp. 1-47. Livy, Book I. (Freeman). Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Litera­ ture of Classical Rome.

GREEK—PART III. AND LATIN—PART III.— Prose and verse • composition; unprescribed transla­ tion; History, Antiquities and Literature of Classical Greece and' Classical Rome. The Special Books will be tbe same as for Greek, Part II., ana Latin, Fart II., respectively. The Examinations in these subjects will be included in the Final Examination • for the Degree with Honours. THE SCIENCE OF LANGUAGE— The general principles of the Science of Language. Text-book :— Tucker—Introduction to tbe Natural History of Lan­ guage (Blackie). 518 ' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY — The general principles ot Comparative Philology, aud the Comparative Grammar of the Greek and Latin Languages. Candidates fox the Honours Degree in Classical Philo'o y must at Annual Examinations pass both Greek, Part I., and Latin, Part I., before they proceed to Greek, Part II., and Latin, Part II., and both Greek, Part II., and Latin, Part II., before they proceed-to Greek, Part III., and Latin, Fart III.; Science of Language must be token before Comparative Philology. Greek, Part I.. Latin, Fart I., and Science of Language shall be the subjects in either the course for the Ordinary Degree or the course for the Degree with Honours. Candidates will be examined in the subjects ot Greek, Fort ILL, Latin, Part III., and Comparative Philology at the Final Examination for the Degree with Honours.*

The Final Examination in Classical Philology will consist of the following ten papers: — 1. Prescribed Books (Greek). 2. Prescribed Books (Latin). 3. Translation into Greek Prose and Verse. 4. Translation into Latin Prose and Verse. 5. Comparative Philology. 6. Green Unseen Translation. 7: Latin Unseen Translation. 8. The History of Greek and Latin Literature. - 9. General Paper. 10. Special Subjects. Papers 1-5 will be set at the December Annual Examination, and Papers 6-10 at tbe March Examina­ tion.

*Candidates who pursue the normal three years' course will naturally take Greek, Part I., and l.atln, Part I., in the first year, and Orrek, Part II., and Latin, Part II., in the second year, and Science of. Language in either the first or the second year. Candidates who Intend ultimately to proceed to the Diploma of Education are advised to take Physchology, Logic and Ethics along with Greek, Part I., and Latin, Part I.; In other oases Ancient History, English, Part r., or other suitable subject might be taken with advantage. Candidates are requested to consult with the Professor of Classical Philology at the beginning ot their course. ARTS. 519

1-2, Prescribed Books, and 3-4, Translation into Greek and Latin .Prose and Verse, as set out for Greek, Part ID!., and Lotin, Part III., under the Details of Studies for the Degree with Honours. 6, Comparative Philology, as set out under the Details of Studies for the Degree with Honours. 9, The General Paper, will include: The Outlines of (Greek and Roman History; the chief Greek and 'Roman Antiquities; Classical Geography; the Ele­ ments of Palaeography; Greek and Latin Syntax. 10, Special Subjects: — (a)- The Early History of-Greece, as treated in lectures. Recommended for reference:— Homer's Iliad and Odyssey. ' Bury—History of Greece (co. I.-II.). Hall—Ancient History of the Near^East. Burrows—The Discoveries in Crete. Hawes—Crete, the Forerunner ot Greece. '. Murray—The Rise of the Greek Epic. Myers —The Dawn of History. Tsountos and Manatt—The Mycenaean Age. (b) Imperial Rome, as treated in lectures. Recommended for reference' :— . Herodian—-Ab Excessu Divi Marci. Suetonius—Lives of the Caesars. Dill—Roman Society from Nero to Marcus Aurelius. Friedlander—Roman Life .and Manners under the Early Empire. Mau-Kelsey—Pompeii; Its Life and Art. Tucker—Life in the Roman World-of Nero and St. Paul. The following books are suggested, but not prescribed, 'Inose marked with an asterisk are specially recommended for practical use in the first instance— For Comparative Philology and the Creek and Latin Lan­ guages— Brugmann—Kurze. Vergleichende Grammotik der I. G. Sprochen. 520 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Roberts—Introduction to Greek Epigraphy. Thompson—Greek and Latin Paleography. Rutherford—New Fhrynichus. •Gildersleeve and Lodge—Latin Gfammor. Lindsay—The Latin Language. Riemann and Goelzer—tiramiuaire Compared du grec et du latin (especially tbe 'syntax). Fur Creek and Roman Literature—

•Murray—Ancient Greek Literature \ •.f„_„.i0 •Maokail—Latin Literature J Manuals. Mobaffy—History of Greek Classical Literature. •Haigh—The Attic Theatre. Uaigh—The Tragic Drama of tbe Greeks. •Tyrrell—Latin Poetry. Jebb—Growth and Influence of Greek Classical Poetry. Butcher—Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art.

Fur History and Antiquities— •A Companion to Greek Studies (Whibley). •A Companion to Latin Studies (Sandys). Dictionary ot Greek and Roman Antiquities (Smith). Gilbert's Greek Constitutional Antiquities. Ramsay (and Lanciani)—Manual of Roman Antiquities Becker's (Becker and GdU)Gallns (1883), and Charikles. •Zimmern—The -Greek Commonwealth. •Fowler—Social Life at Rome in the Age of Cicero. •Tucker—Life in the Roman World ot Nero and St Paul. DU1—Roman Society from Nero to Marcus Aurelius. •Mau—Pompeii: Its Life and Art. •Gulick—The Life of the Ancient Greeks. •Tucker—Lite in Ancient Athens. Gardner—Grammar of Greek Art. •Bury's History of Greece "j •Heitland—Short History of- the Roman f „' •• Republic. C manuals. Felham's Outlines of Roman History ) AUTS. 521

B. SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND POLITICAL . SCIENCE. - The Course of the Degree with Honours consists ot the following subjects: — Ancient History. British History, Part I. British History, Part II. European History. Political Economy. Sociology. Modern Political Institutions. In addition to the subjects' of this school, candidates must select one additional subject from the courses for the ordinary, or the honour degree, so as to complete a total of eight subjects. The details of study and examination are those pre­ scribed for the several subjects for the Ordinary Degree together with the following: —

1. ANCIENT HISTORY— History of Greece and Rome, with special reference to the History of the Empire from Augustus to Constantine the Great. Essays will be required. Books recommended: — Gibbon, chs. 1-16. Dill—Roman Social Life from Nero to Marcus Aurelius.

2. BRITISH HISTORY, PART 1— The English Colonies to 1688. Early Colonial PoUcy. The Foundations of British India. Books recommended:— Tyler—England in America (Harpers). Andrews — Colonial Selt-Govemment, 1652-1689 (Harpers). G. L. Beer—Origins of the British Colonial System. G. L.- Beer—The Old Colonial System (Macmillan). 522 DKTAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Egerton—History of British Colonial Policy, Bks. I. and II (Methuen). P. E.' Roberts—History of India (ch. 1-6) (Oxford). Hart—American History told by Contemporaries, Vol. I.; Era of Colonization, 1192-1689 (Macmillan).

3. BRITISH HISTORY. PABT n.— The British Colonies from 1688; the American Re­ volution; British India; the Dominions and Crown Colonies in the Nineteenth and Twen­ tieth Centuries. Books recommended:— v J. A. Doyle—The Colonies Under the House ot Han­ over (Longmans). G. O. Trevelyan—The American Revolution (Long­ mans). O.' M. Dickerson—American Colonial Government, 1696-1765. G. L. Beer—The Old Colonial System (Macmillan). G. L. Beer—British Coloniol Policy, 1754-1765. A. B. Keith—Responsible Government in the Domin­ ions (Oxford). A. B. Keith—-Imperial Unity and the Dominions (Oxford). A. B. Keith—Select Speeches and Documents on British Colonial Policy, 1763-1917 (Oxford). L. Curtis—The Problem of the Commonwealth (Macmillan). , E. G. Wakefield—Art of Colonisation (Oxford). W. W. Hunter—History of British India (Long­ mans). Alfred Lyall—Rise and Expansion of British Domin­ ion in India (Longmans). Ramsay Muir—The Making of British India (Man­ chester University Press). Bourinot—Canada, 1760-1900 (Cambridge). W. P. M. Kennedy—Documents of the Canadian Constitution (Oxford). C. P. Lucas—South and East Africa (Oxford). C. P. Lucas—West Africa (Oxford).. G. W. Eybers—Select Constitutional Documents, il­ lustrating South African History. - AIMS. 523

C. P. Lucas—The Mediterranean' and Eastern Colonies (Oxford). C. Atchley—The West Indies (Oxford). G. M. Theal—South Africa (Unwin). R. C. Mills—Colonisation of Australia. A. W. Jose—Australasia (Dent). Gyles Turner—History of Colony of Victoria (Long­ mans).

4. EUROPEAN HISTORY— . (a) The middle ages in general outline, and especi­ ally the era ot Charles the Great. Books recommended: — Adorns—Civilisation daring the Middle Ages. Emcrton—Mediaeval Europe. Davis—Mediaeval Europe (Home University Library). Bryce—Holy Roman Empire. Hodgkin—Charles the Great (Miacmillan). Davis—Charlemagne (Putnam.). Gibbon—Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire. (b) Discovery of the New World, Foundotion and Government of Spanish, Portuguese, French, Dutch Colonies; German Colonial PoUcy; European Expansion in the Nineteenth Cen­ tury. Books recommended: E. J. Payne—History of the New World Called . America (Oxford). Raymond Beazley—Prince Henry the Navigator (Putnam). John Fiske—The Discovery of America (Macmillan). E. J. Payne—European Colonies (Macmillan). Sir Arthur Helps—The Spanish Conquest of America. Thwaites—France in America (Harper). Bourne—Spain in America (Harper). Malleson—-History of the French in India. Morris—The History of Colonisation (Macmillan). Sir Harry Johnston — Colonisation of Africa (Cam­ bridge). Ramsay Muir—The Expansion of Europe (Constable). Scott Keltic—The Partition of Africa. 524 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

The following chapters of the Cambridge Modern- History are also recommended for study: — Vol. i., chapters 1, 2, and IS; vol. iii., chapters 9 and 19; vol. iv., chapters 24 and 25; vol. v.v chapter 22; vol. vi., chapters 6 and 15; vol. via., chapters 1 to 7, and chapter 21; vol. ix.,. chapter 23; vol. x., chapters 8, 9, 10, 21 and 23; vol. xi., chapters 26 and 27; vol. xii.,. chapters 15, 16, 20 and 25.

C. POLITICAL ECONOMY— In addition to the work prescribed tor the Ordinary Degree, the following Books are recommended: — Cunningham—Growth ot English Industry and: Commerce in Modern Times, ports 1 and 2. Commerce in Modern Times, Parte I. and II. Toynbee—Industrial Revolution. Seligmann—Incidence and Shifting of. Taxation.. Hobson—The Industrial System. Ingram—History of Political Economy. Ghosh—Co-operative Credit. The articles Economics and Sociology in the- eleventh edition of the Encyclopaedia Britan- nica.

6. SOCIOLOGY— The work for the Ordinary Degree will be extended- by farther study ot (I) Development of Sociological Theory (2) Methods of Social Amelioration. Books recommended for further reading: — • Small—General Sociology. Spencer—Principles of Sociology. Russell—Principles of Social Re-Construction. Maclver—Comman ity. Hobson—Work and Wealth. Wallas—Human Nature in Politics. WaUas—The Great Society. Maine—Popular Government. Eobhouse—Democracy and Reaction. ARTS. 525

Addams—Democracy and. Social Ethics. Le Bon—The Crowd. Bluntchili—Theory of the Modern State. Urwick—Philosophy of Social Progress. Dicey—Law and Public Opinion in England. Ritchie—Darwinism and Politics. Deoley—The Family in its Sociological Aspects. Rousseau—The Social Contract.

7. MODERN POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS— This course is given in alternate years and will not be given in 1920. Candidates wUl be examined on the work prescribed in this subject for Candidates for the LL.B. Degree. They must extend their reading so as to include the substance ot Lowell's Government of England and Anson's Law and Custom of the Constitution, a general view of the Constitution of the Commonwealth of Aus­ tralia such as ia to be found in Bryce's Studies in His­ tory and Jurisprudence, and a special knowledge of the Organisation of the Commonwealth Government, as con­ tained in Moore's Commonwealth ot Australia, Part ILL, chapters i.-vi-. Candidates should also have a general acquaintance with the chief features of the principal modern systems of government, such as may be obtained from "Modern Constitutions in Outline," by Leonard Alston, or " The Stote," by Woodrow Wilson. In International Relations and Law, Candidates must study the work prescribed in the details for the LL.B. Degree. For modern developments ot opinion as to " International Government," candidates are referred to ' Alison Phillips's Confederation of Europe, and an article by the same author in the Edinburgh Review for July, 1917, entitled Notional Federations and World Federa­ tion; Brailsford's League of Nations; Woolf's Inter­ national Government; and the following articles in the " Round Table"—Nationalism and Liberty (December, 1914). The Foundation ot Peace (Jane, 1915), The End ot War (September, 1916), The Harvest ot the War (De­ cember, 1915), The War for Public Right (March. 1916), .36i 526 DETAILS OF SUBJI'.CTS, 1920.

The Principle of Peace (June, 1916). The Victory thot Will End War (March. 1918), Three Doctrines in Con­ flict (March, 1918). In Modern Political Ideas candidates must study the development of political theory and institutions since the French Revolution, particularly in relation te modern democracy. .Reference may be mode to the following works:— Bentham—Theory of Legislation. J. fc. Mill—Representative Government. Maine—Popular Government. W. E. H. Lecky— Democracy and Liberty. Pollock—Introduction to the History ot Science of ' Politics. Hearnshaw—Democracy at the Crossways. (Mac­ millan). Macy & Gannaway—Comparative Free Government Hobhouse—Democracy and Reaction. Ramsay Muir—National Selt-Government. Hobson—Democracy after the War. WaUas—The Great Society. Ritchie—Darwinism and Politics. McKeohnie—The New Democracy and the Constitu­ tion. H. A. L. Fisher—The Republican Tradition in Europe. • W. Graham—English Political Philosophy. M. Ostrogorski—Democracy and the Organisation of Political Parties. Candidates must be placed in the Class List at the Annual Examinations in Ancient History, British His­ tory, Parts I. and II., European History, and Political Economy. The Examinations in Sociology and in Modern Political'Institutions will form part of the Final Examination only, and the Final Examination in Modern Political Institutions will be held at the same time as the December Annual Examinations.

The Final Examination in the School of History and Political Science .will consist of the following eight papers:— - ARTS. 627

1. Ancient History.* 2. British History, Part I. 3. British History, Fart II. 4. History of the Middle Ages. 6. Modern European History. 6. Principles of Political Economy. 7. Sociology. 8. Modern Political Institutions.

C. SCHOOL OP PHILOSOPHY.

The Course for the Degree with Honours, consists of the following subjects: — . Psychology, Logic and Ethics. Advanced Logic. Advanced Ethics. Sociology. History of Philosophy. \ Metaphysics. In- addition to the subjects of this School, candidates must select two subjects from the course for the Ordin­ ary or the Honours Degree, so as to complete a total of eight subjects. The details of study and examination in the subjects of the Course are as follows: —

* The Final Examination In Ancient History will consist ot one paper on the subject chosen tor special study. Candidates will select one ot two alternative subjects: - (a) The Greek World between the death ol Alex­ ander and the Conquest by Rome; or (b) The Roman Empire from Augustus to Justinian. Books recommended :— (a) Polybius (Shuckburgb's translation). Beran—House at Selsucus. Ferguson—Hellenistic Athens. Mohatfy—Greek Lite and Thought from the Aire ot Alexander to r-he Roman Conquest. « Mahaffy—The Empire of the Ptolemies. (b) Arnold—Roman Imperialism. Gibbon—Decline ana Fall ol the Roman Empire (Chaps. 1-46). Dill —Roman Society from Nero to Marcus Aurelius. Dill—Roman Society in the last century ot the Western Em pire Bury—History ot the later Roman Empire. 528 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1620.

1. PSYCHOLOGY, LOGIC AND ETHICS— (a) The Lectures in the subject tor the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional. The Theory-ot Instinct and Emotion. Books recommended:— McDougoll—Social Psychology (ch. i.-ix.). Hobhouse—Development and Purpose (ch. i.-v.). Shand—The Foundations of Character. Drever—Instinct in Man, 2. HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY— (a) The Lectures in the subject for the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional. A fuller and deeper discussion ot subjects dealt with in the lectures for the Ordinary Degree. In the First and Second Terms special attention will be given to the phUosophy of Descartes, Spinoza, and Locke, and in the Third Term to the phUosophy ot Kant. ^Essays will be set from time to time. Books recommended:— (i) Descartes—Philosophical Works (Haldone and . Rose). , N. Smith—Studies in Cartesian Philosophy. Kuno Fischer—Descartes and His School. Windelband—History of Philosophy, Part TV. Spinoza—Treatise on God and Man (A. Wolf). Spinoza—Ethics. Pollock—Spinoza: His Life and Philosophy. Joachim—A. Study of the Ethics of Spinoza. Locke—An Essay Concerning Human Understand­ ing (Campbell Eraser). Adamson—-History of Philosophy, Fart 2. J. Gibson—Locke's Theory of Knowledge, and Its Historical Relatione. (ii.) Kant—The Critique of Pure Reason: Trans­ cendental ^Esthetic and Transcendental Logic, First Division (tr. Meiklejohn.) ARTS. v- 529

E. Oaird—The Critical Philosophy of Kant. (In­ troduction and Bk. I., ch. 1-2.) Kemp Smith—A Commentary to Kant's "Critique of Pure Reason." Prichard—Kant's Theory of Knowledge.

3. ADVANCED ETHICS— N.B—The Course in Advanced Ethics will not be given in 1920. Details for the Course in 1921 will be published with the details for that year.

•4. ADVANCED LOGIC— (a) The lectures in the subject for the. Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional: — The main topics of discussion in Essays and in class will be the foUowing: —. (i.) Time, Space and Motion, (ii.) The Doctrine of Energy, (lii.) The Logic of Vitalism. Books recommended for study: Kant—Critique of Pure Reason : The Transcen­ dental Aesthetic. Poincor£: The Foundations of Science. • Driesch : History and Theory ot Vitalism, Part II. Johnstone: The Philosophy of Biology, ch. 6-8. Books recommended for further reading ox reference: — Lotze—Metaphysics. Bk. I., ch. 6, and Bk. II., ch. 1-5, 8. Taylor—Elements of Metaphysic, B.k. HI. Adiotta—The Idealistic Reaction Against Science, Part II. Brood—Perception, Physics and Reality. Bergson—Time and Free-Will, ch. 2. Primgle-Pattison—The Idea of God, ch. 18. 19. Parker—Self and Nature, ch. 6-7. Henderson—The Fitness of the Environment. Osborn, H. F.—The Origin and Evolution of Life. T. S. Huxley: The Individual in the Animal Kingdom. 530 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Dorbishire—An Introduction to a Biology (Esp~ pp 44-77, 90-103. 144-161, 261-280). Life and Finite Individuality (Aristotelian Society Symposia). Merz—The History ot European Thought in the- 19th Century, Vols. I. and II. • 5. SOCIOLOGY*— See under School of History and Political Science.

6. METAPHYSICS— (a) The Lectures in the subject tor the Ordinary , Degree. (b) Additional. The special topic for discussion and Essay work; in 1920 will be "The Self and the Absolute: A Critical Consideration of Personality, Its- Idea and Its Ideals." Books recommended:— Kant—The Critique of Pure Reason: The Trans­ cendental Dialetic. Taylor—Elements of Metaphysics. Bk. IV. James—Essays in Radical Empiricism. Bergson—Time and Free WiU, ch. 2. Bergson—An Datroduction to Metaphysics. Ward—The Realm of Ends. Hobhouse—Development and Purpose. Bosanquet—The Value and Destiny of the Indi­ vidual. May Sinclair—A Defence of Idealism. A. Seth—Hegelianism and Personality. Pringle-Pattison—The Idea of God. ' Collingwood—Religion and Philosophy, Part II- Morton Prince—The Dissociation of a Personality. For further reading and reference:— Kant—The Critique of Judgment. E. Caird—The Evolution- of Theology in the Greek: Philosophers. : z, £. 'Philosophy Honours Students in their second year'mny find it useful In view ol their course in Sociology to attend lectures In Political Economy, ARTS. 531

McKellar Stewart—A Critical Exposition of Berg- son's PhUosophy. Royce—The World and the Individual, Vol. LT. Deussen—The Philosophy of the Upanishads. Tagore—Personality. Eucken—The Meaning and Value of Lite. Wildon Carr—The Philosophy oi Benedetto Croce- N.B.—Special literature on special aspects ot the main topic will be prescribed later. Candidates should take Psychology, Logic and Ethics as prescribed tor the Degree with Honours, together with two additional subjects at their first Annual Examination. Candidates who at the beginning of their second year decide on taking the School ot Philosophy, but have not already passed in Psychology, Logic and Ethics, as prescribed for the Degree with Honours, must do so at their second Annual Examination. If tbey have already taken that subject as tor the Ordinary Degree they will ba examined in the additional work only. History of Philosophy, together with Advanced Logic or Advanced Ethics, should be taken at the second Annual Examina­ tion. Candidates tor the Degree with Honours will be examined in the subjects of their third year at the Final Examination. Any candidate qualified to sit for the Final Examinations in March, 1921, may sot - take' the Examination in Advanced Logic at the higher grade at the Annual Examination is December, 1920. In Sociology and in Metaphysics, there will be no papers set at the higher grade at the Annual Examina­ tion. The Final Examination in Philosophy will consist of the following six papers: — Psychology. Logic. Moral Philosophy. Sociology. History of Philosophy. Metaphysics. 532' DKTAILS OK SUH.II--.CTS, K«O.

PSYCHOLOGY. The Examination in Psychology will deal with Psychological Principles and Analyses, with special reference to the works of James, Mitchell, Ward and Stout. The following works should be studied: — James—Principles of Psychology (ch. 4-10, and 21, 22). Stout—Manual of Psychology (Bk. III., Part II.). Stout—Analytic Psychology (Bk. II., ch. 1-8). . Mitchell—The Structure and Growth of the Mind (Part II.). Word—Psychological Principles.

LOGIC. The examination will be upon the requirements for the Course of Advanced Logic, as set out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours.

MOBAL PHILOSOPHY. The Examination will be upon the requirements for the Course of Advanced Ethics, os set out under the Details ot Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours. ( fide Calendar for 1919).

SOCIOLOGY. The Examination will be upon, the Requirements for the Course of Sociology, as set out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours.

^HISTOBT OP PHILOSOPHY. The examination will be upon the requirements for the Course ot History of Philosophy, as set out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours.

METAPHYSICS. The Examination will be upon the requirements for the course of Metaphysics, as set out under . the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours. Aim. 533'

D. SCHOOL OP MATHEMATICS. The course for the Degree with Honours consists of the following subjects: — Pure Mathematics, I., II., III. Mixed Mathematics, I., II., III. In addition to the subjects of this school, candidates must select two additional subjects for the Course for the Ordinary or the Honour Degree, so as to complete a total of eight subjecte. The additional subjects must he selected -from the subjects for the Ordinary Degree or from some School for the Degree with Honours, except that when Natural Philosophy, Part I., has been taken as one additional subject. Natural Philosophy, Fart II., from the course for the Degree of Bachelor of Science may be. selected as the second additional subject. The details of study and examinations in the sub­ jects'of the Course are as follows: —

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART I.— Algebra, including elementary theory of equations. Plane Trigonometry. Elementary Analytical Geometry of two dimensions. Elements of Differential and Integral Calculus.—The funda­ mental processes of differentiation and integration; successive and partial differentiation; tbe appl ication ' ot Taylor's theorems to the expansion of functions; maxima and minima of functions' ot one variable; the integration ot explicit functions of one variable. Text-books recommended :— Treatise on Algfebra, Charles Smith. Plane Trigonometry, Todhnnter and Hogg. Conic Sections, C. Smith. Infinitesimal Calculus, Lamb.

'ORE MATHEMATICS—PART II.— Analytical Geometry of two dimensions. Elementary Analytical Geometry of three dimensions. differential Calculus. 534 DETAILS OF SUBJKCTS, I»2O.

Integral Calculus.—The determination ot lengths, areas and volumes; the differentiation of an integral; definite and multiple integrals; the differentiation and integration of series; differential equations of the first order, and linear differential equations of the second order. Text-book recommended:— Good inate Geometry, Bell.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART III — Solid Geometry. Integral Calculus. Functions of a Complex Variable. Fourier's Series and Integrals. Differential Equations. Calculus of Variations. Text-books recommended:— Mocrobert—Functions of a Complex Variable. Differential Equations, A. It. Forsyth. Fourier's Series and Integrals, H. S. Carslaw.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I.— The elements' of Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics and Hydrostatics, with tbe use of Vector Algebra. * - Text-books recommended:— Elementary Dynamics, S. L. Loney. Elementary Statics, J. Greaves. Elementary Hydrostatics, J. Greaves. Vector Analysis, Gibbs-Wilson. •

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART II.— A fuller treatment of the.subject for Pass, with' the use Vector Analysis. Elements of Potential Theory, Elements of Hydrodynamics. AKTS. 535

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PAKT III.— Theory of Potential. % The Higher Dynamics. Hydrodynamics. Elasticity. Electricity. Text-books recommended:— Rigid Dynamics, E. J. Routh. Analytical Dynamics, Whittaker. Dynamics, Webster. Meconique Rationnelle, Appell. Hydrodynamics, H. Lamb. Theory of Elasticity, A. E. H. Love. Treatise on Electricity, Pidduck. Candidates must be placed in the Class Lists at the Annual Examinations in Pure Mathematics, Farts I. and II., and Mixed Mathematics, Parts I. and II. Pure Mathematics, Part III., and Mixed Mathematics, Part III., -will be subjects of the Final Examination only. The Final Examination in the School of- Mathema­ tics will consist of the subjects prescribed for the Degree with Honours in Pure Mathematics, Parte I., II., III., and in Mixed Mathematics, Parts I., II., III.

E. SCHOOL OF ENGLISH. The Course for the Degree with Honours consists of the following subjects: — (a) English, Part I. (b) English, Part II. (c) English, Part III. (A) Old and Middle English and Philology. (e) General and Textual Study of Shakespeare. (f) General History of English Literature. In addition to the subjects of this School,' the candi­ dates must select two additional subjects from the Course for the j Ordinary or Honours Degree, so as to complete a course of eight subjects. The details' of study and examination for- the sub­ jects of the course are as follow: — 536 DETAILS OK SUBJECTS, 1920.

(a) Part I.—The work prescribed for students for the Ordinary Degree, together with a special course in Old Euglish and English grammar. Books prescribed: — ~~ Cook—First Book in Old English (Selections I.-XII). Chaucer—The Prologue and The Nonne Prestes Tale. (b) Part II.—The work prescribed for students for the Ordinary Degree, together wtih a Special Course in Old and Middle English. Books prescribed:— Sweet—Anglo Saxon Reader (Selections II., IV., V., XV., XXI., XXV). English Miracle Plays (A. W. Pollard,Clarendon Press). Langland—Selections from Piers the Plowman. Chaucer—The Clerkes Tale. The Squieres Tale. (c) Part III.—The work prescribed for students for the Ordinary Degree.- (d) Old and Middle English and Philology. The pas­ sages for translation will be taken from the books prescribed under this heading for students for the Ordinary Degree. (e) General and Textual Study of Shakespeare. The Course will imply a general study of Shakes­ peare's life and works, and of the general' •literary conditions of his time. The follow­ ing plays are set for special study: Hamlet, Othello, Macbeth, and King Lear; and the following for textual study: Romeo and Juliet, Hamlet, and Macbeth. (f) General History of English Literature, includ­ ing study ot a special author. At the end of the first year, candidates must present themselves in Part I., as specified above, and in their additional subjects. At the December Examinations of their second and third years, they mnst present them­ selves in Parts II. and III. respectively, as specified above. They will be eligible to compete for the Exhibi­ tion in English, Fart II., though they have not been placed in the Class List in two subjects, or have not obtained. AUTS. 537

credit for three subjects. Subjects (d), (e) and (f) will form part of the Final Examination. Candidates will be expected to read with a view to this Examination from their first year onwards, and to attend in their second year such lectures on the subjects for the Final Exami- natiou as the Professor of English may consider desir­ able. The papers set in the,Final Examination in English will be as follows: — 1. Essay. 2. History of English Literature. 3. History of English Literature. 4. English Grammar and Translation from Old English. 5. Translation from Old and Middle English. 6. Shakespeare (General Paper). 7. Shakespeare (Textual Criticism). 8. Special author: Shelley.

F. SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. The course tor the Degree with Honours consists of the following six subjects: — French, Part I. French, Part II. French, Part III. ' Latin, Part I., and Science of Language (Introduc­ tory Course).* English. Part I." English, Part II.• History-of English Literature.§ In addition to the subjects of this school. Candi­ dates must select two subjects from the course for the Ordinary, or the Honour Degree, so as to complete a total of eight subjects. The Details of Study and Examination in the subjecte of the Course are as follows: — • N.B.—Lotin, Part I., and Science ot language (Introductory Course), count at one subject; and English, Parts 1. and II., will be taken at the pass stage only, and will together count as one subject. 5 It is expected that in 1921 this subject will be replaced by one dealing with the relations between English and French Literature. 538 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, IOSO.

1. French, Part I. (a) As set for Part I. (Ordinary Degree). (b) Additional: - Elements of Etymology. La Princesse Lointaine. L'Aiglon, E. Rostand. 2 Vols. 2. French, Part II. (a) As set for Part LT. (Ordinary Degree). (b) Additional: Linguistique (Formation et vie des mots, Syntaxe). Cyrano de Bergeroc. Chantecler, E. Rostand. 2 Vols. 3. French, Part LU. (as set for Part III., Ordinary Degree). Latin, Fart I. (as set for Ordinary Degree). " Science of Language (Introductory Course) will be a Coarse of not more than twenty lectures on the matters included in Tucker s Introduction to the Natural History of Lan- uage, pages 1-43, 70-114, 176-243, 268-396. A ferminal Examination will be held at the end of the Second Term." English, Fart I., and English, Port II., as prescribed for the Ordinary Degree in English. History of English Literature* as prescribed for the Honours Degree in English. Candidates for the Honours Degree in French Lan­ guage and Literature should take French,'Part I. (at the higher grade), Latin, Part I. (Pass), and English, Fart I. (Pass), together with one or two additional subjects at the first Annual Examination; and French, Part II. (at the higher grade). Science of Language (Pass), and English, Fort II. (Pass), at their second Annual Examination, with one additional subject if necessary. They wUl be examined in French, Part III., and in the History of English Litera­ ture,* at the Final Examination in the March following their third year.

• Subject to the possible change indicated above to a subject dealing with tbe relations between English and French Literature. ARTS. 599

The Final Examination in School F (French Language and Literature), consists of the foUowing nine papers, with viva voce Examination: — French. i. Unseen Translation and Phonetics, ii. Composition and Essay, ill. Histery of France, iv. History of French Literature (Special Period), v. French Language (Etymology and Lingu-- istics). English. vi. English Essay, vii. and viii. History of English Literature (2,papers). ix. Special-Author. Viva voce examination of all the matter dealt with in the- three parts in French.

G. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC LANGUAGES. 1. The Course for the Degree in Honours consists of the following subjects: — German, Parts I.. II., III. Old English and Philology. Middle English and Philology. Middle High German and Philology. 2. In addition to the subjects of this school. Candi­ dates must select two adaitional subjects from the- Course for the Ordinary or the Honours Degree. 3. The Details of Study and Examination for the- Annual Examinations are as follows:— German, Port I. (a) The Lectures in .the subject for the- Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional: SohUler—WaUenstoin. TeU. Goethe—Egmont. . .tr > 540 DETAILS OF. SUBJECTS, 1020.

German, Port II., (a) The Lectures in the subject for the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional: GrUlparze'r—Sappho. Des Meeres und der Liebe Wellen. Heine—Lieder und Gedichte (MocmiUan). Bachmann — Mittolhocbdeutsches Lese­ buch (pages 1-58 and 177-203). German, Part III. As for the Ordinary Degree. Old English. • As in the School ot English. Middle English. As in the School ot English. Middle High German and Philology. Bachmann — Mitt Helhochdeutehes Lesebuch (the -whole book). Wright—O. H. G. Primer. Sohauffler—Althochdeutsche Literatnr. - Behaghel—Die deutsche Sproche. 4. Candidates fof the Honours Degree in Germanic Itongnages mast take: — German, Part I., at the higher grade, and Old and Middle English (as for English, Part I.), to* gether with one additional subject at their first Annual Examination; and German, Part . II.,.at the higher grade, and Old and Middle English (as for English, Part II.), together with one additional subject ot their second Annual Examination; and German, ?art III.. at the third Annual Examination.

6. The Final Exominotion in Germanic Languages con­ sists of the, following five papers: — 1. Unseen Translation and Essay. 2. History ot German Literature. 3. Middle High German and FhUology. 4. Translation from Old and Middle English (i.). £. Translation from Old and Middle English (ii.). ARTS. 541

A vivo voce examination will be held on oU the mat­ ters dealt -with in the third year's coarse. N.B. Candidates for Final Honours are expected to read all the more important works ot the great authors of the classical period (Lessing, Goethe, Schiller), as well as representative works of the chief authors ot the later period (for detaUs consult the lecturer). Other books recommended :— ' Vogt und Koch—Geschichte der dentschen Literatur. Hirt—Die Indogermanen. Paul—Prinzipien der Sprocbgeschichte. Meringer—Indogermonische Sprochwissenschaft. Bryoe—The Holy Roman Empire. Tucker—Introduction to the Natural History of Language. Lichtcnberger—L'AUemagne Modeme.

COMBINED COURSES. Combined i Courses are Courses including parts ot two Honour Schools approved by the Faculty as together equivalent to a Single Honours School, with such addi­ tions as ore needed to complete the eight subjects. - Additional subjects in any Course must be taken at the Annual Examinations. The subjects of Honour Schools forming part ot a com-' 'bined Course must be taken at Annual Examinations, or at the Final Examination, as prescribed in the case of each such subject for Candidates proceeding in the Honours School to which the subject belongs. The following Specimen Courses have been approved by the Faculty:— I. Latin and French. II. History and English. DU. Mathematics and Philosophy. TV. French and German. V. Greek and English. VI. History and Philosophy. VLT. History and French. V1U. History and-German. IX. Latin and Fare Mathematics. X. Mathematics and English. .37A 642 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1M0.

XI. English and Philosophy. XII. PhUosophy'and German. XIII. English and French. XIV. Latin and English.

I.—LATIN AND FRENCH. First Year: Latin I., French I., Additional Subject. Second Year-: Latin II., French LI., Additional Sub­ ject. Third Year: Latin III., French HI.

Final Examination Papers:— (1) Latin Composition. (2) Latin Unseen (Translation from Latin). (3) Roman History and Antiquities, and History of Roman Literature. (4) History ot the Latin Language. (6) Prescribed Books (Latin). (6) French Unseen and Phonetics. - m Composition and Essay. (81 History of France ond French Literature. (9) History of- French-'Language and Linguistics. There will also be a Viva Voce Examination ire French of all the matter dealt with in the three parts.

-II. HlSTOBT. AND ENGLTSH. First Year: British History I., English I.* Addi­ tional Subject.' Second Year: British History, II., English II.* Addi­ tional Subject. Third Year: European History, History of Eng­ lish Literature, Shakespeare. Final Examination Papers:— (1) British History Ii (2) British History II. (3) European History. (4) Mediaeval History. ib) English Essay. (6) and (7) History of English Literature. (8) Shakespeare. ' * For the purpose of this Course, English I. and English II. will be­ taken at the Pass stage only and will together count as one subject. ARTS. 543

(91 Shakespeare (Textual Criticism). (10) Special Author.

TH.—MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY. An approved group of three or more subjects for the Degree with Honours chosen from Fore Moths. I., II., III.; Mixed Moths. I., II., EH.; Natural PhUosophy I., U.; together with Psy. Logic and Ethios, Advanced Logic, History ot Philosophy and Metaphysics (as for Degree with Honours). If, e.g.. Pure Maths. I., II., III. are the subjects chosen, the course would be as foUows:— First Year: Pare Maths. I., Psy., Logic and Ethics, Additional Subject. Second Year: Pare Maths., II., History of PhUos­ ophy. Third Year: Pure Maths. HI., Metaphysics. In addition Avanced Logic must be taken either in the second or the third year. The Final Examination Papers would be as follows:— (1W3) Pure Moths. I.. II., HI. (41 Logic. (6) History of Philosophy. (6) Metaphysics. TV.—FBENCH AWD GBBMAN. First Year: French I., German I., Additional Subject. Second Year: French II., German II., Additional Subject. Third Year: French III., German HI. Final Examination Papers, with Viva Voce: — <1) French Unseen and Phonetics. (2) Composition and' Essay. <3i History of France and French Literature. (4i History of French Language and Linguistics. (6) German Unseen and Essay. (6) History of German Literature. (7) Middle High German and Philology. Note. The Vivo voce in French will cover French I., II., III. The Vivo voce in German will cover.the Third Year's Course. . . 544 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, WO.

V.—GBEBK AND ENGLISH. First Year: Greek I.; English I.*; Additional Sub­ ject. Second Year: Greek II.; English II.*; Additional Subject. Third Year: Greek III.; History of English Litera­ ture; Shakespeare.

Final Examination Papers:— (1) Greek Composition. (2) Greek Unseen Translation. (3) General Paper (mainly History and Antiquities). (4) History of Greek Literature, including some special study, e.g., Greek Literary Criticisms, or the Greek Drama, with Aristotle's Poetics. (5) Prescribed Books (Greek). (6) English Essay. (7) and (8) History of English Literature. (9) Shakespeare. (10) Shakespeare. (Textual Criticism). (11) Special Author.

VI HlSTOBT AND PHILOSOPHY. Honours Course (A). First Year: Brit. History I.; Psy., Logic, and Ethics; Additional Subject. Second Year: Ancient History, Brit. History II.; Advanced Ethics. Third Year: European History; Sociology. Final Examination Papers:— (1) British History I. (2) British History TJ. (3) Ancient History. (4)-(6) European History. (6) Psychology. (7) Moral Philosophy. (8) Sociology. >

• ' * Vide Footnote under II. DRORBR OF M.A: 54&

Honour* Course (B). First Year: Brit. History I., or Ancient History; Psy., Logic and Ethios; Additional Subject. Second Year: Political Economy, Advanced Ethics, Modem Political Institutions or Sociology. Third Year: Brit. History II., or European History; Sociology or Modem Political Institutions Final Examination Papers.-— (l)-(2) British History I., II., or Ancient European: History. (3W4) Modern Political Institutions. (5)-(6) PoUtical Economy. ° (7) Moral Philosophy. (8) Sociology.

VII. HlSTOBT AND FBENOH. First Year: Brit. History I.; French-I.; Additional Subject. Second Year: Brit. History II.; French II.; Sociology or Ancient History. ~ Third Year: European History, French UJ. Final Examination Papers, with Vivo voce in French; (1) Brit. History I. (2) Brit. History II. (8)-(4) European History. (5) Ancient History or Sociology. (6) French Unseen and Phonetics. 7) Composition and Essay. !8)~Histor y of France and French Literature. (9) History of French Language and Linguistics. Not-.—The Viva voce in French will cover French I., n.. ni. VIII.—HlSTOBT AND GBBMAN. First Year: Brit. History I,; German J.; Addi­ tional Subject. Second Year: Brit. History II.; German II.; Addi­ tional Subject. Third Year: European History; German HI. • 546 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Final Examination Papers with Viva in German: (1) Brit. History I. (2) Brit. History H. (3\ European History. (4) Mediaeval History. (6) German Unseen, and Essay. (6) History of German Literature. (7) Middle High German and Philology.

IX.—LATIN AND PUBE MATHEMATICS. First Year: Latin I.; Pare Maths. I.; Additional Sub­ ject. ^ * Second Year: Latin II. j Pure Maths. II.; Additional Subject. ', Third Year: Latin III.; Pure Maths. Ill, Pinal Examination Papers:— (1) Latin Composition. (2) Latin Unseen Translation. (3) Roman History and Antiquities, and History of Roman Literature. (4) History of the Latin Language. (5) Prescribed Books (Latin). •> (6)-(8) Pure Moths. I.. II., HI.

X.—MATHEMATICS AND ENGLISH. First Year: English I.*; Pure Maths. I.; Addfc. tional Subject. Second Year: English H.*; Pare Maths. H.; Addi- tionol Subject. . Third Year: "Pure Moths. HI.; History ot English Literature; Shakespeare. Final Examination Papers:— (1) Essay. (2) and (3) History of English Literature. (4) Shakespeare. (61 Shakespeare (Textual Criticism). (6) Special Author. (7)-(9) Pure Moths. I., H., HI.

* Vide Footnote under II. DEGREE OF M.A. 547

XI.—ENGLISH AND PHILOSOPHY. First Year: English I.*; Psy. Logic and Ethics; ' Additional Subject. Second Year: English II.•; Advanced Ethics; Addi­ tional Subject. Third Year: Sociology; History of English Litera­ ture; Shakespeare. Final Examination Papers:— (1) English Essay. CZ) and (8) History ot English Literature <4) Shakespeare. (6) Shakespeare (Textual Criticism). (6) Special Author. <7 <8) Moral Philosophy. (9) Sociology.

XH.—PHILOSOPHY AND GERMAN. First Year: German I.; Psy. Logic and Ethics: Additional Subject. Second Year: German H.; History of Philosophy. Third Year: German III.; Middle High German and Philology; Metaphysics. . Final Examination Papers, with Viva Voce in German. {1) German Unseen and Essay. (2) History ot German Literature. (3) Middle High German and Philology. ' (4) History ot Philosophy. (6J Psychology. (6) Metaphysics.

XIII.—ENGLISH AND FRENCH. First Year: French I.; English I.*; Additional Subject. Second Year: French II.; English II.*; Additional Subject. Third Year: French III.; Histery of English Litera­ ture -, Shakespeare, t

•Vide Footnote under II. tit is expected that in 1921, this subject will be replaced by one dealing with tbe relations between English ana French Literature. 648 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1M0.

Final Examination Tapers :— (1) French Unseen. . - (2) Histery of French Literature. (8) History of French Language and Linguistics. (4) Composition and Essay. (6) English Essay. (6) and (7) History of English Literature (2 papers). (81 Shakespeare (General) .f (9) Shakespeare-(Textual Criticism).f (10) Special Author. There will be a Viva Voce Examination in French on all the matter dealt with in the three parts.

XIV.—LATIN AND ENGLISH. First Year: English I.*; Latin Part I.; Additional Subject. Second Year: English Part II.* ; Latin Part II.; Addi- ' tionol Subject. Third Tear: History ot EngUsh Literoture; Shakes­ peare ; Latin Part III. . Final Examination Papers:— (1) and (2) History of^nglish Literature. (3) Shakespeare (General). (4.) Shakespeare (Textual Criticism). (6) Special Author. (7(6) LatiEssayn .Composition . (8) Latin -Unseen Translation-. (9) Romon History and Antiquities and History of .Roman Literature. (10) History ot Latin Language.

* Vide Footnote under II. t It Is expected that in 1021 this subject will be replaced by one dealing- with the relations between English and French Literature. 1 DEGREE OF M.A. 549

EXAMINATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER. OP ARTS TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1921.

(A).-SCIIOOL OP CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY. The papers for the Final Examinations in Greek and Latin Literature, Greek and Roman History and Anti* quities; two papers with passages for translation and explanation from portions of Greek and of Latin authors- at the option of the Candidate, viz.: — One in .List A, ") C One in List C, or > with 3 or Two in List B, ) (. Two in Tost D.

The Kditions recommended for nw are : Aristotle Ethics (Grant, or Stewart). Politic* (Jowett, or Stisemihl and I licks). Rhetoric (Cope and Sandys). Plato Republic (Adam, or -lowett). Gorging (Thompson). Thucydides (Poppo, or the several hooks in Macmillan';: ClasuicaA Series). Demosthenes De Corona (Goodwin). De Falsa Legation*; "(SI i ilk-to). Androtion and Timocrates (Wayte). Private Speeches (1'aley and Sandys). Olynthiacs (Sandys). " • iilschylus Prometheus Vinctus (Sikes and- Willson). Seven against Thehe.< (Tucker). Choephori (Tucker). Snpplices (Tucker). Agamemnon (lleadhun). Eumenides (Verrall). Sophocles The several plays (Jehb). Aristophanes The several pla\s (HIaydes). Aeharnians (Uennie). * Wasps (Starkie). Kroira (Tucker). Homer Iliad (Leaf). Odyssey (Merry, or Monro). Xenophon Ilellenica L and II. (Edwards). Tacitus Annals (Furneaux). Gennania and A^ricola (Furneaux). Histories (Spooner). Cicero De Oratore (Wilkins). The separate-speeches named (Pitt Press )- De Olliciis (Holden). De Senectnte, De Amicitia (Reid). De Finihus (Reid). Tuscutan Disputations (Kilhner). 560 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1020.

Vh-gil ..Eiieid (Coiitnffton). Horace (Wlckhaiu). Juvenal (Mayor, or smaller work by Duff). Peralas (Conington).' Lucretius (Munro, or se|iarate books by Duff). Plautas Hostellarla (Hontieiischeln). Captivl (Lindsay, larger edition). Miles Olartosus (Tyrrell). Trlnumniu8(Pltt Press). Terence Adelphi and Ueautontlnioramenos (Ashmore). Translations recommended: Aristotle Politics and Rhetoric (Welldon). Ethics (Williams). Plato fJowett). Thucydides (Jowett). Demosthenes (Kennedy). ifisohyltts (as rendered in the editions mentioned). Sophocles (in Jebb'a editions). Homer Iliad (Lang, Leal and Myers). Odyssey (Rutoher and Lang). Tacitus Annals and Histories (Ramsay). Histories, Oermania and Agricola (Fyfe). Juvenal . (Leeper). Perslus (in Conington's.editlon). Lucretius (Munro). A. Aristotle. Ethics, with Plato's Gorgios. Aristotle. Politics, with any one Book of Thucy- •dides. Aristotle. Rhetoric, with Demosthenes de Corona and ASschines in Ctesiphontem, or other Orations of Demosthenes of equal length in the aggregate. Plato. Eepublic. ^ Thucydides. .Books I.-IV. Thucydides. Books V.-VIII., with Xenophun, Hellen­ ics, Books I. and II. e. JBschylus. The Orestean Trilogy and one other Play. Sophocles. (Edipns Coloneus, (Edipns Tyronnns, Antigone, and one other Play. Aristophanes. Any four plays. Homer. Iliad. Books I.-XII. Homer. Iliad, Books XI1I.-XXIV. Homer. Odyssey. Books I.-XII. Homer. Odyssey, Books XIII.-XXIV. •C. Livy. Books I.-V. Livy. Books VI.-X. Livy. Books XXI.-XXV1I. DEGREE OF M.A. 55J

Tacitus. Annals. Tacitus. Histories, Oermania and Agricola. Cicero. De Oratore, with either In Verreuv Divinatio, Actio I. and Actio II., lib 2, or in Catilinam, in Pisonemr and in Vatinium, or pro Plancio, pro Murena, and pro Milone. Cicero: De Officiis, de, Senectute, de Ami-' citiu. Any Cicero.. De Republics and de Legibus. two. Cicero. Tusculanee Disputationes. Cicero. De Finibns Bonorum et Malorum.. D. Virgil. iBneid. Horace. The whole. Juvenal. Satires (except 2, 6, 9) and Persius. Lucretius. The whole. Plautus. Miles Qloriosus, Mostellaria, Captivi, Trinummus, with Terence—Adelphi, Heautontiinonimenos. (B).—SCHOOL OF HISTOKV. The History of Europe in the Middle Ages. The History of British Colonial Policy. The Principles of Political Economy and their Practical Applications (as stated by the principal Economic- Writers). Modern Political Institutions (as for Final Examination). Books recommended:— Seager—Introduction to Economics. H. W. C. Davis -Mediaeval Europe. Gibbon—Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire. Bryoe—The Holy Roman Empire. - Emerton—Mediaeval Europe. Professor Bastable—Public Finance. Professor Smart—The Return to Protection, Lord Avebury—Free Trade. Macgregor—Industrial Combination. Egerton—History of British Colonial Policy Webb.—History of Trade Unionism. Smart—Economic Annals of 10th Century. Hobhbnse—Social Evolution and Political Theory Seager—Social Insurance. Clark—Labour Movement in Australasia. 5b2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

(O—-SCH00L OF PHILOSOPHY. . Any four of the Papers set for the Final Examination in the same Term.

(D).—SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS. Candidates may present either of the two foUowing groups:— .

1. PUEB MATHEMATICS— Differential and Integral Calculus. Differential Equations. Analytical Geometry.

2. MIXKD MATHEMATICS— Theory of Potential. Hydrodynamics. Sound. Elasticity. Text-book recommended:— A. G. Webster.—Dynamics of Rigid Elastic and Fluid Bodies.

(E).—SCHOOL OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE. ENGLISH : The Examination in 1920 will consist of the foUowing papers set for the Final Examination in the same term, namely Nos. 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 and the grammar portion of paper 4.

FBEKCH OB GEBMAN— The papers on the subjects set for the Final Examina­ tion fh the same term together with the viva voce Examination. EDUCATION. 553

DIPLOMA OP EDUCATION.

Details of Subjects and Recommendations for the Annual "Examinations to be held in the Fourth Term, 1920, and First Term, 1921.

EDUCATION— The work in the subject Education is distributed as follows;— Philosophy, History, Principles, Education and tbe State, Grades of School, School Systems: John Smyth. M.A., D.Phil. Professor of Educa­ tion and Principal of Teachers' CoUege. ,- School Organisation, Method of Mathematics and Science: Matthew S. Shannon, M.A., M.Sc... Nat. PhiL Dixson Scholar, Principal of University High School. Psychological Basis and General Method -. James MoRae, M.A., DiphEd., Final Hon.Exhibit- ioner. Logic and Phil., Vice-Principal of Teachers' College. Method of English.History and Geography: Miss I. D. Marshall. M.A., Dipl.Ed. (London). .Method of Languages: Richard Lawson, M.A., Dipl.Ed. JSxperimental Education: Arthur Pitt. M.A. (N.Z).. Ph.D. (Leipzig). Hygiene: •* Dr. Harvey Sutton. Miss Jane Stocks Greig, M.B., B.S., D.P.H. Voice Culture: J. Hewlett Ross, Assoc. School of Expression, Boston. Blackboard Work and Assistant Masters of Method: Edward Streetman, M.A., Dipl.Ed. Arthur J. Law, M.A., Dipl.Ed. 554 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

The Pass Course will include the following divisions :—- Division A. 1. THE BASES OF EDUCATION— (a) Psychological. b) Logical. !c) Ethical. Text Book: — The Learning Process (Colvin). 2. THE PRINCIPLES OP EDUCATION— (a) Self-activity. (b) Apperception, (c) Interest. (d) Play and Imitation. (e) Formal Discipline. Text Book:— Unfolding of Personality (Mark).

3. SCHOOL SYSTEMS— One or more of: the following: English, Scottish, German, French, American, Japanese, Victorian— History, Development, Modern Organisation.

Division B.

1. EDUCATION AND THE STATE— Older and modem views of their relationship. History- of their relation in England and her colonies. State and Private Schools, Educational Administra- . tion. Training of Teachers, Compulsory atten- tendanoe. Inspection and Examination, Cost, of Education, Co-education. Education and modem democracy. Text Book:— State Intervention in English" Education (Mont­ morency). EDUCATION. 555

2. GRADES OF SCHOOL— . The Kindergarten: Froebel, Dewey, Moutessori. Tbe Primary School: Rural and City Types. The Continuation School: Day and Evening. Edu­ cation between the ages of 12 and 16. The Technical School: The Secondary School. Curriculum and Organisa­ tion. The University: Girls' Education: Special attention will be paid to the Continuation School and the Secondary School. Text Books: — Education for Citizenship (Kerscliensteiner), or The Schools and the Nation (Eerschensteiner).

Division C.

i. THE HISTORY OF EDUCATION— Short sketch of the history of educational thought and practice among the Greeks and in Europe since the rise of 'the Universities. Tbe fol­ lowing thinkers will be touched on:—Plato, Aristotle, The Humanists of the pre.Renas- cence period. The Jesuits, Locke, Comenius, Rousseau, Pestalozzi, Froebel, Herhart, Spen­ cer. There will be a more detailed study of some educational classic, e.g., Plato's Repub- v lie, Spencer's Education. Text Books: — Text Book of History of Education (Monroe). The special classical work for 1920 will be Spencer on "Education—Quick.

2. THE PHILOSOPHY OP EDUCATION— The nature of Man: Industry, Science, Art, Morality, Religion. Man as body, mind and soul. 656 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Social Aims in Education. Individual Aims in Education, Intellectual Aim, Moral Aim, Religious Aim; Idealism in Education. . Definitions of Education. Educational. values. Cur­ riculum. Text Books: — The Philosophy of Education (Home).

Division D.

1. EXPERIMENTAL EDUCATION— Methods of experiment and mathematical evaluation of results. The child as a growing and changing being—the- development of .the physical and mental functions. The child as an individual—the doctrine of individu­ ality and of types^differeuces in " general intelligence." The doctrine of school-work—general work-types find fatigue—the work-process in the special activ­ ities of reading, spelliug, calculating, drawing, etc.

Text Books recommended :— Claparede—Experimental Pedagogy, or Scbulze—Experimental Psychology and Pedagogy.

2. HYGIENE— Lectures will be delivered on: — School Buildings, Furniture, Cleanliness, Physical Defects in Children, Mental Defects in Cbilr dren. The Nervous System, Infectious- Diseases, Insect Carriers of Disease, Tuber­ culosis, First Aid, Physical Training and. Anthropometry. The students will be required to pay visits to schools, and to make observations on some of the foregoing. EDUCATION. 557

Division K. . 1. SPECIAL METHODS— 1. General Method and Class Teaching. 2. Method of English. 3. Method of History. 4. Method of Geography. 5. Method of Classics. 6. Method of Modern Languages. 7. Method of Mathematics. 8. Method of Physics and Chemistry. The lecturers on General Method and Class Teaching will make the-student acquainted with the chief prob­ lems in teaching and class management. Special at­ tention will be given to the drawing up of notes of lessons, and the preparation of work. ' Each lecturer in Special Methods will trace the development of ideas in his particular subject from tbe beginning of Educa­ tion to the close of the Secondary School, and will discuss with the students the methods advocated by leading thinkers and teachers, and will also seek to find the method best suited for our Australian schools. The leading problems in connection with method will be dealt with, and the students will be directed to those books or magazines which give the best help on the subjects dealt with. Each student will be required to sit for the examination in General Method and three of the Special Methods. Lectures, Tutorials, &c. The course will occupy some thirty weeks of the year. Six or more lectures will be delivered weekly on some section of theory or method. Besides these one hour each week for at least seven weeks will be given to Hygiene, one period each'week for at least twenty- four weeks, -or the equivalent time, to Voice Produc­ tion, and at least one hour each week to Experimental Education. At least two periods each week during the first term, and what additional time afterwards is deemed necessary, will be devoted to Blackboard work and illustration. Besides these there will be one meeting each week for the discussions of essays or of topics read or dealt with in the lectures. There will be a special test in Voice Production, and in Blackboard work. Every student, unless specially exempted, will be required to pass these. .S8A 5)8 DETAILS. OF SUBJECTS, 1020.

Papers Set for Examination. Division A—Bases, Principles, School Systems. Division B—Education and The State, Grades of School. Division C—History, The Classic, Philosophy. Division D—Experimental Education, Hygiene. Division E—General Method, Special Methods. All students who commenced under Old Regulations, if taking Section A, will be required to pass in Division A, in Education and the State of Division B, in Division D, and in General Method of Division E; and, if taking Section B, in Divisions C, D and E. Students who have passed in both Section A and Section B of the Old Regulations will be required to pass in Division D. All students who are unable to attend lectures should communicate with the Lecturer in Education before the beginning of the University year, when as for as possible arrangements will be made to guide them in Experimental Education, and in their reading.

Honours. The work in Honours will embrace the Pass work and the following in addition:— (a) The special study of an educational classic. (6) The special study of some problem • of educa­ tion, such as:— Vocational Education. Moral Education. Religious Education. Girls' Education. Adolescence. The History of Education in Victoria or other State. (e) Some special enquiry in connection with Experi­ mental Education. In connection with each of .these, students will be required to write papers, and to hand in one or more essays. A special thesis may also be set. The special study for 1920 wiU be— Adolescence. EDUCATION 559

Practical Work. (Pass and Honours). 1. No candidate for the subject of Education is allowed to enter for Examination unless he has completed the practical work prescribed by the Faculty of Arts (Reg. XXIa.. Sect. 2). 2. The prescribed Practical Work consists of— (a) Attendance at Demonstration lessons, with sub­ sequent discussion (18 lessons). Attendance at Discussion lessons (18 lessons). Observation of teaching in such schools as may be directed. Minimum, 25 hours. (6) The giving of Discussion .lessons from time to time as directed by the" Professor. (c) Teaching practice in the practising schools at the disposal of the Professor or in other schools approved beforehand by the Faculty of Arts for this purpose. Amount to be de­ termined according to previous experience (if any), and aptitude of student.- Minimum, 90 hours; maximum, 120 hours. In addition to teaching practice during lec­ ture terms there will be three .weeks of con­ tinuous practice, during which no lectures will be delivered. (d) Unless the student is specially exempted by the Lecturer, attendance- one hour a week for twenty-four weeks at classes in Voice Pro­ duction, conducted by an approved teacher, and for at least twenty-four hours at the Teachers' College for blackboard writing, and blackboard drawing. (e) Such attendance at Tutorials (for essays and discussion of method), and for discussion of teaching practice as may from time to time be directed. 3. Arrangements will be made for students to do some of their practice in approved secondary schools under the following conditions:— (a) That each student be- placed under an experi­ enced form teacher. (6) That the form teacher write in the student's " log book" a criticism on each day's work, and give oral criticism in addition. 560 DETAILS OK SUBJECTS, 1920.

(e) That a monthly report on each student's pro- ress be sent to the Professor of Education fy the Principal of tbe school. •(d) That' each student be under the supervision of the Professor of Education and his staff. 4. Till further notice partial exemption from the practical work prescribed may be granted to the follow­ ing classes of students, and under the conditions laid down in Sections 5, 6. A (i.) All State School teachers who hold the Trained Teacher's Certificate of the Teachers' College, and whose reports have subsequently been uniformly " good " or " very good." (ii.) All State School teachers other than those included under section 4 A (i.) who have been teaching, either as head teachers, or as as­ sistants, not less than five years, and whose record for the last three years has been uni­ formly " good " or " very good." B AH teachers in registered schools— (i.) Who have been registered " by virtue of em­ ployment prior to tbe Act," and have had five years' experience in teaching; (ii.) Who, not having passed through a course in any institution recognised by the Council of Education, have been registered "on ac­ count of fitness to teach," and have had five years' experience in teaching; (iii.) Who, not earlier than the first day of Janu­ ary, 1911, have complied with the regulation as to practice in teaching prescribed by the Council of Education for the registration of teachers in tbe Primary or Secondary grade. 6. Teachers under Section 4A, 4B, must— (a) Uc engaged in tbe full and regular practice of their profession; (h) Unless they are Head Teachers, be under the supervision of Head Teachers (or of approved assistant teachers), who are willing to send monthly reports to the Lecturer on Educa­ tion, as to their progress in the art of teach. »ng; EDUCATION 561

i (e) Undergo satisfactorily such tests in the prac­ tice of teaching as may be directed by tbe Lecturer on Education; (d) Be supervised regularly by the Lecturer on Education; (e) Practice in the University High School for such time as is directed in Section 6. 6. Teachers under Section 4A (i.), (ii.)^ B (i.), (ii.),

INSTBUCTOKSHIP IN DUTCH.

DUTCH (Details of the course offered by the Instructor in Dutch) .- Phonetics, Conversation, Reading and Composition. Hoogvliet—Elements of Dutch. Mnltatnli—Max Havelaar. Do Genestet—Gedichten (Wereldbibliotheek). Bastiaanse—Overzicht (Vol. II.). FACULTY OF SCIENCE.

HYGIENE— Systematic Physiology once a week for three terms. Physiological Hygiene once a week for two terras. Bacteriology. Lectures with practical work two hours a week for one term. Municipal and House Hygiene once a week for one term, with inspections to be arranged. School and Child Hygiene once a week for one terra.

GRAPHICS— Geometrical problems relating to lines, rectilinear figures and circles, and the construction of scales and curves. Simple orthographic projection, interpenetration and development. Sketching and measuring up simple machine details. Laying out, pencilling, dimensioning and finishing drawings. Graphic determination of areas and of the slope of curves. The sum curve. Contours and volumes. First moments and centroids. Second moments and radius of gyration. Vectors and rotors, the funicular polygon. Graphic solution of equations. Graphic presentation of facts. Note:—Examples and simple graphical applicatious of the above will form part of the class work.

APPLIED MECHANICS— Mechanism— The Machine. Plane motion of link work. Velocity and acceleration. Work, energy and power. Friction. Centrifugal Force. Toothed and belt gearing. Strength of Materials.— Elementary consideration of strength and elasticity of materials; including ties, columns, beams and shafting. Determination of stress in simple structures.

Hydraulics— Pressure on surfaces. Flow of water through orifices, over notches and in pipes and channels. Elementary consideration of Hydraulic machines. Prime Movers— Elementary principles of steam and internal com­ bustion engines. Note:—Practical work will be based on the above syllabus. SURVEYING, PART I. and PART II. (see under Engineering).

METALLURGY. PART II., with METALLOGRAPHY (see under Engineering). ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PART I. (see under Engineering). SCIENCE. " 563

FACULTY OF SCIENCE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA- TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM 1920. AND FIRST TERM 1921.

For PORE MATHEMATICS, MIXED MATHEMATICS, PSY­ CHOLOGY LOGIC and ETHICS, ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN, LATIN, GREEK—see under Faculty of Arts.

HONOUR WORK. - Except in the cases of subjects where special details are published, the Examination for Honours will be on the lines indicated for Pass, but candidates will require to have read more advanced work than for Pass, and to attain a higher standard and show more detailed knowledge.

For Subjects of Examination for FINA L HONOURS AND SCHOLARSHIPS—FIRST TERM. 1921, see Regu­ lation VII., Sections 8 and 9.

NATDRAL PHILOSOPHY—PART I. Methods of Physical Science. Mechanics.—Practical Geometry, length, angle, area, volume, standard and unit of length. Time, the sidereal day and the second. Vectors, addition, subtraction ; components, resolution. Motion. Specification of velocity, variable velocity. Acceleration; constant acceleration. Freely falling bodies. Motion iu circular path with uniform speed. Ribbon Atwood machine. Statics.—Force, addition and resolution of forces. A particle is in equilibrium when resultant of all forces acting ou it is zero. Parallel forces, __ principle of lever, couple. • Centre of moss. ' Coplanar forces equivalent to a single force and a couple. Definition of work, principle of virtual work. Balance. 664 ' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Dynamics.—Newton's I*aw I. Mass, standard, unit. Weight. Conservationofmasa. Density. Momen­ tum. Impulse., Newton's Laws II. and III. Law of gravitation. Kepler's Laws. Laws of motion andgravitation account for Kepler's Laws. Work, energy, power; units. Principle of conserve tion of energy. Elements ot dynamics of rota­ tion. The gyrostat. Simple harmonic motion. Time of vibration. Units and dimensions. Out­ lines of the history of mechanics. Gravitation.—Cavendish experiment, determination of G. Pendulum determination of g. Hydrostatics.— Pressure at a point. Pressure ut a height, A. Archimedes'Principle. Manometers. Barometer. Hydromechanics.—Bernoulli's theorem and applications of it. 1'rnpertirs if Matter.— Density. Boyle's Law. Hooke's Law. Young's modulus, compressibility, rigid­ ity. Flexure of. beam. Torsion. Viscosity. Surface tension. Diffusion. Constitution of mat­ ter. Heal.—Thermometry. Expansion. Calorimetry, specific and latent heats. Mechanical equivalent of. heat. Change of state, fusion and vaporisation. Liquefaction of gases. Conduction. Radiant heat, (inflection and refraction. Stefan's and • Wien's Laws. Wave Motion and Sound.—Nature and propagation of waves. Velocity of sound. Pitch, loudness, quality. Reflection. Refraction. Resonance. Stationary waves. Vibration of strings and air columns. , Light.-—Sources, intensity, photometry. Photometric units. Reflection, mirrors. Refraction, prisms, lenses, determination of refractive index. Veloc­ ity of light. Dispersion. Spectrum analysis. Camera, microscope, telescope. Nature of light. Polarization. Electrostatics. — Fundamental Phenomena. Invei-ee square law, quantity. E.S. Units. Electric field. SCIENCE. 565

lines of force. Potential, E.M.F. Electroscope and electrometer. Distribution of electricity. Condensers. Capacity of conductors aud condensers. Energy of a charged conductor. Specific inductive capacity. Current.—Electromotive force. Resistance. Ohm's - Law, ampere, volt, and ohm. Conductors in series and in parallel. Wheatstone's Bridge. Joule's Law. Electro-lysis. Faraday's Laws. .Primary and storage batteries. Magnetism.—luvecae square law. Moment of magnet. The magnetic field. Lines of force. Induction, magnetisation. Properties of iron. Diauiag- netism. Terrestrial magnetism. Magnetic field dw to a current.—Magnetic fleld due to current in (a) straight conductor, (b) circular coil, (c) solenoid. Electro-magnets. Electrodynamics.—Mutual action'of magnetic fields; galvanometers, ammeters, voltmeters. Electromagnetic induction.—Lens's and Faraday's laws. Self and mutual induction, henry. The trans­ former and induction coil. Direct current gene­ rator and motor. Alternating currents (element­ ary treatment) Telegraph. Telephone. High frequency currents. Wireless telegraphy. Elec­ trical Units. Electric discharge, cathode rays. Rontgen rays. Radioactivity. Laboratory Work.—Experiments relating to the above course. Text-books recommended:— For Pass. Elementary Mechanics — Physics—Watson's Intermediate or Kimball's Col­ lege Physics. For Honours. Mechanics—Maxwell's Matter and Motion. Physics—Watson's Text-book. Fur laboratory Work. Practical Physics—By the Staff of the Department. 566 DETAILS OF SUaiECTS, 1920-

Suitable fur Vacation rending. Lodge's Pioneers of Science. Mach's Mechanics.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART II.— Mechanics; Properties of Matter; Heat; EJeraentary Geometrical and Physical Optics; Sound; Electricity and Magnetism. Candidates will be expected to read certain original papers. A list of these will be posted in the Department. For Honours. A fuller treatment of the subjects specified above for the PHSH Examination. Practical Work.—The experiments and measurements relating to the above course. , . Text-books recommended:— For Pass. Dynamics of Rotation—Worthington. " . Properties of Matter—Poynting and Thomson (selected portions). Heat—Poynting and Thomson. Light—Houstoun (selected portions). Sound—Poynting and Thomson (selected portions). Magnetism.and Electricity—Starling. For reference:— Alternating Currents—D. C. ond J. P. Jackson. Electrical Measurements—Laws. Suitable for Vacation rending. Poynting's Pressure of Light.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART III.— General Physics. Heat. Thermodynamics. Light.. Electricity and Magnetism. Elementary Electron Theory. Radioactivity. Propagation of Telephone and Telegraph currents. SCIENCE. 567

For Honours. A fuller treatment of the subjects specified above for the Pass Examination. Practical Work.—Experiments and 'measurements re­ lating to the above course. Candidates will be expected to read certain original papers. A list of these will be posted in the Department. Text-books recommended:— For Pass. Properties of Matter—Poynting and Thomson. Heat—Preston. Light—Houstonn. Electricity and Magnetism —J. J. Thomson; also Poynting and Thomson. Electricity—Campbell's Modern Electrical Theory. "~ Alternating Current—D. C. and J. P. Jackson. Propagation of Currents in Telephone and Tele­ graph Conductors—Fleming. Radioactive Substances—Rutherford. Physical Measurements—Watson. For Honours As for Pass with the addition of General Physics—Edser. Report on Radiation and the Quantum Theory— Jeans. Electron Theory of Mattel-—Richardson (selected portions). The Electron—MiUikan. Cours de Physique General (Ollivier) is a general text-book suitable for Honour candidates. Suitable for Vacation Reading. The Tides—Darwin. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY— Final Honours. By Examination— _ Additional Text-books for farther study and reference for candidates proceeding by examination:— 568 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Dynamics and Properties of Matter—A. Gray. Theory of Solution—Whethom. Kinetic Theory of Gases—Meyer. Thermodynamics—Bryan. Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics—Sackur. Thermodynamics of Technical Gas Reactions— - Haber. Theory of Optics—Drude. Theory of Optics—Schuster. Physical Optics—Wood. Spectroscopy—Baly. Text-book of Sound—Barton. The Science of Musical Sounds—Miller. Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism—Maxwell. Conduction of Electricity through Gases — J. J. Thomson.. , Electron Theory of Matter—Richardson. Applied Electrochemistry—Allmand. History of the Theories of Ether and Electricity— Whittaker. Physical and Chemical Constants—Kaye and Laby. Five-figure Tables of Mathematical Functions— Dale. By Research— Final Honours may be obtained (see Regulation VII., Sec 9) either by examination or by research. A candidate proceeding by research will be required (1) to submit a thesis containing a record of an investigation and a critical review of the literature directly bearing on the investiga­ tion, and (2) to perform exercises involving the reading abstracting and criticism of pubUshed papers which may be in English, French, or German bearing on tbe subject treated in tbe thesis submitted by the candidate.

CHEMISTRY.—PART I.— INORGANIC.—Elementary Chemical Physics and Inor­ ganic Chemistry. ORGANIC—The constitution and chemical relations of the chief hydrocarbons and their simpler derivatives containing halogens, oxygen, sul­ phur, and nitrogen. SCIENCE. 569

Laboratory Work. The laboratory work will include simple qualitative analysis, exercises to illustrate the principles discussed in the' lectures, and simple exercises in volumetric analysis, including acidimetry and alkalimetry, oxidizing and reducing actions, etc. Text-books:— Mellor's Inorganic Chemistry. Lupton's or Dobbin's Chemical Arithmetic. Clowes's Elementary Practical Chemistry. Cohen's Organic Chemistry. . For consultation— Roscoe and Schorleuimer's Treatise on Chemistry Vols. I. and II. For practical work student:} are required to provide themselves with . apparatus in accordance with a list which will be posted in the Laboratory

CHEMISTRY.—PART II. Advanced General and Inorganic ChemUtry. Lahornlnry Work.—Simple quantitative analysis, volumetric and gravimetric. Tbe qualitative and quanti­ tative examination of alloys and of mixtures containing compounds of the more common metals and inorganic radicles. Text-books : — Walker's Introduction to Physical Chemistry. Alex. Smith's or Mellor's Inorganic Chemistry, dimming and Kay's Quantitative Chemical Analysis. Newth's Manual of Chemical Analysis. For consultation:— Abegg's Handbuch der anorganisohen Chemie. Roscoe and Schorleuimer's Treatise on Chemistry, Vols. I. and II. Tbe volumes in the Physical Chemistry Series edited by Sir Wm. Ramsay. Treadwell's Analytical Chemistry, Vols. I. and II. Sutton's Volumetric Analysis. Watts's Dictionary. For practical work students are required to provide themselves with apparatus in accordance with a list which will be posted in tbe Laboratory 570 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

CHEMISTRY.—PART III.— Organic and General and Advanced Inorganic Chem­ istry. laboratory Work.—Qualitative and quantitative analy­ sis, inorganic and organic. Preparations of pure substances. Physico-chemical measurements, e.g., determinations of molecular weights of vapours and dissolved substances, conductivity, viscosity, re-action velocity, etc. Text-books:— Those recommended for Part II., and also the foUowing: Bernthsen's Organic Chemistry. Sadborough and James's Practical Organic Chemistry. J. F. Spencer's Physical Chemistry, Vols. I. and II. For consultation:— Washington's Rock Analysis. Fresenins's Works (qualitative and quantitative). Oatwald-Luther's Fhysico-chemische Messungen. Crookes's Select Methods in Chemical Analysis. Friend's series on Inorganic Chemistry. Dittmar's Quantitative Analysis. Schellen's Spectrum Analysis.

For practical work students ore required to provide themselves with apparatus in accordance with a list which will be posted in the Laboratory

ZOOLOGY—PART I. (a) Lectures. The elements of vertebrate and invertebrate mor­ phology. The structure and life history of the Frog in detail. The structure, life history and functions of uni­ cellular animals to illustrate important points in the function and structure of the ceU. Tbe ovum and the sperm. Maturation and fertili­ sation. General account of the following phyla with descriptions of the structure and life history ot typical examples. Protozoa, Porifera, SCIENCE. 571

Ccelenterata, Platodes, Nematodes, Annulata, Arthropods, Mollusca, Echinoderumta, Chor- data. The examples will be chosen so as to illustrate, as far as possible, the Zoology and Natural History of Australia. The- outlines of development of the bird, and of the festal membranes in Mammalia. Tbe elements of vertebrate histology. (b) Laboratory work and Demonstrations— The examination by means of dissections and pre­ parations of examples of the chief types of animals and of the structures dealt with in the lectures. Text-books— Mitchell and Mndge—Outlines of Biology (Third or Fourth Edition). Marshall—The Frog (not earlier than eighth edition). Marshall and Hurst—Practical Zoology (Sixth edition). . Reference books— The Biology of the Frog—S. J. Holmes. Comparative Anatomy of Animals—G. C. Bourne. Outlines of Zoology—Thomson. Students must be provided with the following :— Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying at least 60-450 diameters; to be approved by the Professor. Box of approved dissecting instruments. Note books. Box of coloured crayons. A limited number of Microscopes are available for hire by students not proceeding to Zoology II.

ZOOLOGY—PART II.— One of the following two courses:— Section A.—Comparative Anatomy and Embryology of the Vertebrata, and Distribution of Animals. 572 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1W0.

The structure of the following systems in verte­ brate animals, treated from a comparative point of view: (a) Integument and structures associ­ ated with it, (b) skeleton, (r) muscles (in outline), (d) organs of nutrition, (c) organs of respiration, (/) organs of circulation, ' (g) urino-genital organs, (A) nervous system and sense organs. In the laboratory typical vertebrates illustrative of the lecture course will be examined. A course of vertebrate organogeny, in which the* development of the various organs in a frog, a bird, and a mammal, will be dealt with so far as possible in the laboratory. Text-books:— Comparative Anatomy ot Vertebrates—rKingsley. Development of the Chick—Lillie.

For reference:— Structure of Mon—Wiedersheim. Development of the Human Body—McMurrich, 4th edition. Atlas d'Embryolo.gie—Duval. Distribution of Animals—Heilprin.

Section B.—Comparative Anatomy of the Invertebrata. In the lectures the morphology and life histories of typical examples of the chief divisions of the Invertebrata will be treated, with special reference to tbe Australian Fauna. In the Laboratory a series of forms, illustrating the lectures will be studied.

Text books:— Text Hook of Zoology—Parker and HasweU, 2nd edit. ',, „ ,, Sedgwick. Books for reference:— Traite de Zoologie Concrete, etc.—Delage et Heronard . Treatise on Zoology—ed. by E. Ray Lankester. Cambridge Natural History. SCIENCE 573

ZOOLOGY—PART III.— One of tbe foUowing two courses:— Section A.—Comparative Anatomy of the Invertebrata. Section B.—Comparative Anatomy and Embryology of the s Vertebruta, and Distribution of Animals. These courses will consist of a fuller treatment of Sections A. and B, as dealt with .in Zoology II., together with a -course of lectures on the distribution of recent and fossil animals, with special reference to Australasia. Candidates take one Section only in each year-. Candidates who have taken Section A in the second year must take Section A in the third year, and similarly with Section B. It is to be distinctly understood that tlie second year's work will depend upon a knowledge of the first, and the third year's work upon a knowledge of that of both the first and second years, and that any papers set will of -necessity include questions.requiring such knowledge. Where desirable Laboratory Demonstrations will take the place of Lectures. Text books (in addition to those of the Second Year):— Distribution of Animals. Heilprin (Int. Sci. Series). Animal Geography—Newbigin. Books for reference (in addition to those ot Second Year): Embryology. Korsuhelt and Heider, English Transla­ tion. Island.Life. AVallace. Geographical History of Mammals. Lydekker. General Physiology. Verwom (English Translation by Lee). The Origin of the European Fauna. Scharf.

BOTANY—PART L— Chemical and physical constitution of the plant-cell. Cell-division. Osmosis and osmotic pressure. Culture, reproduction, morphology and nutrition of bacteria (parasitic, saprophytic, nitrifying, etc.). Ferments and fermentation. 574 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

The structure, reproduction and life history of an alga- (Spirogyra, Hormusira or Fui us). The structure, reproduction and life history of Yeast,. Mucor, PeniciUinm, Eurotium or Aspergillus. Tbe origin of Parasitism. The structure, reproduction and life history of . Morchnntin, I'teris, and Setaginella. Chlorophyll-and photosynthesis. Nutrition. Respira­ tion and the gaseous exchanges in green ond> non-green plants. Seed and seedling. Germination. Translocation.. Growth. Irritability. Origin of organs. Structure and function of Leaf,. Stem and Root. Tbe flower and fruit. Pollination and seed dispersal. Text-books:— Scott's Structural Botany of Flowering an£ Flowerless Plants. Ewart's Matriculation Botany. Laboratory work :— , The structure of tbe above types. Elementary plant- anatomy and histology. The structure of the- flower, fruit and seed. Microscopes can be hired for Laboratory use.

BOTANY—PART II. (1) Plant Physiology (section A or B) (see below). (2) Plant Pathology. General outlines of: (a) diseases and defects not due to parasitic organisms- (6) diseases due to parasitic organisms—(i.) Bac­ teria, (ii.) Myxomycetes, (iii.) Fungi— Phycomyoetes, Ascomycetes, Basidiomy- cetes. Fungi imperfect!. (3) Systematic Botany. Comprises tbe general classification- of plants and a. systematic account of tbe more important natural orders including: Chenopodiaceae, Cruciferoe,, SCIENCE. 575

CaryophyUoceoe, Compositoe, Cyperaceae, Con- volvulaceae, Euphorbioceae, Gramineae, Irideae, Legnminosoe, Labiatae, Liliaceae, Myrtaceae, Proteoceoe, Folygonoceoe, Rosaceoe, Ranuncn- laceae, Solanaceae, Scrophulorineoe, Thymel- eaceoe. Umbelliferae, paying special attention to— (a) Cultivated, medicinal, food, pasture, and poison plants. (6) Weeds, their nature, dispersal and eradication. (

BOTANY—PART ILL— (1) Plant Physiology (section A or B) (see below). (2) Plant Geography and the elements of Paleobotany. <3) Cryptogams and Gymnosperms. (a) Sehizophyta—Cyanophyceae (Bacteria dealt with under Plant Pathology). (b) Thallophyla—{i.) Algae—Chlorophyoeae, Diato- maceae, Characeae. Phoeophyceae, Rhodophy- ceae; (ii.) Fungi (see Plant Pathology), (e) Bryophyia—Hepaticae, Musci. (d) Pteridophyta—Filicineoe, Hydropterideae, Equi- setineae, Lycopodineae, Isoetineae. (e) Pteridospermae- (/) Spermaphyta.—(i.) Gymnosperms—Cycadineoe, Coniferineae, Cordaitineae; (ii.) Angiospermoe (Systematic Botany, 2nd year). (4) Palaeobotany. JSquisetales— Vegetative structure of stem and roots of Catamites, Protocalamites, Arthrodendron. Fructifications—Different types represented by Cala- mostachys, Palaeostachya, Cingularia, Archaeo- calamites. 5T& DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

• SphenophyUales (relatioa between Sphenophylleae and. Psilotooeae)— Sphenophyllum— Vegetative characters. Fructifications.. Lyeopodiales— Lepidodendron— - External characters. Vegetative structure of stems roots and leaves. Fructifications. Lepidophloios. Sigillaria— External characters. Vegetative structure. Stigmaria (probably roots of Lepidodendron and. Sigillaria). Ferns— Botryopterideoe— Zygopteris. , . Botryopteris. Pteridospermeae— Lyginodendrene—Lyginodendcon— Vegetative structure of Rachiopteris aspera (petioles). Kaloxglon Hookeri (roots). Fructifications— Lagenostoma Lomaxi. Telangium Scotti. Helerangium. Affinities of Lyginodendreae— Medulosseae—Medullosa. Vegetative structure. Cordoitaics— Cordaiteae—Cordaites— Vegetative structure of stem leaves, roots (Amye- lon). Fructification— Cardiocarpon compressum (seed). „ . SCIENCE. 577 o Bennettiteae—Bennettites— Vegetative structure and flowers of..

Details of Plant Physiology— Section A.—Absorption, osmosis and osmotic pres­ sure, nutrition,. translocation, food storage, metabolism, transpiration, respiration, gain and loss of energy, excretion. Section B.—Growth, reproduction and regeneration, ' the mechanics of tissues, resistance to ex­ tremes, the various forms of nostic, tropic and tactic irritability, heredity, variation and evolution. Practical Work in 2nd and 3rd years includes: — (a) Experiments in Plant 'Physiology- on absorption, nutrition, translocation, transpiration and flow ot sap, respiration, growth of seedlings, effect of poisons, and of extreme conditions, mechanics of tissues, helintropism, geotrop- ism, and chemotaxis. Experimental plot methods. (b) Structure of types of Schizophyta, Thallophyta, Bryophyta, Pteridophyta, Pteridospermae and Spermaphyta. (e) Examination of commoner weeds, pasture, medi­ cinal, poison and food plants. (d) Field excursions will be 'held at times arranged throughout the course. Text Books:— Morphology of Gymnosperms—Coulter and Chatuber- / lain. Evolution of Plants—Scott. For Reference: — Qoebel's Outlines; Pfefter's Physiology of Plants; Schimper's Plant Geography; Fossil Botany by Solms-Lanbach, Scott or Seward; Qoe­ bel's Organography ; Physiological Plant Anato­ my—Haberlandt; Bugler's Pflonzen FamiUen. 578 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

GEOLOGY—PART I This course has been arranged to suit the requirements of students of Science, Arts, Agriculture, Architecture and of Civil and Mining Engineering. Tectonic Geology-—The study of rock masses in the field. Folds and faults. Mountain structure, Isostasy. . Dynamical Geology.—The forces operating upon and below the earth's surface. Wind, water, and ice as geological agents; chemical and mechanical agents of denudation. Earth movements, volcanoes. Cosmical Geology—The earth as a mass—its origin, shape, relation to the heavenly bodies, etc. Pluysiographie Geology.—Including the origin of land forms, etc The Geology of Water Supply. The Elements of Mineralogy, Petrology and J'alaonto- logy.—Including tbe study of common minerals, rocks and fossils. ' The Elements of iltvatigrop/ii/.—Illustrated mainly by the geology of Victoria. Laboratory Work—The work- in the laboratory will Include the study of geological maps and the construc­ tion of geological sections; the examination and deter­ mination of hand specimens of crystals, minerals, rocks, and fossUs. Field Work-—There will be seven field excursions in. geology. These will be held on Saturdays during tbe session. Apparatus.—Students must supply themselves with a geological hammer, pocket lens and specimen bag, to be approved by the Professor. Text-Books:— W. B. Scott—An Introduction to Geology (Mao- iniUan). F. Rutley—Elements of Mineralogy (Murby). SCIENCE. 579

For Reference: — A.' R. Dwerryhouse—Geological'and Topographical Maps and Their Use (Edward Arnold).' J. Geikie— Structural and Field Geology (Macmillan). Chamberlin and Salisbury—Geology, Vol. I. Pro­ cesses (John Murray).

GEOLOGY, PART II.— Crystallography.—The characters of crystals, their geometrical and optical properties, their sym­ metry and classification. Mineralogy.—-The physical, chemical, crystallo- graphic and optical characters of minerals, their classification and the description of the more important species. Petrology.—The megascopic and microscopic characters of rocks. The classification of rocks. The prin- - ciples that control the solidification ef rocks from a molten state. Stratigraphy.—The principles of stratigraphical geology. The interpretation ot the evidence of fossils. The Archaean and Palaeozoic rocks and their general distribution throughout the world. Physiography, Palaeontology, etc.—More advanced work than that dealt with in Part I. Laboratory Work.—The laboratory work will be arranged so that the student may gain a practical knowledge of the subjects dealt with in the lectures. Field Work-—Nine excursions will be held during the. year, of which three will be held during the last two days of the third term and the Monday following, and the remaining six will be held on Saturdays during the session. Apparatus-—In addition to the apparatus required for Geology, Fart I., students must supply themselves with a blowpipe and six inches of platinum wire and a penological microscope, to be approved by the Professor. The- Geological Department has a limited number of microscopes available for hire. 580 UKTA1LS OK SUBJECTS, 1920.

Text Books:— Hatch—Text-book of Petrology (George Allen). Dana, E. S—Text-book of Mineralogy (Wiley). Chapman, F.—Australasian Fossils (Geo. Robertson and CoJ). For Reference: — Hatch and Rastall—Petrology of the Sedimentary Bocks (George Allen). , Charaberlin and Salisbury—Geology, 3 vols. (John Murray). Lake and Kastall—Text-book of Geology (Arnold).

GEOLOGY. PART HI.— The leotures and laboratory work will deal with:— Advanced Optical Mineralogy. ' Advanced Petrology, including the origin and dif­ ferentiation of rock magmas. Advanced Palaeontology- Stratigraphy;—The Mesozoic and Koinozoic >ocks ana their general distribution throughout the world. Mining Geology.—The character, formation and dis­ tribution of mineral, coal and oil deposits. The chief features of the principal mining fields of the world. The mining fielns of Australia in more detail. Field Work—Twelve excursions will be held during the year, of which three wiU be held during tbe first day of the third term and the Friday and- Saturday preceding, three more during the last two days of the third term and the Monday following. The remaining six excursions will be held on Saturdays during the session. Text Books: — Harker—The Natural History of Igneous Bocks (Methuen). Iddings—Bock Minerals (Wiley). Thomas and McAlister—Geology of Ore Deposits (Arnold). Woods—Palaeontology (Cambridge UniversityPi-ess). SCIENCE. 581

For Reference:— Miers—Mineralogy (Macmillan). von Zittel—Text-book of Palaeontology (Macmil­ lan). Daly, R. A. — Igneous Rocks and their Origin. (MoGrow. HU1 & Co.). Beck and Weed—The Nature of Ore Deposits, 2 vols. (Engineering and Mining Journal). Posepny—Genesis of Ore Deposits (A.I.M.E.). Ore Deposits—A Discussion (Engineering and Mining Journal). Kemp—Ore Deposits of the United States and Canada (Wiley). Pittman—Mineral Resources of New South Wales. Books for reference describing special mining fields will be announced during the lecture course.

PHYSIOLOGY—PART I.— Practical Bio-chemistry—The reactions of carbohydrates. fats, lipoids, enzymes und proteins. Experiments on colloids, permeability of membranes and adsorption. v The composition of the chief tissues, organs and body fluids and the reactions of their more important constituents. The composition' of foods. Simple experiments on digestion and respiration. Practical Biophysics-—The response of muscle and nerve to stimulus; alterations' in tbe response produced by physical and chemical agents. The nature ot the heart-beat; the influence on the heart and arteries of physical and chemical agents. Reflex action. Systematic Physiology—The standard is Jhat given by the lectures. Students are advised to read— • Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology. Pliminer—Practical Organic and Bio-Chem­ istry. For practical work students are required to provide themselves with apparatus In accordance with a list which will be posted in the Laboratory. -582 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

PHYSIOLOGY—PART II.— Practical Biorhemislrr—Quantitative estimation of the chief components of the body and of the chief ingredients of food and excreta. - Practical Biophysics—The subjects of the second year, but more advanced and with graphic records. Experiments on respiration with analyses of air. Experiments on special senses. Systematic Physiology—Mammalian physiology, includ­ ing the central nervous system, of the -standard indicated by Starling's Principles of Human • - Physiology. Alcock and Ellison's Practical Physiology, Bayliss' Principles of General Physiology and Plimmer's Practical Organic and Bio-Chemistry are also recommended.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR DIPLOMA OP ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.

FIRST EXAMINATION. Details the same as for the Final Honour Examination in Chemistry for the. B.Sc. degree.

FINAL EXAMINATION. The Candidate will be required to show a general acquaintance with the problems and methods of technical analysis, and wiU be subjected to a more stringent examination in one branch selected by himself, and approved by the Faculty of Science. Such selection must be notified in writing to the Registrar not less than three months before tbe time of entry for the examination Candidates may, whan entering for this examination, submit any original chemical work which they have pub­ lished or propose to publish; and such work shall be taken into account by the examiners, but shall not be accepted in lien of the Examination. LAWS. 583

FACULTY OF LAW.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA­ TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1920, AND FIRST TERM, 1921. For Arts Subjects of the course see Details under Arts. MODERN POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS— This course is given in alternate years and will not be given in 1920. This subject consists of (a) BRITISH POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS— The Government of the British Empire, including a comparison of British Institutions with those of other countries. Tbe subject will be treated historically so far as is necessary to establish and demonstrate the principles of Consti­ tutional Law and Practice. The course for .Law Students will be an extension of that provided for Arts Students* (b) INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS AND LAW— A general survey of the growth of International Law in Europe, and of the principles underlying Interna­ tional relations. (c) MODEBN POLITICAL IDEAS— - —The courses In (a) and (b) will be given by the Profes­ sor of Law. The course in (c) will be given by the Director of Tutorial Classes (Prof. Atkinson). Books recommended: ' (a) For reading: Dicey's Law of the Constitution. Maitland's Constitutional History of England. — Bagehot's English Constitution. Low's Governance of England. L. Curtis, The Problem of the Commonwealth. Heam's Government of En gland (For Law Students) 584 • DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

For reference: Heamls Government of England.- Anson's Law and Custom of the Constitution. LoweU's Government of England. Keith's Imperial Unity and the Dominions. Jenks's Government or Victoria. Moore's Commonwealth of Australia.' Students will find it useful before beginning the course to read Marriott's English Political Institutions. (b) Students are recommended to begin the. study of the subject by reading." An Introduction to the Study of International Relations" (Macmillan), by A. J. Grant and others. ' No general text book can as yet be recommended, but students are advised to read West- lake's International Law, Volume I., Peace. (c) In Modern Political Ideas candidates must study the development of political theory and institutions since the French Revolution, particularly in relation to modern democracy. "Reference may be made to the following works:— Bentbam—Theory of Legislation. J. S. Mill—Representative Government. Maine—Popular Government. W. E. H. Lecky-^Democracy and Liberty. Pollock—Introduction to the History of Science of Politics. Hearnshaw—Democracy at the Crossways. Macy & Gannaway—Comparative Free Government. Hobhouse—Democracy and Reaction. Ramsay Muir—National Self-Government. Hobson—Democracy after tho War. Wallas—The Great Society. Ritchie—Darwinism and Politics. McKechnie—The New Democracy and the Constitu­ tion. H. A. L. Fisher—The Republican Tradition in Europe. W. Graham—English PoUtical Philosophy. M. Ostrogorski—Democracy and tbe Organisation of .Political Parties. . LAWS. 585

HISTORY AND SOURCES OP ENGLISH AND AUS­ TRALIAN LAW— This course is given in alternate years and will be given in 1920. (a) Legal Method—(Judicial Precedent, Legislation, etc.). (b) The several courts ' and their history, their jurisdictions, and relations; the characteris­ tics of the administration of justice in each. (c) The foundation of the law and the development of the Courts, and of the administration of justice, in Australia. Books recommended: For (a) Students should read Pollock's First Book of Jurisprudence, Part II.; Salmond's Jurisprudence, caps. VI., >VII., VIII., and IX.; and (especially for'Honours), Jethro Brown's Austinion Theory of' Law. Excursus C, and Dicey's Law and Opinion in England, Lecture XI., and Appendix Note IV. For (b) Holdsworth's History of English Law (vol. I.), and (for reference) Jenks* Short History of English Law. • For (c) Webb's Imperial Law.

CONSTITUTION OP THE'1 COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA.— This course is given in alternate years and will be given in 1920. Students are recommended to read Moore's Common­ wealth of Australia (Students' Edition). -Fora general view of the subject tbey should also read (if possible -before lectures begin) Bryce's Studies in History and Jurisprudence, Vol. I., Essay 8, or "Australia —Economic, and Political Studies" (Macmillan), chapter II. (Political Systems of Australia). 586 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920. .

JURISPRUDENCE, INCLUDING ROMAN LAW— The history, nature and classification of law and legal phenomena, with reference principally to- Roman and English Law. Students should, base their work on— Sohm's Institutes of the Roman Law (Ledlie's translation). Salmond's Jurisprudence.

PRIVATE INTERNATIONAL LAW— Students are referred ' Foote's Private International Jurisprudence. Westlake's Private International Law. Dicey's Conflict of Laws.

ADMINISTRATIVE LAW— This course is given in alternate years and will not be given in 1920. (a) External Relations— Immigration and Aliens. Naturalisation. Extradition and Fugitive Offenders. Foreign Enlistment. (6) The classification and distribution of administra­ tive functions. Administrative action—the competence of autho­ rities and officers; methods of action, and enforcement of orders. - (c) Central government—the principal administra­ tive departments, their organisation and functions. The Public Service. (d) Local government—functions^ organisation and control (legislative, executive, judicial). Relations of central and local government. (r) Tbe. Executive and tbe Judiciary—the Courts as aiding and controlling the executive. The legal relations' of the citizen with (1) the State, (2) its servants. LAWS. 581

Throughout this course a knowledge of Dicey's Law of the Constitution will be assumed. Students who have not- read this work in an earlier part of their course should read- it before lectures in this subject begin.

THE LAW OF PROPERTY IN LAND AST> CON­ VEYANCING— Legal Estates and Interests in Land considered with, regard to their nature, commencement, duration and enjoyment. Equitable Estates and Interests in Land considered! with regard to tbeir nature, commencement- and duration. Assurances by way of purchase, including leases and assignments of leases; assurances by way of - settlement, assurances by way of mortgage, and assurances by will. The rights of creditors against the property of their debtors, not including the rights of the credi­ tors of deceased persons against estates in the hands of executors or administrators, or the- \ rights of the creditors of insolvents against- estates in the hands of assignees or trustees, or the rights of creditors in the liquidation of companies. The Law relating to the Alienation of Property in fraud of creditors. - / For information upon these topics Students are referred! to the foUowing text books and Statutes ••— . -Real Property, by A. P. Topham. Students are recommended to read this book before- lectures begin. Joshua Williams on Real Property, except ch. 8 and 9 of Part I., ch. S of Part II., Port -III... and Part VII. Leake's Digest of the Law of Property in Land, ch. 1, 3 and 4 of Part I.; Part II., ch. 1, ch. 2, sec­ tions 1, 2. 3, 4 (i). 5. 6 (i).

.40- £68 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Leake on the Uses and Profits of Land, except ch. 6, 9, 10, 11, 12 of Part I.; sec. 2 of ch. 1, and ch. 2, sub-sect. 3 of sect. 1, and sect. 3 of ch. 3, sub-sects 3 and 4 of sect. 1, and sect. 2 of ch. 4 of Part II. Stratum's Introduction to Conveyancing. Real Property Act 1915, Part II., sects: 62, 63, 79, , 94, 101, 105 to 116 inclusive, 124 to 133 inclusive, 144, 147, 148, 149. 157, 168, 159, 173 to 176 inclusive. Real Property Act 1918. Conveyancing Act 1915. Conveyancing Act 1917. Supreme Court Act 1915, sects. 68 to 73 inclusive. Transfer of Land Act 1915, except sects. 6 to 16 inclusive, 19 to 34 inclusive, 36, 39, 46, 80 to 86 inclusive; Parte V., X.. XL, sects. 225. 231, 334 to 238 inclusive; Fart XV., sects. 264 to 267 inclusive, 273. Transfer of Land Act 1916, sects. 3, 9, 11. 12, 18. Transfer of Land Act 1918. Partnership Act 1915, sects. 24, 25, 26. Insolvency Act 1915, sects. 46, 46, 49. 62, 61, 141 to 167 inclusive, 166 to 169 inclusive, 218, 219, 220, 179. Administration and Probate Act 1915, sects. 5 to 12 inclusive, 16. • • Married Women's Property Aot 1915. Trusts Act 1915, sects. 12 to 18 inclusive, 37, 38. Settled Estates and Settled Lands Act, 1916. Sees. 6a, 56 to 69 inclusive, 64, 65, 68 to 74 inclusive, 76 to 79 84 to 89 inclusive, 97 to 101 inclusive, 110, 111, 115 to 120 inclusive, 122 to' 131 inclusive. Instruments Act 1915, Part XI. . Landlord and Tenant Act 1915, sects. 3, 4, 9 to 12 inclusive. 17, 25, 3i», 45, 47, 48, 51. Wills Act 1915. Wills Act 1918. : . _, The . cases referred to in the notes • to the above statutes in the edition of the Consolidated Stat­ utes printed by the Government Printer. LAWS. 68ft

Additional for Honours. Leake's Digest of the Law of Property in Land, Farts I.. II., except ch. 2 of Part I. Leake on the Uses and Profits of Land, sect. 2 of ch. 1 of Part II. 'Smith's Leading Cases:—Twyne's Case, Spencer's Case, together with the Notes on these cases. Tudor's Leading Cases in Real Property:—Rouse's Case, Richardson v. Langridge, together with ' the Notes on these Cases.

THE LAW OP CONTRACT AND PERSONAL PRO- PERTY— Anson's Principles of the English Law of Contract. .Joshua Williams's Principles of the Law of Personal Property (except chapter 3 of Part I., chap­ ters 1, 4, 6 and 7 of Part II., and chapters 3 and 4 of Part III.). The Law relating to Bills of Sale, Stock Mortgages and Liens on Wool and on Crops—The Instru­ ments Act 1915, Parts VI., VII., and VIII, The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes which refer to the subjects dealt with in the text books.

Additional for Honours.- • An advanced study of the Pass Work. - - The foUowing cases, with the notes thereto, in Smith's - Leading Cases; Paterson v. Gandasequi, Addison v. Gandasequi, Thomson v. Davenporjt. •

THE LAW OF WRONGS— .,.'..- Crimes and Punishments.' ' . ' Civil Wrongs. Tlrt Victorian and; Commonwealth Statutes which refer to these subjects wiU be dealt with by theLecturer. 690 DETAILS.OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Books recommended:— Kenny's Outlines of Criminal Law. Kenny's Cases on Criminal Law (so- far as dealt witb by the Lecturer). Salmond's Law of Torts. Kenny's Cases on the Law, of Torts. ' And for reference:— Stephen's Digest of tbe Criminal Law. Additional for Honours. An advanced study of the- Pass Work. THE LAW OP PROCEDURE AND EVIDENCE— Extra Judicial Remedies. General Principles of the Law of Evidence. Civil Procedure in the Supreme Court. .... Civil Procedure in the: High Court relating to Appeals from the Supreme Court. Criminal Procedure— Procedure before' Magistrates in and out of Sessions. Proceedings by Presentment and' in a Criminal Trial. The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes and Rules of Court which refer to these subjects wUl be dealt with by the Lecturer. Books recommended:— Bloke Odgers' Principles of Pleading. PoweU on Evidence-, 9th edition, by Blake Odgers. Cockle's Leading Cases and Statutes on the Law of Evidence. Additional for Honours. ' An advanced study of the Pass work. EQUITY— Equity, so far as assigned to the Chancery Divi­ sion of the High Court, by the Supreme Court of Judicature Act 1873, section 34, sub­ section 3;'and so far as-exclusive equitable- jurisdiction is created by any Statute. LAWS. 691

•Companies Act 1916 ( So far as dealt' with in Insolvency Act 1916 j lectures. Books recommended:— Strahan and Kenriek's Digest of Equity. UnderhiU's Law of Trusts and Trustees, so for as dealt with in Lectures. Joshua Williams on Personal Property, 17th edition. Part III., ens. 3 and 4. The Victorian Statutes which refer to the subjects above dealt with, together with the cases referred to in lectures. References wiU be made in the Lectures to Story's Com­ mentaries on Equity Jurisprudence (English Edition by.

Additional for Honours. An advanced study of the Pass work. $92 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1921.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOR PINAL HONOURS IN" LAWS AND THE LAW SCHOLARSHIP FOR THE EXAMINATION TO BE HELD IN THE. FIRST TERM, 1921. i. PRIVATE INTERNATIONAL^ LAW The Subjects above- prescribed for. 8. THE .LAW OF WRONGS H6nours. 8. EQUITY

THE LAW OF PROPERTY IN LAND AND CON­ VEYANCING— ; The subjects prescribed for Examination in the Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing.for the- Third Year Laws, both for Pass and Honours,, with 'the foUowing in addition:— Smith's Leading Cases':—Clayton v. Blakey, Doe d. Rigge v. BeU, Dovaston v. P/iyne, Keech v. Hall, Moss v. Gallimore, Nepean v. Doe,. Taylor v. Horde, and the Notes on these cases. Tudor's . Leading Cases in Real Property:—Lewis Bowie's Case, Morley v. Bird, Tyrrel's Case, Shelley's Case, Cadell v. Palmer, and the Notes to these cases.

6. THE LAW OP CONTRACT AND PERSONAL. PROPERTY— The subjects prescribed ante for Examination in the- Law of Contract and Personal Property both for Pass and Honours, and tbe foUowing cases,, with the notes. thereto, in Smith's Leading: Cases; Birkmyr v. Darnell, Coggs v. Bernard, Collins v. Blantern, Cumber v. Wane, Lick- borrow v. Mason, Marriot v. Hampton, Cutter v. FoweU. LAWS. • . • 59*.

6. LEGAL HISTORY— - (In addition to History - and Sources of ' English, an*.. Australian Law.) Maine's Ancient Law, and Maine's 'Early History . of Institutions, Lectures IX. and X.; Bryce's Studies in History and Jurisprudence, Essays xn.. xrv., xv. Holdsworth's History of English Law, vol, II., cop, -' TV., and vol. in., caps. II. and HI.; Black- stone, Commentaries: Introduction, Sections-' 1. 2, and 3; Book HI., caps. HI.. IV., V., and Book TV., cap. XXXIII.j Maitland's Equity (Seven Leqturea on the Forme of ' Actdoff); A Century of Law Reform (Moc- *,' : - millan, 1901); Dicey's Law and Opinion in England.

7. JURISPRUDENCE (including ROMAN LAWK-, <- In addition toi the pass work,, candidates should read—. Bryce, Studies in History and Jurisprudence, Es­ says II.. X., XI.. XV. Dicey,. Law and Opinion, in England During the- • Nineteenth Century; 'Jerthro Brown, Trend of Modern Legislation, • i •-., . 594 DETAILS Of SUBJECTS, 1921.

SUBJECTS OP THE EXAMINATION FOB THE DEGREE OP DOCTOR OP LAWS TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1921. [N.B.—Candidates who were Graduates of the University before 28rd June, 1890, may proceed either by Thesis or Examination. Candidates who have graduated since that date con proceed by Thesis only. See Regulation XII.]

WOMAN LAW— . (1). A general acquaintance with -the History and Principles of Roman Law (Public and Private) to the death of Justinian. (2). The Lex Aqnilia.

JURISPRUDENCE— (1). A general acquaintance with the views of the leading English writers on Jurisprudence. (2). The following special subject:— The Theory of Law and Justice.

PRINCIPLES OP LEGISLATION— The Utilitarians and their successors. MEDICINE. I 595

FACULTY OF MEDICINE.

"DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE SECOND AND FOURTH TERMS, 1920. ANP FIRST TERM. 1921.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PAST I. See under Science

CHEMISTRY, PAST I. (including Inorganic and Organic . Chemistry), See under Science. rZOOLOGY (Medical Course). The elements of vertebrate and invertebrate mor­ phology, including the characters of the chief divisions of the animal kingdom, illustrated by reference to typical examples of each. Tbe structure, life-history and functions of unicellular animals. . The more important points in the structure and lile- . history of the foUowing parasites: Trypanosoma, Plasmodium, Coccidium, Distomum, Taenia. Ascaris,Oxyuris, Anchylostomat Filaria, Trichina. •Brief account of the structure of the' crayfish and a typical insect. The life history of flies and mosquitos. The structure of the shark, with special reference to the circulatory and respiratory systems. The structure, development and life-history of the Frog in detail-. The structure of tbe rabbit. Outline of the development of the bird and of the total membranes in mammalia. « 596. DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

laboratory Work.— Examination by means of directions and preparations' of examples of the chief types dealt with in lectures. The types studied include the fol­ lowing :—Amoeba, Paramoecium, Hydra, Parache- raps,Hyla, Lepus. Dissection of the mammalian eye. The examination of specimens and sectiono- iUustrating the organogeny of the fowl and frog.'. For text-books, reference books, etc., see Zoology, Part I. (Science). <. Students must be provided with the foUowing:— Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying at least 60-460 diameters; to be approved by the- Professor. Box of approved dissecting instruments. Note books. • ' Slides and Coverslips. Box of coloured crayons.

BOTANY (Medical Course)— . , Plant cell and comparison.with animal cell. Growth' and division of plant ceUs, Turgidity, plasmo-- lysis. Osmotic pressure.. Permeability and . semi-permeability. Chief types of plant cell; Cell-contents. Changes in cell-wall. Cork, lignin, wood fibre. The storage food materials of plants. Starch, cellulose,. cane-sugar, glucose, levulose, innlin, inannite, oi), fat, amides, proteids. Distribution of these, food materials in chief types of seeds (pea, maize, wheat, castor-oil), vegetables (carrot, potato) and fruits (apple, banana). , The mode of nutrition of plants. Dependence of animals on plants for foodand energy. , Respiration- and transpiration in plants. Influence- of plants on air. A typical bacterium. . Life history and structure. Types of shape and structure in bacteria '. " 'generally.' Beneficial tind injurious bacteria.. - Root-tubercle bacteria. MEDICINE. i 597'

' Yeast. Structure and life history. Beer yeast and wine yeast. Alcoholic fermentation. Zymase and plant enzymes. Types of fungi.. Structure and reproduction. Mucor and mucor yeast. Penicillium. Green mould. Pathogenic forms of Aspergillus, A. fumigatus and A. Tokelau (Samoa leprosy). Fungi causing disease in animals. Favns (O'ospora porriginis), Ringworm (Oospore tonsurans),. Tinea versicolor (Sporotrichum Furfur), Thrush (Endomyces albicans). Tumor forming Crypto- • - , cocci. - • ... For Honours. Primary and secondary structure of stem. Secondary growth. Structure and function of wood. Healing of wounds. Grafts and grafting. The flower and development ot the ovule. Pollination and development of the seed. Heredity. • Laboratory Work.— CeU, cell contents, cell-tissues. Bacteria. Yeast' and' Fungi. In additi6nto the requirements for Biology, students. ' wiU require a flat ground razor. - . - - • , • ^ - • i . Books for reference-.— Lowson's Text-book of Botany. Reynolds Green, Physiology-of Plants. '' '•.-•. * ...... , ANATOMY (INCLUDING HIBTOLOOT)— -' Lectures in Anatomy will be distributed over the three- Terms of the Second Year and the first two' Terms of J tb*- Third Year...... ,,. PRACTICAL ANATOMY." 'Each student should dissect the five parts of the huinaai body twice. The work must be completed in the Second! ^598 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Year and the First and Second Terms of the Third Year. •Certificated evidence must be produced that all dissections thave been satisfactorily performed.

HISTOLOGY AND EMBRYOLOGY. Practical Classes in Histology wUl be conducted by the Lecturer in Histology twice a week during the First Term --and once a week during the Second and Third Terms of the / -Second Year.

Books recommended :— As a Text-Boot: Cunningham—Text-book ot Anatomy. Fourth edi- 1 tion. 'For Practical Anatomy: Berry—Practical Anatomy. For Surface Anatomy: Rawlings—Surface Anatomy. As an Atlas: Spolteholz—Hand Atlas of Human Anatomy. Last English or German edition. For Histology— Lewis and Stohr—A Text-book of Histology.' Second edition. v ' For Embryology: MaoMnrrich—Development of the Human Body. Fourth edition. Or Quoin's Anatomy, Vol. I. Eleventh edition. * For Sectional Anatomy, Berry—Clinical Atlas of Sectional and Topographical Anatomy.

fHYSIOLOGT— A course of lectures, about ninety in number, on "Systematic Physiology (excluding Special Senses) is given iby the Professor of Physiology. . The lectures extend through tbe Second Year and through the First Two MEDICINE. 599" •» Terms of the Third Year of medical study. -The aim of the lectures is.to present the subject objectively by means- ef experiments and demonstrations, and the student is. expected to keep pace with the lectures by reading the appropriate chapters in the prescribed text-book. Lectures on the Special Senses, some ten in number, and. Ulnstrated with experiments and demonstrations, are given, by Sir. J. W. Barrett. Students are supplied with a printed, synopsis of these lectures, and are expected to carry out simple experiments on the subject as indicated in printed, directions supplied. Practical Classes in Biochemistry, some thirty in number,, are conducted by the Professor, assisted by the Lecturer in Physiology. Type-written sheets giving theory and detailed- practical directions are supplied before each class. These- sheets should bo shielded from injury during class work, and filed for future consultation. Each student is expected, to provide himself with a set of apparatus, a description of which is posted in the laboratory at the beginning of the- Course. Practical Classes, ten in number, in Experimental Physi. ology , are conducted during the Third Term of the- Second Year. For this course dissecting instruments are- necessary. A course of practical exercises in Clinical Biochemistry*, nine in number, is given in tbe First Term of the Third Year. 'In this course both chemical apparatus and microscope will be required. A course of lectures with experiments and demonstrations^ ten in number,- on Physiological Pharmacology, is given in. the Second Term of the Third Year. Honour Classes in Practical Biochemistry and Practical! Biophysics are held during Two Terms of the course i£ suitable candidates present themselves.

Books recommended.(latest editions):—

Pass. For Practical work— Plimmer—Practical Organic and Bio-Chemistry.- i 600 DETAILS QF SUBJECTS, 1920.

For Systematic work-— ' Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology Rothera—Notes on Pharmacology.

i Additional for Honours. Alcock and Ellison—Practical Physiology. Starling—Principles of Human.Physiology.

•PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY— < In the Course of Lectures on Pathology about twelve ; hundred specimens from the University Museum of Patho­ logy are demonstrated to the class. Complete notes of the Lectures are supplied in advance to all members of the • class, and contain numbered references to all specimens shown. Post-mortem demonstrations are conducted at the Mel­ bourne Hospital as far as possible daily, at 11.30 a.m. • (Saturdays, 11 a.m.). These demonstrations are given by the Professor of Pathology or by the Stewart Lecturer and the Beaney Scholar in Pathology. In the Laboratory Class, of' Pathological Histology, in i the First and Second Hospital Terms of the Fourth Year; each student prepares and mounts a series of 84 sections, which are fully described in the Laboratory Handbook. The Laboratory Class in Elementary Bacteriology com- ipletes during the Third Term of the Third Year a course which is set oiit in the Bacteriological Laboratory Hand- 1 book, enibraoing the usual and more valuable methods, and the practical study of the chief pathogenic organisms. The -coarse of instruction includes demonstrations, varying from . year to year, of important subjects beyond the scope of the -Handbook. Text-Books recommended:— Green—Pathology and Morbid Anatomy. Adami—Inflammation. Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology. Bolduan—Immune Sera. . .Hutchison and Rainy—Clinical Methods. ...' . MEDICINE. 604

(FOB GENERAL PUBPOBES OF REFERENCE the foUowing works are recommended:— Adami—General Pathology. Adami and Nicholls—Systemic Pathology. Ziegler—General and Special Pathology. Pembrey and Ritchie—General Pathology. MacCaUum—Text-book of Pathology. .Hiss and Zinsser—Text-book of Bacteriology. Wells—Chemical Pathology. .Barton—Vital Function Testing Methods. 'The Pathological Sections of the Text-books in Medi­ cine, Surgery, and Obstetrics and Gynae­ cology.

MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY— (a) Weights and Measures of tbe Metric System and their equivalences in the Imperial System, (b) The general nature and composition, and the more important physical and chemical characters, of tbe Pharmacopoeial substances named' in the annexed schedule, and of the more important non-official drugs. \ • (c) The composition of the Pharmacopoeial prepar­ ations of these drugs, and the processes employed in their manufacture. •(d) The doses of these drugs and of their preparations in terms of the Metric System. • (e) Chemical and Pharmaceutical incompatibilities. .(f) '111e candidate will be required to recognise drugs v indicated by italics in the annexed schedule. '(«•) The Candidate will be required to write prescript­ ions With and without abbreviations, the doses being expressed in terms of tbe Metric System. NOTE.—Certificates ot having acquired, at the Melbourne •College of Pharmacy, a practical knowledge of the prepara­ tion of medicines will be granted to those students only who have given evidence by practical work of proficiency >in the operations of compounding and dispensing. 602 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

SCHEDULE or PHABUACOFOEIAL SUBSTANCES. Aoaciae Gummi, Acetanilidum, the Official Mineral! Acids, Acidum Aceticum, - Acidum Acetyl-- salicylicnm, Acidum Arseniosum, Acidum Ben-- aoicum, Acidum Carbplicum, Acidum Citricum' Acidum Hydrocyanicum Ditnlum, Acidum I'icri- cum, Acidum Salicylicum, Acidum Tannicum, Acidum Tartariciim, Aconiti Radix, Adeps Lanae, Adrenalinum, AElher] Alcohol, Aloe, Ammonii. Acetatis Liquor, Ammonii Bromidum, Ammonii Carbonas, Ammonii Chloridum, Amygdala Amara, Amyl Nitris, Antimoniuui Tartaratum, Apomor- phinoe Hydrochloridum, Argenti Nitras, Asafel- ida. Balsamum Tululanum, Barbitouum, Belladounae Folia, Belladounae Kadix, Benzaminoe Lactos, Ben- Boinum, Tbe Official Salts of Bismuth, Borax: Pnriflcatus, Btichu Folia. Caffeina, Calx and the more important Salts of Cal­ cium, Calumbae Kadix, Camphora, Cannabis In- dica, Cantharidinam, Cascara Sagrada, Catechu Pallidum, Cetaceum, Chloral Formamidnm,. Chloral Hydras, Chloroformum, Cinchonae Rubrae- Cortex, Cocaina, Colchici Cormus, Colchici Se- mina, Colocynthidis Pulpa, Copaiba, Creosotum, Cresol, Creta Praeparata, Crotonis Oleum, Cube— bae Fructus, Cupri Sulphas. Diamorpfainffi Hydrochloridum, Digitalis. Folia. Ergola, Ethyl chloridum, Eucalypti Oleum. Pel Bovinum Pnrificatum, Ferri et Ammonii Citras,. Ferri et Potassii Tartras, Ferri et Quiuinae Citras, Ferri Perchloridi Liquor, Ferri Sulphas, The- Saccharated Salts of Iron, Filix Mas. Galln, Getsem i i Kadix. Cenlianae Radix, Qlusiduuv Glycerinum, Guaiocol, Gnoiocol Carbonas. Hexamina, Homatropinae Uydrobromidum, Hydrargyri lodidum Rubrum, Hydrargyri Oxidum Flavum, Hydrargyri Oxidum Rubrum, Hydrargyri Per- chloridum; Hydrargyri Subchloridum, Hydrargy­ rum, Hydrargyrum Ammoniatum, Hyoscyami Folia. lodoformum, lodum, Ipecncuanhne Radix. Jalapa. MEDICINE. 60$

Kino, Kino Eucalypti." Liquor Formaldehydj, Lithii Carbonas, Lithii Citras. Magnesia, Magnesii Sulphas, Menthol, Methyl Salicylas,. Methylsulphonal, Morrhuae Oleum, Myrrha. Naphthot, Nux Vomica. Oleum Sinapis Volatile, Opium. Pancreatis Liquor, Paraffinum, PeUetierina, Pepsinum,. Phenacetinum, Phenazonum, Phenolphthalein- um, Phosphorus, Pbysostigmina, Filocarpina,. Fix Carbonis Praeparata, Plumbi Acetas, Plumbi Snbacetatis Liquor, Podophylli Rhieoma, Potassa- Caustica (and the more important salts of Potas­ sium), Pruni Virginiaui Cortex, Pyroxylinnm. Quassiae Lignum, Quillaiae Cortex. Resorcinum, Rhei Rhiaoma, Ricini Oleum. Saccharum Lactis, Salol, Santoninum, Scammoniae Ra­ dix, Scilla, Scoparii Cacumina, Senegae Radix, Senna, Soda Caustica (and the more important- salts of Sodium), Spiritus Ammoniae Aroma- ticus, Spiritus AEtheris Nitrosi, Stramonii Folia,. Strontii Bromidum, Strophanlhi Semina, Sulph- onal. Sulphur Praecipitatum, Sulphur Sublimatum. Terebinlhinae Oleum, Theobrominae et Sodii Salicylas^ Thymol, Thyroideum Sicou'ni, Trinitrini Liquor. Zinci Chloridum, Zinci Oxidum, Zinci Sulphas,

N.B.—This List is to be token as a means of assistance- to students in their reading, and not as an absolute guide- for the examinations.

Text-book recommended:— . <- Bruce and Dilling—Materia Medica and Therapeutics.-

THERAPEUTICS— Text book recommended;— Bruce and DiUing—Materia Medica and Therapeutics. .41 •604 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

For reference': Springthorpe—Therapeutics, Dietetics and Hygiene- Langdon Brown and Murphy — Tbe Practitioner's Encyclopaedia of Medical Treatment.

PUBLIC HEALTH— Air—Composition, impurities, ' ventilation, amount required,' natural and artificial ventilation, examination of air. Soil—Ground air, ground water, organic matter in soil, classification of soils. Water—Quantity and supply, quality, impurities, puri­ fication, examination of water supplies. Food—Classification of Poods, preservation of foods, unsound food, diseases caused by food. Sanitary Engineering—Dwellings—sanitary defects disposal of refuse, wet and dry methods, sewers sewage disposal. meteorology—Temperature, winds, humidity, rainfall, atmospheric pressure, climate. Disease^— Infectious Disease, history of epidemics— means of prevention, occupational diseases. Vital Statistics. The Law of Public Health—Notification, preventive measures, nuisances, insanitary habitations, protection of food supplies.

Text books recommended: — Parkes and Kenwood—Hygiene and Public Health.

..For reference:— Notter and Firth—Theory and Practice of Hygiene. Rosenau—Preventive Medicine and Hygiene. Springthorpe—Therapeutics, Dietetics and Hygiene. MEDICINE. 605

OBSTETRICS AND GYNiECOLOGY— - For the pass examination there wiU be a written paper in . Obstetrics, and a written paper in Gynaecology, an Oral Examination in Obstetrics, and any candidates may be called -upon -to .undergo a practical clinical examination in Gyna­ ecology. Books recommended:— On Obstetrics— Jellet—Short Practice of Midwifery. . On Gynecology— Home—Practical Gynaecology, 2nd editiou. For reference:— Handler—Medical Gynecology. Practical demonstrations in Obstetrics ore conducted •with the phantom during one Term.

MEDICINE— Books recommended:— Osier—Principles and Practice of Medicine. Allohin—Manual of Medicine. Hutchison and Rainy—Clinical Methods. For reference:— AUbutt—System of Medicine.

FORENSIC MEDICINE— Relation of medical men to Courts of Law. Appear­ ances in the dead body. Identity. Sudden death. Wounds and Injuries. Asphyxia. Sexual questions. Questions connected with the new-born child. Life insurance. Toxi­ cology. Examination of stains. - Itext-booke recommended:— , Luff—Text-book of Forensic Medicine and Toxi- ' cology. Glaister—Medical Jurisprudence and Toxicology. Dixon Mann—Forensic Medicine. 606' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1920.

Books ot reference -. Tidy—Legal Medicine. Taylor^—Principles and Practice of Medical juris­ prudence. Peterson and Haines-—Legal Medicine and TOXVT, eology.

SURGERY— The Examination includes the whole subject. Text-books recommended:— Rose and Carless—Manual of Surgery. Waring—Manual of Operative Surgery.. Treves—Surgical Applied Anatomy,. . . Spencer & Gaek—Surgery.. As works of reference:— * Treves—System of Surgery. Binnie—Operative Surgery (New Edition).. Choyce—System of Surgery,

SPECIAL SUBJECTS— Books recommended:— • Ophthalmology— Swanzy—Handbook of the Diseases of the Eye;. Diseases of Children— Goodhart and Still—Diseases-of Children. And for reference':—' Holt—Diseases-of Infancy and,Childhood. Diseases of the Skin— Norman Walker—An Introduction to Dermatology.. Sequeiro—Diseases-of the-Skin. And fpr reference-:—. Crocker—Diseases of the Skin. Menial Diseases— Stoddart—Mind: and its-Disorders CLINICAL MEDICINE AND CLINICAL SURGERY. Students must keep records of the cases in the beds allotted to them, in a prescribed note-book; and as port of the final examination these note-books must be submitted to the Clinical Examiners by both Pass and Honour Candi­ dates, and the Examiners will give consideration to this evidence of work done.

[To replace Announcements on pp. 607-612.] MELBOURNE HOSPITAL. Scheme of Clinical Instruction submitted by the Medical Staff and approved by the Faculty of Medicine. Sept., Oct.— ^ird Tear. Sections A and B—Medical, Surgical and Special Tutorials. Third Tear.- (Nov., Dec). Fourth Tear : (Jan.). Section A—Medical In-patients 4 days a week. Medical Out-patients 2 days a week. Section B—Surgical In-patients 2 days a week. Surgical Out-patients 2 days a week. Casualty Practice 2 days a week. Feb., Mch., ApL— Fourth Tear. Section A—As for Section B above. Section B—As for Section A above. May, June, July— Section A—As for Section A above. Section B—As for Section B above. Aug., Sept., Oct.— Section A—As for Section B above. Section B—As for Section A above. Fourth Tear: (Nov.. Dec.). Fifth Tear: (Jan.). Section A—Medical In-patients 2 days a week. Medical Out-patients 4 days a week. Section B—Surgical In-patients 2 days a week. Surgical Out-patients 2 days a week. Casualty Practice 2 days a week. Feb., Mch.. Apl.— Ft/** Year ; Section A—As for Section B last specified. Section B—As for Section A last specified. May, June, July— Section A—As for Section A last specified. Section B—As for Section B last specified. Aug., Sept., Oct.— Section A—As for Section B last specified. Section B—As for Section A last specified. Fifth Tear: Nov., Dec. Long Vac. following— Special Departments not yet completed. Senior Posts in Oat-patient and In-patient Medicine and Surgery and in Special Departments.

Students must also attend Clinical Lectures and Post­ mortem Examinations in acconlunce with notices to be posted at the Hospital.

ALFRED HOSPITAL. Scheme of Clinical Instruction proposed by the Staff of the Alfred Hospital and approved by the Faculty of Medicine. The Clinical Work of Students from the end of the • Second Term of the Third Year will be baaed on their tenure of hospital appointments. The year will be divided into two periods of six months, beginning on May 1st and November 1st, and called respectively the Winter and Summer Semesters. All the winter appoint­ ments will be for the full six months; whereas the Summer Semesters will be divided into two periods of three months, and the Students of each year into two groups—A and B. These appointments will be inde­ pendent of University Terms and Vacations, which will thus be associated only with courses of instruction other than actual ward work. I.—Third Year Students shall during September and October of the Third Term - (1) Attend four days a week out-patient surgical practice, with Tutorial instruction two days a week. (2) Attend Medical Tutorial Classes in the out­ patient department two days a week. During the ensuing Summer Semester they shall he divided into two groups, and— (1) For three months act as dresser to one out­ patient surgeon (two days weekly), and attend out-patient medicine four day« weekly, with Tutorial instruction on two days. (2) For three months act as clerk to one out-patient physician (two days weekly), and attend out­ patient surgery four days weekly, with Tutorial instruction on two days. During this Semester Students will also attend in the Casualty Department a fortnight at a time, according to roster. They will also attend post-mortem examina­ tions, and, during Term, Surgical Clinical Lectures. II. Fourth Year Students shall, during the ensuing Winter Semester, act as dresser to an In-patient Surgeon, attend post-mortem Examination and Clinical Lectures on Surgery; and receive instruction in Anaesthetics. III.—During the enauing Summer Semester Fourth and Filth Year Students shall be divided into two groups, and shall - (1) Act for three months as clerk to one in-patient physician. {2) Act for three months as dresser to one in­ patient surgeon, and attend Clinical Lectures and pjst-mortems. They will also receive in­ struction in Diseases of the Eye and Skin. IV.—Fifth Year Students shall, during th? ensuing Winter Semester, act as clerk to one in-patient physician; attend Clinical Lectures and post-mortems, and receive instruction in Diseases of the Ear, Nose and Throat. They shall also act as Clinical Assistants in the out-patient medical department as directed. V.—From November 1st to the. Final Examination, Fifth Year Students shall assist tie out-patient physicians, surgeons and specials as directed, an'd attend the practice in the wards of the hospital. They will be at liberty to apply for any Student appointment in the hospital. VI. (1). Students are expected to be iu attendance at the Hospital from 9.30 a.m., and on arrival to sign their names in the attendance book which will be kept in the entrance hall. (2) Students attending tbe in-patient practice of the hospital are expected to take tbe histories and notes of such cases as may be allotted to them. They shall be present at the visit of their honor­ ary physician or surgeon on two mornings a week at the time fixed for his visit. (8). An attendance of not less than three-fourths of the total number of days available shall be re­ quired for certificates of hospital attendance. (4). Post-mortem examinations will be conducted by the Honorary Pathologist (Mr. Brett) at 11.30 a.m. (5). The Clinical Pathologist (Dr. Trinca) wiU be in attendance from 9.30 a.m. daily. ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL. Scheme of Clinical Instruction proposed by the Staff of St Vincent's Hospital and approved by the Faculty of Medicine. September-October, Third Tear— Tutorial Medicine, Surgery and Pathology. Casualty O.P. Practice, with tuition. November 1 (Third Tear) to AprU 30, (Fourth Tear)— In-patient Surgical Practice. O.P. Medical and Surgical Practice. Tutorial Medicine and Surgery, Clinical Pathology. Post Mortem Examinations. May 1 to October 31 (Fourth Tear)— I.P. Medical Practice. O.P. Medicine and Surgery. Tutorial Lectures, Clinical Pathology. Post Mortems. November 1 (Fourth Year) to AprU 30 (Fifth. Tear)— I.P. Medical Practice. O.P. Medicine and Surgery. O.P. Ophthalmology and Skin Diseases. Clinical Pathology, Post) Mortems. May 1 to October 31 (Pifth Tear)— I.P. Surgical Practice and Gynaecology. Clinical Pathology, Post Mortems. Diseases of the Nose, Ear and Throat. November 1 (Fifth Tear), to Final Examination— Fill in any shortage of work from leave of absence for special subjecte. Attend to weak subjects. Or act as senior surgical Students. Attend Clinical Lectures on Medicine and on Surgery in the Fourth and Fifth Years, according to special time table. Aot as Clinical Assistants to O.P. Physician and O.P. Surgeon as directed. A Booklet of the Details and Time-Table of Hospital Practice may be obtained from the Registrar of St. Vincent's Hospital. MEDICINE. 607

ANNOUNCEMENTS.

These Announcements are liable to variation as ike circumstances may demand.

HOSPITAL . PRACTICE FOR THE DEGREES OP BACHELOR OF MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OP SURGERY.

The First Hospital Term in 1920 wiU begin- on the first day of February. The Third Hospital Term in 1920 will end on December 14. The Special Long Vacation Hospital Term wiU extend from the 8th January to the end of February, 1921.

Scheme proposed by the Staff of the Melbourne Hospital and approved by the Faculty of Medicine for 1920-21. 1. That, unless otherwise specified, the attendances of students upon hospital practice be from 9 a.m. six days a week, and that an attendance book be kept in the hall for the daily signatures of students, such book to be removed doily at 9.30 a.m., and placed by the hall porter in the custody of the Medical Superintendent. 2. That the Resident Medical Officers commence duty at 9 a.m. and also keep a roll of attendances of students, to be initialled weekly by their honorary physician 6r surgeon. 3. Tbe certificate of satisfactory attendance upon hospital -practice to require not less than three-quarters of the total number, unless the Staff accept the excuse presented for the -deficiency. 4. That the Clinical arrangements for the ensuing year be as follows:— (a) During the third term of the third year each student to attend Out-patient Surgical Practice four days a week including tutorial instruction for one 608 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 198).

hour twice a week under one of the Surgical) Tutors, and to attend tutorial instruction for one hour twice a week under one of the Medical Tutors. (b) During the first and second terms of the fourth, year students to attend In-patient Surgical Practice nx days a week, acting as Surgical Dressers to one of the In-Patient Surgeons and to attend his morning operations. (*,) During the third term of the fourth and the first- and second terms of the fifth years, students to attend In-patient Medical Practice six days a week, acting as Ward Clerks under some one of tbe In-patient Physicians during the third term of the fourth year, and under some one other In-patient Physician for the first and second terms of the fifth year; also to attend one day a week for one term the practice of one of each of the other In-patient Physicians. (d) From the end of the third term of the third year to the end of the third term of the fourth year students to be balloted for in groups of four, each group to act as Dressers in the Casualty Department five mornings a week for a period of four weeks continuously. (e) During the first (or the second) terra of the fifth, year half the students to attend Out-patient Medical Practice one day a week, and the other half to attend Out-patient Surgical Practice one- day a week during the second (or first) term of tbe fifth year, acting as Clinical Assistant to an> Out-patient Surgeon during that term. (/) During the third term of the fifth year, students . -s to attend In-patient Surgical Practice with Ward Dressers hip daily, and Out-patient Medical Practice with Clinical Assistantsbip to an Out­ patient Physician two days a week, and to attend surgical operations one afternoon a week. (g) During the Special Long Vacation Term students to attend the Medical and Surgical Practice of the Hospital. MEDICINE. 609*

'{A) Students to attend clinical lectures in Medicine- and Surgery according to a time table to be- drawn up by tbe clinical lecturers. (i) Except when otherwise ordered by the physician or surgeon in charge of the case, all post-mortem, examinations to be performed daily at 11.30 a.m. (j) Students to attend post-mortem demonstrations, except when specially excused, daily in the first,, second and third terms of the fourth year and the first term of the fifth year, and not lesa than three times a week in the remaining terms- of the fifth year.

SPECIAL SUBJECTS. The Melbourne Hospital is also recognised for the teach­ ing of tbe foUowing special subjects:— 1. Gynaecology. 2. Ophthalmology. 3. Diseases of the Skin. 4. Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear. 6. Anaesthetics.

Scheme proposed by the Staff of the St. Vincent's Hospital: and approved by the Faculty of Medicine for 1920-21. I. Third year students shall during the Third Term (a) attend out-patient Surgical practice four days it- week, including— Tutorial Surgery two days a week (6) attend Tutorial classes in the out-patient Medical Department two days a week. II. Fourth-year students shall:— (1) during the First and Second Terms (a) attend pa two days a week in-patient bedside instruction; in Clinical Surgery; (6) attend the wards daily and act as surgical dressers to one of the in­ patient surgeons ; (c) attend post-mortem- examinations. (2) during the Third Term (a) attend on two days a week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical! Medicine; (6) attend the wards daUy and act: as ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians (e) attend post-mortem examinations. €10 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1920.

III. Fifth year students shaU:— (1) daring tbe First Term (a) attend on two days a week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical Medicine; (b) attend the wards daily and act as word clerks to one of the in-patient physicians; (e) attend on one day a week out-patient in­ struction in Clinical Medicine [or in Clinical Surgery]; (d) attend Clinical Lectures in Medicine and Surgery; (e) attend post-mortem examina­ tions. {2) during the Second Term (a) attend on two days a week in-patient bedside instruction in Clinical Medicine; (6) attend the wards daily and act as senior ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians; (e) attend on one day a week out-patient instruction in Clinical Surgery [or in Clinical Medicine] ; (d) attend Clinical Lectures in Medicine and Surgery; (e) attend post-mortem examinations.

. -(3) during tbe Third Term (a) attend on two days a week tn-patient bedside instruction in Clinical - Surgery; (b) attend the wards daily and act as senior surgical dressers to one of the in-patient surgeons; (c) attend on two days a week oat- patient instruction in Clinical Medicine; (d) attend Clinical Lectures in Medicine and Surgery; (e) attend post-mortem examinations.

(4) during the Special Long Vacation Term following the Fifth year attend the Medical and Surgical practice of the Hospital.

IV. Fifth year students shaU act (a) as Clinical assist­ ants to on out-patient physician during one term ; (b) as Clinical assistants to an out-patient surgeon during one . term. V. There will be thirty Clinical Lectures in Medicine and thirty in Surgery delivered by the Clinical Lecturers •during the year according to a schedule posted at the beginning of each term. MEDICINE. 611

SPECIAL SUBJECTS. St Vincent's Hospital is also recognised for the teaching •of the foUowing special subjects t— 1. Gynaecology. 2. Ophthalmology. 3. Diseases of the Skin. , 4. Diseases of the Nose, Throat and Ear. 6. Anaesthetics.

Scheme proposed by the Staff of the Alfred Hospital, and approved by the Faculty of Medicine for 1920-21. I. Third year students shall during the Third Term (1) attend four days a week out-patient Surgical prac­ tice, including Tutorial classes on two days a week. (2) attend Medical Tutorial classes in the out-patient department two days weekly. * II. Fourth year students shaU :— (1) during the First and Second Terms (a) attend daily in-patient Surgical practice acting as dressers to one of the in-patient surgeons, and attending the practice of one other in-patient surgeon ; (b) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to be delivered by tbe lecturer on Clinical Surgery; (c) attend post-mortem demonstrations; (d) for four weeks to act as dressers in the casualty department for six mornings a week. (2) during the Third Term (a) attend on six days a week in-patient medical practice,acting as junior ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians and attending the practice of one other in-patient physician ; (b) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to be delivered by the lecturer on Clinical Medi­ cine; (c) attend post-mortem examinations. Ull. Fifth year students shaU:— (1) during the First Term (a) attend on five days a week in-patient Medical Practice acting as ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians, and at- 612 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1020.

tending the practice of one other in-patient: physician; (b) attend on one day a week oat- patient medical practice and act as Clinical, assistant to an out-patient physician: (c) attend- weekly a Clinical lecture' to be delivered by. the- lecturer on Clinical medicine; (d) attend post­ mortem examinations. (2) during the Second Term (a) attend on five days a' week in-patient medical practice, acting as senior ward clerks to one of the in-patient physicians,, and attending the practice of one other in-patient physician; (b) act on one day a week as Clini- . oal assistant to one of the out-patient surgeons r- (e) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to be deli­ vered by the lecturer on Clinical Medicine; (d) attend post-mortem examinations. (3) daring the Third Term (a) attend on four days- a week in-patient surgical practice acting as. dresser to one in-patient surgeon and attending the practice of one other in-patient surgeon; (b) act on two days a week as clinical assistant to one of the out-patient physicians; (c) attend weekly a Clinical lecture to be delivered by the- lecturer on Clinical Surgery; (d) attend post­ mortem demonstrations. IV. During the special long vacation term following the fifth year students shall attend the practice of at least one physician and one surgeon. V. (1). Students are expected to be in attendance at- the Hospital from 9.30 a.m., and on arrival to- sign their names in the attendance book which, will be kept in the entrance hall. (2). Students attending the in-patient practice of the hospital are expected to take tbe histories and notes of such cases as may be allotted to them. They shall be present at the visit of their honor­ ary physician or surgeon on two mornings a week at the time fixed for his visit. (3). An attendance of not. less than three-fourths of the total number of days available shall be re­ quired for certificates of hospital attendance. MEDICINE. 61»:

(4). Post-mortem examinations wiU be conducted by the Honorary Pathologist (Mr. Brett) at 11.30- a.m. (5). The Clinical Pathologist (Dr. Trinca) will be in attendance from 9.30 a.m. daily.

SPECIAL SUBJECTS. The Alfred Hospital is also recognised for the teaching: of the following special subjects— / 1. Ophthalmology. 2. Diseases of the Nose, Throat and Ear. 3. Anesthetics. 4. Diseases of the Skin.

HOSPITAL AND PHARMACY FEES. In addition to the University Fees, Medical Students pay the foUowing Fees, in advance, for Hospital and 'Pharma­ ceutical Instruction:— Third Year - CoUege of Pharmacy, JEo IDS. 6d. Third Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hos- • pital; Entrance Fee, JB10 10s. Melbourne, Alfred, or St. Vincent's Hos­ pital ; Clinical Fee, .£6 Gs. Fourth Year - Melbourne. Alfred or St. Vincent's Hos­ pital ; Clinical Fee, £\o 13s. Fifth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hos­ pital ; Clinical Fee, .£14 14a, Fourth or Fifth Women's Hospital, Gynaecology Year (if taken at this Hospital) £'i 2si- Women's Hospital, Obstetrics, M tis.. „ „ Caution Money £3 3s.- Gynaecology (if taken . at the Melbourne or St. Vincent's Hospitals)- - •- £2 2s. Anaesthetics - £1 1s.. Diseases of ChUdren ; - - £1 Is.. Ophthalmology - £1 Is. Diseases of Skin - £1 l8_ Mental Diseases - -' - £1 Is.' Fever Hospital .... £1 Is.. Diseases of Throat, Nose, Ear - 10s. 6d.. •614 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

The Pharmacy Fee must be paid to tbe Registrar of the •College of Pharmacy. The Clinical Pee must be paid to the credit of the Uni­ versity at the Bonk of Victoria, Collins Street, and a dnpU- -cate pay-in slip forwarded to the Registrar. The Entrance Fee in the case of the St. Vincent's Hospital must be paid •to the credit of the University in like manner. Third year students should enter at the Hospitals and .pay their entrance and clinical fees one week before the -commencement of the Third Term. The Fees payable to the Women's Hospital -must be paid •to the Secretary of that Hospital. The Fees for Gynaecology at the Melbourne or St. Vincent's Hospital, and those for ;Diseases of Children and Fever Hospital, must be paid to the Secretaries or other officers specially notified of the corresponding Hospitals. Tbe other Fees for in­ struction in Special Departments must be paid to the -credit of the University in the some manner as tbe Clin­ ical Fees, and in two equal instalments of £2 7s. 3d. with 'the Lecture Fees for the Third Term of the Fourth Year, and £2 7s. 3d. with the Lecture Fees for the First Term -of the Fifth Year. In respect of the Fees so paid for Anaesthetics, Ophthalmology, Diseases of the Skin, and Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear, students shall •through their representatives lodge at the office of the : University Registrar a return showing for each student tbe Hospital and the Instructor selected. Certificate books L shall be lodged with the University Registrar in September -of the Fifth Year for signature by the Instructors in these -departments. SPECIAL DEPARTMENTS. GYNECOLOGY. Clinical Instruction in Gynaecology is given at the Women's Hospital .under the direction of tbe Honorary -Medical Staff. Also at the Melbourne Hospital by Dr. R. H. Fetherston. Also at St. Vincent's Hospital by Dr. T. Murphy (In­ patient) and Dr. £. A. Spowers (Out-patient) (Dr. G. . Baldwin, Acting) as one unit, and by Mr. A. N. McArthur '(In-patient) and Dr. P. D. Brett (Acting) (Out-patient) as •one unit. MEDICINE 61 f>'

OPHTHALMOLOGY. Clinical instruction in Ophthalmology wiU be given at. the Eye and Ear Hospital by the foUowing instructors:— Dr. Percy Webster (Mr. H. E. Stanley, Acting), on.^ Mondays, at 2 p.m.. Dr. W. P. Orr, on Tuesdays, at 2 p.m. Mr. J. F. Rudall, on Wednesdays, at 2 p.m. The class will be divided into sections as may be found- necessary. The students may if they so desire arrange to attend the- hospital on other days than are set out above. It will also be given at the Melbourne Hospital by Sir: J. W. Barrett on Tuesdays at 2 p.m. and Fridays at 9 a.m. And at the Alfred Hospital by Mr. E. L. Gaalt, on Mon­ days and Thursdays, at 2.30 p.m. And at St. Vincent's Hospital by the foUowing in­ structors:— Mr. E. Ryan, on Tuesdays, at 2.80 p.m., and on. Thursdays, at 2.30 p.m. (Operations). Dr. J. M. Baxter, on Fridays, at 2 p.m. Dr. F. A. Newman, on Thursdays, 2.30 p.m.

DISEASES OP CHILDREN. Clinical instruction in Diseases of ChUdren wiU be given* at the Children's Hospital by the members of the Medical and Surgical Staff. Particulars of hours of attendance' are to be obtained from the Secretary of the Hospital.

DISEASES OF THE SKIN. Instruction in Diseases of tbe Skin will be given by Mr. • A. W.'Finch Noyes, as foUows :•— Leotures and Demonstrations at the Medical School,, on Thursdays, at 1 p.m. Clinical instruction at the Melbourne Hospital, on. Wednesdays and Saturdays at 9 a.m. - •616 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

The relative number of Lectures and of Clinical meet­ ings will be subject to notification from time to time. . Clinical Instruction in Diseases of the Skin wUl be given at St. Vincent's Hospital by Mr. Herman Lawrence, on 'Tuesdays and Fridays, at 3 p.m. Clinical Instruction in Diseases of the Skin will be given at the Alfred Hospital by Mr. C. G. Crowley, on Tuesdays .and Fridays, at 2.80 p.m.

MENTAL DISEASES As arranged by the Inspector-General of the .Hospitals ;for the Insane, the majority of the lectures and demonstro- itions will be given at the Receiving House, Royal Fork, where Mr. Godfrey will give the preliminary lectures, • -demonstrate -cases of recent mental disorder, and give instruction in certification for all classes of cases. At, the Kew Hospital for the Insane Mr. Gamble will demon­ strate cases of General Paralysis, Epilepsy, Idiocy, etc. Mr. W. A. T. Lind will lecture on tbe Pathology of Mental Disease. FEVERS. Clinical instruction in Fevers will be given at the Queen's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital by the Medical Super­ intendent on Mondays and. Thursdays, at 2 p.m. Not more than about twelve students can attend together. .The class is divided as found necessary.

DISEASES OF THE THROAT. NOSE AND EAR. Instruction in Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear will Ibe given at the Melbourne Hospital by Mr. W. Kent Hughes and Dr. F. Andrews on Mondays and Thursdays, at 2 p.m. Instruction will he given'at St. Vincent's Hospital by' Dr. J. Murphy, on Tuesdays, at 9.30 a.m.; and by Dr. H. Barry Thomson, on Thursdays, at 2.30 p.m. Instruction wiU be given at the Alfred Hospital by Mr.' S. A. Ewing, on Tuesdays and Fridays, at 2.30 p.m. 1 MEDICINE. 617

Instruction wiU be given at the Eye and Ear Hospital by ttho following instructors:— Dr. E. E. R. Sawrey, on Thursdays, at 2 p.m. Dr. M. Lynch, on Fridays, at 2 p.m. Dr. R. E. Shuter is also a recognised instructor.

ANESTHETICS. . The foUowing Instructors in Aneesthetios have been ^recognised by the Faculty of Medicine:— Melbourne Hospital—Mr. Hornabrook, Dr. Trinca, Dr. J. 8. Yule, Dr. M. D. SUberberg, Mr. W. A. Andrews, and the Superintendent and Registrars. St. Vincent's Hospital—Mr. F. L. Davies, Mr. S. J. Newing, and the Registrar. Alfred Hospital—Mr. C. L. Lempriere, Mr. C. P. W. Dyring, Mr. P. G. Sbelton, and the.Superin- • tendent. ' VWomen's Hospital—Mr. Hornabrook, Miss A. Griffiths, Miss M. Robertson, Mr. C. P. W. Dyring, and the Senior Resident Medical Officer. 618 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1921.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOE EXAMINATIONS FOR> PINAL HONOURS AND SCHOLARSHIPS IN MARCH. 1921.

As far as practicable Honour Examinations will be heldi at the same time as Pass Examinations. Farther Oral Examinations may be held for purposes of a Pass. The- relative weight of subjects is:—Medicine, 3; Surgery, 3;: Obstetrics and Gynaecology, 2. MEDICINE. . The examination in Medicine wiU include a written, paper, a commentary, a clinical and oral examination. SURGERY. '_ The'Examination in Surgery wiU include a written paper,, operative' surgery, a commentary, a clinical and oral: examination. ' .. . . OBSTETRICS AND GYNECOLOGY. The examination in Obstetrics will be by one written- paper including a commentary. The Examination in Gynecology will be by one written, paper, including a commentary.

BEANEY SCHOLARSHIP IN PATHOLOGY. Facilities will be afforded to candidates for this Scholar­ ship who desire, during the fifth year of the course or thereafter, to pursue their practical studies in pathulogicall histology and bacteriology.

ANNOUNCEMENT. APPOINTMENT OFJIES1DENT MEDICAL OFFICERS.. The Committee of the Melbourne Hospital appoints as- resident medical officers for one year from amongst tbe students who have received their clinical training in that Hospital the first twelve in the combined marks on the honour papers at the Final Honour Examination. MEDICINE. ' 6lV „ . ' ' I - The Managers. of St. Vincent's Hospital appoint four- resident medical officers for one year from, amongst the students who have received their clinical training at that Hospital, according to their places in the combined honour- marks ; provided that if there are notsufficient of St. Vincent's students in the class lists, specially selected pass students- may be appointed to supply the deficiency. The Committee of the Alfred Hospital appoints four- resident medical officers for one year, according to their ploces in the combined honour marks. The Committees of the Colac, Kyneton, Wangaiatta, and. Warmambool Hospitals and of the Children's Hospital, Perth, W.A , appoint resident medical officers according tc- thair position in. the combined honour marks at the next, preceding Final Honour Examination.

.42 •620 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR EXAMINATIONS FOR' DEGREES OP DOCTOR OF MEDICtNE AND MASTER OP SURGERY TO BE HELD IN DECEMBER, 1920.

DOCTOR OP MEDICINE. FOE CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY EXAMINATION.

MEDICINE, INCLUDING MEDICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY— Candidates will be required, as part of the examination, to show practical acquaintance with the methods , of Medical Ophthalmoscopy and Laryngoscopy, and. may be required to show practical acquaintance v with the methods of examining the various secre­ tions, including the gastric and intestinal contents. Books recommended in addition to those prescribed' for the course of. Medicine:— Swanzy—Handbook of Diseases of the Eye, latest edition (Text-book). For reference:— - Gowers—Medical Ophthalmoscopy. Poese and Spiller—The Eye and Nervous System.

OBSTETRICS AND MEDICAL GYNECOLOGY— The Examination will include a written paper in -Obstetrics, a Commentary in Medical Gynaecology, and an •Oral Examination in both subjects. Medical Gynaecology .shall mean the pathology, etiology, diagnosis, prognosis and treatment otherwise than by surgical operation of •diseases peculiar to women. • Books recommended :— De Lee—Principles and Practice of Obstetrics. Home—Practical Gynaecology, 2nd Edition. Eden & Lookyer—New System of Gynaecology, Bandler—Medical Gynaecology. MEDICINE. - 621

(DISEASES OP THE NERVOUS SYSTEM, INCLUD­ ING INSANITY— The Examination wiU consist of two parts— («) Diseases of the Nervous System. (*) Insanity. The Examiners in the two parts will confer, but Candi­ dates must pass in both ports. Books recommended:— For Diseases of the Nervous System— Starr—Organic and Functional Nervous Diseases. For Insanity—• Stoddart—Mind and its Disorders. Kraepelin—Clinical Psychiatry (trans. Johnstone). Mandsley—Pathology of Mind.

(DISEASES OP CHILDREN. INCLUDING INFEC­ TIOUS DISEASES— Books recommended:— Holt—Diseases of Infancy and Childhood. Batten Gorrod and Thursfleld—Diseases of Children. Kirmisson—Surgical Diseases of Children. StUl—Common Disorders of Childhood. The term "Diseases of Children" will include both -Medical and Surgical Diseases, but Candidates will not be -examined in operative technique.

. FOE CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY THESIS. RESOLUTION OF THE FACULTY OP MEDICINE, 22ND JULT, 1914— " That in the opinion of the Faculty a Thesis (1) Should not beany ordinary compilation from ' books (2^ Nor a mere compendium of coses. f 3) Nor merely, observational .(4) Bat.should be a substantial contribution to

.m 6S2-> DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1020:

(8). Should be in fit form for publication or be». ' already pubUshed in apprqved form and (6) Should snow work at least equal to that in­ volved in preparation for the examination, in Medicine for the Degree of M.D. by writ­ ten questions." Examination in Clinical Medicine for Candidates proceeding- by Thesis, The Examination in Clinical Medicine for such candi-' dates includes commentary on written cases, examination, of patients, and oral examination. It includes a test of practical acquaintance with methods of' medical ophthal­ moscopy and laryngoscopy, and may include test of practi­ cal acquaintance with methods of examining, secretions,, including gastric and intestinal contents.

(•''• MASTER OP SURGERY. SURGICAL. ANATOMY— Berry—Praotical Anatomy- Davis—Applied Anatomy. Cunningham—Text-book of Anatomy. Last edition- . Berry—Clinical, A tiasof . Sectional and Topograph­ ical Anatomy. SURGICAL PATHOLOGY— ' • ' Green—Pathology and Morljid Anatomy. ' Bowlby—Surgical Pathology- Mnir and: Ritchie—Mannar of- Bacteriology (the-1 surgical portions). In. addition to the surgical text-books and current, surgical periodical literature. The examination will include examination of macroscopic and microscopic specimens. SDEGEEY-r- Treves—System of Surgery (last edition). Cheyneand Burghacd— Manual ;af Surgical Treat­ ment (Dost edition).. 1 ' Burghard—A System of Operative Surgery; Choyce—System of Surgery. , •. •, Moynihan's Abdominal Operations (mat edition). PUBLIC HEALTH. 623

DIPLOMA OF PUBLIC HEALTH. '

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR 1920. LABORATORY PRACTICE IN CHEMISTRY— (1) Air analysis: Humidity, carbonic acid, oxygen, carbonic oxide, etc. (2) Water analysis : Total solids and main ingredients thereof, acidity or alkalinity, hardness, chlorides, nitrates and nitrites, free and albuminoid ammonia, 'reducing power. (3) Food analysis: Such typical foods as milk, bread, meat; alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages. (4) Piiisons, preservatives and disinfectants : Detection and determination. -., . .• -\

LABORATORY PRACTICE IN PHYSIOLOGY— Determination of physical properties of physiological fluids—specific gravity, viscosity, rotation of pol­ arised light, osmotic pressure, refractive index, etc. Detection and estimation of air impurities. Effects on the animal body of oxygen starvation, of carbon dioxide and of carbon monoxide. Vitiation of air by breathing, by combustion of fuel and iUuminants, and by scorching of dust. -L Thermometry in physiology. The relation of the body to hygrometric Conditions and velocity of 'the air. Rate of evaporation of sweat. Estimation of the heat-retaining -properties of clothing materials. - Microscopy of clothing materials. Action on the - body of OVer-clothing, of baths, of hampered res­ piration and of exercise. Calorimetry of feeds. Microscopy of foods. Prepara­ tion- of fooddiagrams.

LABORATORY PRACTICE IK BACTERIOLOGY, &c.— ' The Bacteriology of Air, Water, Soil, Food and Sewage. i. Methods fotr determining numbers and characters ~~ of micro-organisms present in air, water, soU, 624 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

food (fresh and preserved), with special refer- ence to milk and milk products.-' ii. Detection of pathogenic organisms: tubercle, diphtheria, streptococci, typhoid, para-typhoid,. dysentry, cholera, iii. Ptomaines. Micro-organisms associated with food poisoning, iv. Indications of excrementel contamination. Colon . test, B. enteritidis sporogenea test, streptococcal test. v. Germ carriers.. Disinfectants, Antiseptics, and Preservatives,, their Action and Bacteriological Efficacy. Bacteriological standardisation of^disinfectante. The General Pathology of Infection and of • Infectious- Diseases, Including Diseases of Animals transmis­ sible to' Man. Tubercle, leprosy, syphilis, actinomycosis, anthrax, malaria and blood'parasites, typhoid, dysentery, cholera, diphtheria, plague, pneumonia, cerebro­ spinal meningitis, polio-myelitis, hydrophobia,, influenza, catarrh, gonococcal infections, septi­ caemia and pyaemia, hydatids, intestinal parasites,, etc., Immunity and Protection from Infectious Diseases. This will include demonstrations on.the foUowing:— (1) Diagnosis of infectious diseases (agglutin­ ation tests). (2) Blood tests by precipitin methods. Blood tests by hemolytic methods. (3) Phagocytosis and opsonin determinations in health aud disease. (4) Bactericidal action of serum. (6) Toxins and antitoxins. (6) Small pox vaccination, examination of. calf lymph. (7) Preparation and standardisation- of vaccines (for plague, typhoid, tubercle, coccal and . other infections). • . ' PUBLIC HEALTH. '625-

METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATOLOGY— The course of instruction wiU include (1) Meteorological Instruments. — Ordinary types,- Standards and apparatus for continuous regis­ tration ; their installation, use. verification and. adjustment. (2) Methods of making, reducing and tabulating* meteorological observations. (3) Climatology.—Mean and extreme values of clim­ atic elements; their periodical variations and , range; their representation by tabular and graphic methods. Prevailing seasonal direction of winds. (4) Weather changes. Synoptic weather charts. Types of distribution of atmospheric pressure- High and low pressure systems, and their rela­ tion to wind, rain and temperature. (6) 'Australian Climatology.—The monsoon region ; the- arid region; the uniform rain region; the " Medi­ terranean " climate region. Their characteristic weather types. (6) Climate and Health.—Areas with high humidity in Australia; health resortsj climatic distribut­ ion of diseases. '

FIELD AND OFFICE WORK.-' . 1. Investigations into and. preparation ot reports on particular and general sanitary conditions, and on the administration of mnnioipalities.as.regards' . . sanitation. ... 2. Sanitation of ships, dwellings, factories and pubUs buildings, including hospitals, schools, and theatres. Principles of construction and arrange^ ment of public buildings for ensuring public- safety in case of fire or panic. Sanitary arrange­ ments and construction of public baths and\ wash-houses. . " <626 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19-30.

3. Manufacture, preparation and storage of foodstuffs. Procedure involved in the sampling of articles wf food. Sanitary arrangement and construction of dairies and abattoirs. Meat inspection. -4. Manufacturing processed of dangerous, noxious and offensive trades, and appliances used for preven­ tion of effluvium nuisances. -5. Detection and remedying of nuisances and dangers to health. •6. Measures.necessary to prevent, detect, mitigate and eradicate communicable diseases, and also for exclusion of exotic diseases. - '7.' Preparation, storage, preservation, and distribation of sera and vaccine. •8. Methods of disinfection and vermin destruction. -9.'. Scavenging and methods of storage, collection, removal and disposal of night'soil and domestic and trade refuse. 10. Water supplies'—collection, storage, purification, conveyance and distribution. 11. Sanitary fittings, drains, and sewers! Purification and disposal of drainage and sewage.

EXAMINATION, PART I. ^Note,—The details prescribed for examination in Part I. xmd Port It. are intended for the assistance of candidates, jind are not to be construed 'as limiting the power of Ike examiners to test the knowledge of candidates in any •tranch of Sanitary Science. •CHEMISTRY— The Practical Examination wiU follow the lines laid down far Laboratory work. The Written Examination will test the candidate's know­ ledge of the subjects dealt with in .the Laboratory, of food -analysis generally, and of the pbysice and -chemistry of soils and sewage. Evidence of reading beyond tbe limits of the Laboratory coarse will be required. PUBLIC HEALTH. <627

0PHYS1CS (including Meteorology, Geology, etc.)— Cases:—Pressure, -volume, temperature, solubility in liquids, absorption by feollds, diffusion, move­ ments .of air in relation to ventilation, instru­ ments-employed in relation thereto. Liquids.—Effects of variation of temperature, pressure, -capillarity, osmosis, solution, vapour, move­ ments of liquids. The elements Of dynamics of solids and fluids, Meat.—Temperature, latent heat,'specific heat, fusion, boiling, evaporation, radiation, conduction, con­ vection. ^Electricity,—Elementary facts regarding electrical currents, development of currents by galvanic cells or by induction, with' their chief effects. The dangers and action of currents of high voltage, electrolysis. Meteorology and Geology.—Meteorological instruments and their use, topographical, atmospheric and climatic influences in their relation to health and disease. Geological formations. Soil and subsoil (temperature, humidity, permeability and chemical composition). Influence of soil on climate. Ground air, ite nature'and movements. Ground water, its nature and movements. Geology in relation to drainage and water supply.

^PHYSIOLOGY— See .Details of Laboratory Practice.

3IK3EOSCOPY— The microscopy of food-stuffs, water, deposits, sewage, air (dust) and clothing. The common parasites of man and other animals. Common moulds.

^ENGINEERING AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION— (1) Water Supply and Conservancy—Quantity per head ; relative eligibility of available sources of supply; estimation of yield; method of utilising and 628 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

protecting various sources of supply; storage-- subsidence and filtration and other methods of . , purification.; conveyance and distribution;. method of tapping a main, under pressure; causes, detection, and treatment of contaminated! supply. (2) Excreta, Domestic and Trade Refuse—Nature and. quantity; storage, coUection, removal and dis­ posal. (3) Drains, Drainage, Sewage and Scavenging—Design and construction of drains and sewers, and of sewage treatment works. Conveyance of drain­ age and sewage. Purification and disposal of sewage — mechanical, chemical and biological methods. Scavenging. (4) Sanitary Planning and Construction of Buildings. —Hospitals, Schools, Theatres and other Public Buildings, Public Baths and Wash-houses, Fact­ ories (inclusive of noxious or offensive trade- premises),'Establishments connected with Food Supplies, Dwelling Houses, Barracks, Camps,. Ships, .Causes and prevention of dampness in buildings. (5) Lighting, Warming and Ventilation—Character­ istics and fitness of various means and methods. in use. (6) Materials used for Buildings and Sanitary Work.— Character, qualities, and fitness of materials.: Brick, Stone, Sand, Lime, Cement, Concrete- Earthenware, Stoneware, Metals, Wood.

PRACTICAL PATHOLOGY AND. BACTERIOLOGY-— See details under Laboratory Practice in Bacte­ riology etc. PUBLIC HEALTH. 629'

EXAMINATION, PART II. (1). .ETIOLOGY. DIAGNOSIS AND PREVENTION: OP DISEASE.— Causes, clinical history, diagnosis, and prevention of— a) Infectious and parasitic diseases. b) Diseases induced by or incidental to certain occu­ i pations. (c) Morbid conditions produced by environment. :(2). GENERAL HYGIENE— (a) Meteorological and Geological Conditions.—Influ­ ence on health of climate, aspect, altitude, soil and drainage. (b) Food Supplies.—Sources, manufacture, preparation, preservation, adulteration, storage, distribution and inspection. (c) Disposal of the Dead.—Cemeteries—principles in. selecting sites—Burial customs of various races- —Disposal of bodies during war and pestilence. Mortuaries. (d) Insanitary Environment.—Effects of overcrowding,- vitiated air, impure water, and of bad, innutri­ tions or insufficient food. (e) Nuisances and Offensive or Noxious Trades and Unhealthy Occupations.—Effects upon health— methods of preventing or abating same. (f) Personal Hygiene.—Clothing, exercise, cleanliness..

(8). SANITARY LAW AND ADMINISTRATION- . 4 (a) A general knowledge of English health laws. (b) Victorian Acts.—Health Acts; Venereal Diseases• ' Act 1916; Midwives Acts; Meat Supervision Act 1915; Dairy Supervision Act 1916; Cemet­ eries Act 1915; Commerce Act (Commonwealth) in relation to Food, Drugs, and Clothing; Infant Life Protection Act 1915; Local Government- Act 1916 in relation to matters affecting Health p Federal Quarantine Act; and the Navigation* Act as concerning Accommodation, Provisions^ and general Sanitary measures. '630 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

(c) Powers, Duties and Responsibilities of Medical Officers ef Health and ot Health Inspectors, under the Health and allied Acts.

.(4). VITAL STATISTICS AND STATISTICAL ME­ THODS— Coldulatlon of Population, Birth Bate, Marriage Rate and Death Rote, Sickness Rates, Mortality from Zymotic Diseases, Relation between Occupa­ tion and Mortality; Life Tables, their construc­ tion and interpretation; the value of statistical facts, overages, and methods.

45). SANITARY INVESTIGATION AND REPORT­ ING— Inquiry and inspection in regard to any specific set ' of sanitary circumstances prescribed by the ex­ aminers ; and reporting thereon. : PUBLIC- HEALTH. 631.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED. - Latest editions of Kenwood—Public Health Laboratory. Work (H. K. Lewis, 136 Gower Street, London, W.C.). Nottor and. Firthr-Theory and. Practice of Hygiene • (J. & A. Churchill, 7 Great Marlborough Street,.: London). Rosenau—Preventive Medicine and Hygiene (Apple- ton), Whitelegge and Newman—Hygiene and Public Health. (CasseU & Co.) Springthorpe—Therapeutics, Dietetics and Hygiene,. Vol. I. (James Little, Melbourne). - Thresh and Porter—Preservation of Food and Food ' Examination. (J. & A. ChurcbiU, 7 Great Marl- - borough Street, London). Johnston—Australian Meat Inspection.. (Geo. Rob­ ertson

RECOGNISED HOSPITALS, INSTITUTIONS AND TEACHERS. The Queen's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital is recognised by the Council. The Faculty has fixed the term -of attendance at one month. Instruction is given at Ttimes to be fixed by arrangement with the Medical -Super­ intendent. Such attendance mast be supplemented at -other recognised institutions during two additional months. Facilities for instruction in Meteorology are given by -Mr. H. A. Hunt, Commonwealth Meteorologist, at the Bureau of Meteorology.

RECOGNISED INSTRUCTORS IN FIELD AND OFFICE WORK. Instruction will be given mainly by the'following Officers' -of the Melbourne City CounoU: * The Officer of Health of the City of Melbourne (Dr. T. W. Sinclair). The Medical Inspector of the Board of Public Health <(Dr. E. Robertson) in conjunction with the Assistant Health Officer (Dr. J. Johnston) and tbe Assistant En- .gineering Inspector (Mr. P. E. T. Cobb) will provide facil­ ities for instruction.in matters pertaining to sanitary ad­ ministration, food, building construction and sanitary en­ gineering works. The Commonwealth Director of Quarantine (Dr. Cump- ston) wiU provide instruction in connection with the •exclusion and stamping out of exotic disease, including Quarantine; and also in the preparation of sera- and -vaccines.

SUGGESTED ORDER OP WORK. .March and April—Chemical Laboratory. Field and Office Work. May—Field and Office Work. Infections Diseases Hospital, .June and July—Chemical and Physiological Laboratories, Field and Office Work. PUBLIC HEALTH. 633

August 2 to 16—Field and Office Work. Meteorological Course begins. August 16 to October 16—Bacteriological Laboratory. •October 16 to November 30—Field and Office Work.

FEES. -For Instruction .- Laboratory Work at the University daring six months (3 terms) ...... J615 16 0 Practical. Instruction in Field and Office . Work during seven months ... IS 16 O Attendance and Instruction in Meteorology and Climatology and the use of In­ struments ...... 2 2 0 Attendance at the Queen's Memorial In­ fections Diseases Hospital during ' one month ...... fee to be fixed Fees for Laboratory Practice and for Field and Office "Work to be paid to the University; other fees to be paid to -the institution concerned.

J?or Examination : For each part (I. and II.) ...... £5 6 0 For Sanitary Investigation and Reporting alone ...... 2 2 0

DIPLOMA OP TROPICAL MEDICINE.

ANNOUNCEMENT. Candidates must have passed the examination in Part I •of the Course for the Diploma of Public Health or have pursued a special course of laboratory instruction at the University of Melbourne. This special course extends over .at least one month, and may commence on October 1. 634 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1920.

The Commonwealth Government has. notified its inten­ tion to provide Scholarships in each year, of JJIOO each, to- be awarded.by .the Minister of.External-Affairs attar-reports -. - from the Universities .of Sydney,. Melbourne-and Adelaide. These Scholarships are to pay the expenses and fees of scholars proceeding to Townsville and attending the course - of instruction under the direction of Dr. BreinI at the Australian Institute ot Tropical Medicine. The course will> be held in March, April and May, subject to such rearrange- •' ment as may be made from time to time. Applications for Scholarships may be addressed to the Registrar, University of Melbourne, and' should reach hint* not later - than August 1. EKOiNEERINrr. 636>

FACULTY OF ENGINEERING.

DETAILS OF SDBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA­ TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1920. AND FIRST TERM.1921.

HONOUR WORK. Except in the cases of subjects where special details are published,, the Examination for Honours will.be on the lines indicated for Pass, but candidates will require to have- read more advanced work than for Pass, and. to attain a- higher standard and show more detailed knowledge. PUBE MATHEMATICS ) j. ._.„ MIXED MATHEMATICS I 8ee unfcr ArtB' NATOBAL PHILOSOPHY) _. „ . „„ CHEMISTRY j 8ee under b

MATHEMATICS (Diploma of Architecture)*— This course is directed to meet the requirements of the- Architectural student, who must pass it before- being entitled to enter the classes, in " Strength and Elasticity of Materials" and" Elementary Surveying," Logarithms and Slide Rule; definitions and uses- of these. ' ' - Algebraic and Graphic methods; solution of pro­ blems involving .simultaneous simple equations and quadratics: Trigonometry; angular measurements.; trigono­ metrical-ratios; the addition, formulae with simple applications; rule of sines and the cosine- formulae ; simple, applications in. the solution of triangles. Differential calculus; elements -of tbe differential calculus; elementary algebraic function*; the three principal trigonometrical' ratios', with Ulw- graphs; maxima and minima. .a "636 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

Integral calculus; elementary processes of integra­ tion ; definite integrals; easy exercises and ap­ plications to tbe determination of areas, volumes, centroids, and the first and second moments of

CHEMISTRY (Diploma of Architecture)— Tbe nature of matter. The solid,' liquid, and gaseous states. The atmosphere. Nature of combus­ tion. Oxygen and nitrogen. Water: ire com­ position, occurrence, properties, purification and uses. Hydrogen. Carbon; carbon oxides. Res­ piration ; Ventilation. Fundamental laws of chemical combination ; chemical notation, calcu­ lations and equations. Salt; chlorine and hydrochloric acid; Sodium and.its compounds. Sulphur. Ozone. Phosphorus. Silicon. Arsenic. Nitric acid; ammonia. Destructive distiUation of coal and wood. The metals; alkalies, alkaline earths, earths; Alu­ minium, iron and the heavy metals; some of the useful aUoys. Salts: chlorides, carbonates, sulphates, nitrates, sili­ cates. Valence, double decomposition, reversible actions, velocity of reactions, equilibrium. , Electrolysis, electro-plating, ions. Organic compounds: hydrocarbons; alcohols, alde­ hydes and acids: fats and soaps; carbohydrates. Applications of chemical principles to:— Hardness and the softening of water. Building materials; clay, mortar and cements; Bricks, wood and stone; Glass, asbestos and fireproof fabrics. Rusting of iron and its prevention. Paints- and var­ nishes. Length ef Course •— 2 lectures (with experiments) per week for 2 terms. 1 ENQINEEBING. . . 637

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY (Diploma of Architecture)— An elementary treatment of subjects of Natural Philosophy, Port I. MIXED MATHEMATICS, PART II. (Engineering Course)— The analytical treatment of the motions of particles and rigid bodies in two and three dimensions, including the •elements of gyrodynamics. (About half a full course.) Text-book:— Treatise on Dynamics—A. and'J. G. Gray. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. PART II. (Engineering Course)— Properties of matter. Heat. Electricity and Magnetism. (As in Natural Philosophy, Part II., Science Course). LABOBATOBY WORK. In the Physical Laboratory four hours a week. Text-books:— Poynting and Thomson—The Properties of Matter (selected portions). Poynting and Thomson—Heat. Starling—Magnetism and Electricity. For reference:— Electrical Measurements—Laws. THBRMO-DYNAMICS— ' (As in Natural PhUosophy, Part III., Science Course). Text-book :— Poynting and Thomson—Heat. GRAPHICS— The theory and application of graphic methods to:— Addition, .subtraction, multiplication, division, raising quantities to powers and the extrac- - tion of roots. .481 636, DETAILS OF- SUBJECTS, 1920.

The graphic solution of multinomial equations. Practical methods used for constructing, curves. Evaluation of areas. Determination of the slope of a curve. Sum curve as used for determining areas. Contours and volumes. Methods used for finding first and second, moment areas, and their application in the determination- of centroid, moment of inertia and radius of gyration. Determination of centroids of solids. Bending thrust and shear diagrams for simple load systems. Vectors and rotors. Load analysis of simple structures. Motion diagrams connecting time, space, velocity and acceleration. Approved original graphics, sheets are to be submitted., for examination, at such'times during the year as may be notified. Books recommended for reference:— Goodman— Mechanics Applied to Engineering (selec­ ted, portions). Andrews—TheTheoryondDesign of Structures (selec­ ted portions). Cathcart and Chaffee—Elements of Graphic Statics- Henrici and Turner-;-Vectors,and Rotors.

GEOMETRICAL DRAWING— PLANE GEOMBTBY— Proportional division of a straight line. Making, figuring, and the use qf plain and diagonal spales. Geometrical problems connected' with lines, rectilineal figures and circles. Construction and graphical development of the ellipse, parabola and hyperbola. Cyclpidal curves, involute spirals, and IpgariAhmj^, curves. Simple tooth gearing. Projection, of'screws. Inking, colouring, lettering, and finishing drawings. Tracing and sun. printing. BKGTNEEBINO. <639

PROJECTIVE GEOMBTBT— Properties of similar figures. ^ Principles of orthographic projection and definition of terms in use. Representation. of points, lines and planes in apace. Use ot indices. Projection of plane figures on inclined planes. Projection of cube, prism, pyramid, tetrahedron, cylinder, cone and sphere resting on inclined planes and in given positions on to the standard planes of reference. Isometric projection. Polar projection. Construction of sections of conical and cylindrical sur­ faces, and of surfaces of revolution. Interpenetration and development. Approved original Geometrical Drawing sheets ore to be completed by the student and submitted for examination at such times during the year as may be notified. Text Books :— Spooner—Geometrical Drawing. Angel—Plane and Solid Geometry.

GRAPHICS AND GEOMETRICAL DRAWING— This subject will include the sections above under tbe headings Graphics and Geometrical Drawing.

ENGINEERING DRAWING (for Diploma Courses).—

. " FlBST YEAi. An elementary treatment of " Graphics and Geometri­ cal Drawing."

SECOND Attn THIED YEARS. As. in the corresponding classes for Engineering Design and Drawing. Students must provide themselves with drawing instru­ ments and materials ot m class approved by the lecturer. FACULTY OF ENGINEERING.

APPLIED MECHANICS (Archite turu Course. — (See under Science). 640 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

SURVEYING, PART I.— Principles of construction, adjustment, and use of the- surveying instruments—chain, steel band, clinometer, com­ pass, barometer, thermometer, level, theodolite, sextant, 'plane table and tacheometer. Chain surveying. Ranging of straight lines. Spirit and barometric levelling. Measure­ ment ot angles. Traversing. Survey and subdivision of land. Re-determination of boundaries. Titles Office surveys, including written descriptions of boundaries. Reduction- of traverses with adjustment of discrepancies. Areas, including such as have curved and irregular boundaries. Deduction of formula used in mensuration. Measurement of earthwork. Plotting from field notes and by co-ordinates. Preparation an*d finishing of plans. NOTE.—Candidates are required to submit plan and field notes of a survey; reduced notes and drawing of a level 'section, and specimens of lettering, drawings and tracings as required by the Lecturer.

Text Books :— Baker—Engineer's Surveying Instruments. Johnson—Theory and Practice of Surveying. Tracy—Plane Surveying.

Books for reference:— Instructions to Mining Surveyors, Victoria. Instructions to Surveyors, Queensland. Transactions ot the Victorian Institute of Surveyors.

SURVEYING, PAET II— Setting out curves—circular, transition and vertical, Measurement of heights. Stadia and topographical surveying, including theory . of stadia instruments, plane tabling, photo- > graphic surveying, tocbeometry and contouring. Route traversing by mid-latitude method, and by Meroator's method. Map projections. Determination of latitude, azimuth, time and longitude with the use of ephemerides. - \ ENGINEERING. 441

Introduction to geodetic surveying, trig, stations, lay­ ing out of base lines, spherical excess, converg­ ence, declination of needle. Calculation of probable error by method of least squares. Adjustment of minor triangulation. Trial and permanent surveys for engineering works. Selection of roads and railroads in flat, undula­ ting and mountainous country. Determination, of gradients. Hydrographic surveying with^tide- gauging, and preparation of charts. UndergrCund surveying; connection and reduction of bearings to datum of surface survey; the sur­ vey of vertical arid inclined shafts, drives and. workings; mineral veins, lodes, leads, and drifts with the measurement of ore bodies. Preparation and finishing of plans. Construction mine plans.

NOTE.—Candidates are required to produce plan and field, notes of an original traverse and subdivisional survey, and. a topographical contour map of the area surveyed during tbe summer camps to tbe satisfaction of the Lecturer.

Candidates for the Diploma in Mining are not required to pass in the following branches of the subject, viz.:

Measurement of heigbts, Route traversing. Map projections, ' Determination of time and longitude. Introduction to geodetic surveying, Hydrographies! surveying and tide ganging but they are recommended to attend lectures on the com­ plete course. Text-books:— Nagle—Field Manual for Railroad Engineers. . . Johnson—Theory and Practice of Surveying. Baker—Engineer's Surveying Instruments. - Young—Navigation and Nautical Astronomy. Brongh—Treatise on Mine Surveying. 442 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Book* for -reference:— Gonset—Manual of Topographical Methods. Reed—Topographical Drawing and Sketching. The Regulations for the guidance of Surveyors, issued by the Surveyors' Board and by the Mining Deportment of Victoria. The Transactions of the Victorian Institute of Surveyors. Middluton and Chadwick—A Treatise on Surveying. Chouvenet—Spherical and Practical Astronomy. Clarke—Geodesy. Reports of U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Wellington—Railway location. Wharton—Hydrographical Surveying.

STRENGTH AND ELASTICITV OP MATERIALS— Determination of strength and elasticity of materials by testing machines and their accessory apparatus Forces acting on structures, including gravity, fluid pressure, earth pressure, pressure due to wind. Stability of piers, chimneys, dams, retaining walls and floating bodies of simple form. Bending moments, shearing forces, moduli of sections, and moments of resistance of beams. Stresses in framework structures determined by cal­ culation and by graphic methods. Strength and proportions of tension members, columns, and their connections, the design of girders and roofs. Factors of safety. ' Stresses in arches, domes, suspension bridges, and hoUow shells exposed to internal or external pressure. Elastic behaviour of structures. . Text-books:— Morley—Strength of Materials. Woods—Strength and Elasticity cf Structural Members. CIVIL ENGINEERING. PABT I.— The.-financial aspect of engineering problems. Effect of rate of interest .on money upon design of works: , • . - BNaiNEEBJNQ. 643

Timber: The properties of the various kinds of timber used in construction, and tbe defects they are liable to; seasoning; pUe-driving; joints. Masonry and brickwork: The properties, defects, and mode of quarrying various kinds of stone. The properties, defects, and mode of manufacture of bricks; definitions of the various -classes of masonry and brickwork; precautions necessary to secure good work. The manufacture and mode of testing limes and cements. The pre­ paration and properties of mortar and concrete. Semforoed concrete. The design and construction of bridges in timber,-steel, stone, brick, concrete, and reinforced concrete, including deep and difficult foundations. Set­ ting out. Coffer-dams. Text-books:— Rivington—Building Construction, Vol. III. ' Raukine—Civil Engineering; selected portions. Warren—Engineering Construction in Steel and Timber. Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure—Modem Framed Structures. Turneaure and Maurer—Reinforced Concrete Con­ struction. Hooks for reference:— Johnson—Materialsfof Construction. Mann—Australian Timbers. Warren—PubUcations for the Government of New South Wales on Australian Timbers. Julius—Publications for the" Government of West­ ern Australia on Western Australian Timbers. Patten—Foundations. Vernon Horcourt—Civil Engineering. . Thomson—Bridge and Structural Design. Thomson—Typical Steel Railway Bridges. Hudson—Design of Plate Girders. Marsh—Reinforced Concrete. Taylor and Thompson—Concrete.- Plain and Rein­ forced. 644 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Hool & Johnson—Concrete Engineer's Handbook". Godfrey—Concrete. • Vol. V. " Materials of Engineering Construction."" Transactions at the Panama-Pacific Inter­ national Congress, San Francisco, 1915. - Current numbers of the journal, " Concrete and Constructional Engineering." Proceedings of the International Association for testing materials. DESIGN AND DRAWING— Approved original designs and drawings, with specifica­ tions and quantities, for a simple structure such as a small [timber, composite, brick or steel bridge, and of a roof truss, are to be completed by the Student and submitted for ex­ amination at such times during the year as may be notified. Designs will be based upon work done in Civil Engineer­ ing, Part I., and in Strength and Elasticity of Materials.

CIVIL ENGINEERING, PABT II.— The desigu and construction of more important struc­ tures than those dealt with in Civil Engineering, . Part I. Railways: Conditions governing methods of transport; location of railways; gradients and curves-r earthworks, including tunnelling, together with setting out and selection of appliances; cul­ verts ; permanent way; arrangement of junc­ tions - and station yards; signals; interlocking- and~electrical equipment, Jtc.; gauges; narrow gauge, mountain and mono-rail railways-, rol- - ling stock; brakes; railway management and finance. Roads: Location, clearing, grading, and forming. Macadam's and Telford's systems of road mak­ ing. Selection and preparation of materials. Roads in sandy ground and on wet clay. Main­ tenance of roads. Streets: Metalling, pitching, asphalt and wood paving, kerbing, channelling, and footpaths. Cleaning and maintenance. . - Tramways: Horse, steam, cable, and electric tramways. ENGINEERING. 645-

Marine Works: Waves and their destructive power, littoral drifts, bars. Tidal and non-tidal har­ bours, training walls, jetties, breakwaters, piers, wharves, docks, graving docks and their acces­ sories. Lighthouses, lightships, beacons, buoys Dredges. Dredging. Reclamation with dredged material. Text books':— - Rankine—CivU Engineering (selected portions). Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure—Modern Framed! Structures. Mill—Railway Construction. Copperthwaite—Tunnel Shields. Tratman—Railway Track and Track Work Byles—Railway Signalling. Coane—Australasian Roads. Mountain—Wood-paving and Road-making in Aus­ tralia. • R. H. Smith—Electric Traction. Shield—Harbour Engineering. Cunningham—Dock Engineering. Chance—Modem Lighthouse Practice. Books for consultation:— Wellington—Location ot Railways. Langdon — The Application of Electricity to- . Railways. Lewis—Railway Signal Engineering. Raynar Wilson—Railway Signalling. Union Switch and Signal Co.—Alternating Current. Signalling Handbook. Vol. HI. " Railways." Transactions Panama-Paci­ fic International Congress, 1916. Aitken—Road Making and Maintenance. J. Walker-Smith—Duatless Roads and Tar-mac­ adam. Vernon Harcourt—Civil Engineering as applied to- Construction: , • Ashe and Keely—Electric Railways. Wilson and Lydall—Electrical Traction. Holt—Tramway Track Construction and Mainten- 464f6 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1020.

. . VoL IV. " Municipal Engineering." Transactions Panama-Pacific International Congress, 1916. Vernon harcourt—Harbours and Docks. Stevenson—'Construction of Harbours. MaoElvee—Ports and Terminal Facilities. Greene—Wharves and Piers. Vernon Harcourt—Rivers and Canals. Wheeler—Tidal Rivers. Colson—Notes on Docks and Dock C6nsta-notioh. Stevenson—Canal and River Engineering. Proceedings of the Permanent International Association of Navigation Congresses. Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers. Transactions of the American Society of Civil Engineers. Professional Memoirs, Corps of Engineers, U.S. ' Army. Each student is required to 'submit at the examination of •the fourth year the plans, etc., prescribed under the heading '" CivU Engineering, Design and Drawing." Candidates for the degree of M.C.E. and for final honours .are required to submit designs of a structure of advanced type, the subject of the design to be chosen by tbe candidate -submitting it.

•CIVIL ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAWING— Approved original designs and drawings, with complete -specifications, estimates and quantities (together with a fair copy of all computations), are to be completed by the •Student and submitted for examination: (I) of a work such -as a steel bridge with brick, Atone or concrete abntments. •or of a wharf, dock or lighthouse; and (2) for a scheme ot 'water supply or sewerage; or of offtake works for channels, ' or of a pump or turbine. Designs will be based upon.work done in CivU Engineer ing Parts I. and II., Hydraulic Engineering, and Strength -and Elasticity ef Materials. Books of reference will be'recommended. BN6IKEEBING. 647'

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PAST l.-r Electrical and magnetic measurements, units audi standards. Lines of force. Magnetic properties of iron. The magnetic circuit.' Electrical measuring instruments. Types of ammeters and voltmeters, their sources' of error and relative advantages for different olaeses- of service. Ohmmeters, Wattmeters, Wott-hour- and Ampere-hour meters. Direct current. — Dynamos, and motors. Armature windings. Characteristics of shunt, series, and. compound machines. Energy losses. Efficiency and rating. Alternating Currents.—Generation of altematingE.M.F. Wave forms, sine wave, R.M.S. value and maxi­ mum value. Current and E.M.F. waves, clock diagrams. Effects, of inductance and capacity.. ' Power in, an alternating current circuit. Power factor. Transformers, construction and theory, connections for different voltages, use in power- transmission and distribution. Polyphase systems. Types ot alternatora, parallel running: Synchronous motor. Induction motors and other A.C. motorsi Rotary converters and motor generators. Switchboard and connection, diagrams. Electric Illumination— Photometry and standards of. light. Candle power, mean horizontal, and mean, spherical. Efficiency of electric lamps. Incandescent lamps: Variations of C.P. with. voltage of supply. Light distribution-, effi­ ciency,, and usefu) life of different types. Arolompsl Regulating mechanisms for different- systems. Ligh,t' distribution, and efficiency - Electric-heating, with applications. >648 , DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1920.

Text-books:— . Chos. P. Smith—'I'he Practical Testing of Dyna­ mos and Motors. Karapetoff—Experimental Electrical Engineering, Vol.1. Alexander Gray—Principles and Practice of Electri­ cal Engineering. The Regulations of the Fire Underwriters' Associa­ tion. For reference:— Ayrton and Mather—Practical Electricity. Lamb—Alternating Currents. Solomon—Electric Lamps. Edgecumbe—Industrial Electrical Measuring In­ struments. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PART II.— ^ A, The Generation, transmission and distribution of electrieal energy and its applications— Direct and alternating systems, applications ot storage batteries, direct current dynamos and alternators, arrangement of machinery and switchgear in power houses, choice of capacities of generating sets, load curves, potential regulation and automatic regula­ tors. Calculations for Transmission lines and dis­ tributing systems. Cables, Interior Wiring. Electric Meters and tariffs. Installation and Testing of electrical machinery. Applications of electric energy, including— Illuminating and heating, motive power for machinery, electric winding, elevators and cranes, electric welding,' electric furnaces, and electrochemical processes. Electric Traction— Systems in use. Trolley wire. Third rail. Conduit and autocar systems. Motors and control­ lers, multiple unit control, braking systems, overhead and track construction, rail bonding and welding. ENGINEERING. 649

Text-books:— Earapetoff—Experimental Electrical Engineering, Vols. I. and II. Chas. F. Smith—Practical Alternating Currents and Alternating Current Testing. Alfred Hay—Electrical Distributing Networks and Transmission Lines. Hawkins and WaUis—The Dynamo, Vols. I. and II. For reference:— Lyndon—Storage Battery Engineering. Garrard—Electric Switch and Controlling Gear. Dwight—Transmission Line Calculations. Solomon—Electricity Meters. Gaeter and Dow—Modern lUnminante and Illu­ minating Engineering. Stansfleld—The lEectric Furnace. Burgess-Cravens—AppUed Electro Chemistry and Welding. Dover—Electric Traction.

B •Calibration and testing of electrical measuring instru­ ments. Magnetic measurements and Iron test­ ing. Ballistic Galvanometer and Flux Meter. Testing of Insulating Materials and insulators resistivity and dielectric strength. ' - 'Types of OsciUograph and Wave tracers. Harmonic analysis of wave forms.i 'Theory of. Alternating current apparatus and applica­ tion of the symbolic method to alternating current problems. (Transformers, Potential Regulators, Alternators, Synchronous and Asyn­ chronous Motors, Rotary and Motor Converters, and Alternating Current Measuring Instru­ ments, etc.). Forced and, free vibrations in electric circuits, pro­ duction of electric oscillations and propagation and detection of electric waves, Radio-telegrapby and telephony. . 650 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1920.

'i For reference:— '• Laws—Electrical Measurements. Femot—Electrical Phenomena in Parallel Conduc­ tors. ' Karapetoff—The Electric Circuit. Fleming—The Principles of Electric Wave Tele­ graphy and Telephony. Eccles—Wireless Telegraphy. Fourth Year. Electrical students to take parts A and B. Fourth Year Mechanical students to take part A. Work in tbe-laboratory wUl be arranged to illustrate the subjecte of lectures given in' parts I. and II. Research work will be encouraged, and advanced Electri­ cal students are recommended to undertake some during, their final year.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAW­ ING— Design as applied to electrical underta kings. Approved original designs and. drawings, with specifi­ cations and estimates (together with a fair copy of all computations), are to be completed by the student and submitted for examination, at such times during the year as may be notified. Books for reference wiU be recommended'.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PAST I.— Theory of machines and mechanism. Mechanical transmission of power. Manufacture of iron and. steel. . Machine tools. Wind and' water motors. Aeroplane, elementary, principles. Text-books :r— • Kennedy—Mechanics of Machinery. Onnkerley—Mechanism. Dnobene—Mechanics of the Aeroplane. Greenwood—rManufacture of Iron and Steel. Oth. r references will be quoted by. the Professor. ENGINEERING. 651t

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PABT II.— Heat engines, reciprocating and turbine. Refrigeration machinery. Boilers, and their accessories. Producer gas plant. Mechanical handling of materials. Text-books:— Ewin'g—The Steam Engine and other heat engines. Ewing—Mechanical production of cold. Goudie—Steam turbines. Kershaw—Elementary Internal Combustion Engines, Books of reference will be quoted by the Professor.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PABT HI.— A.—The work of Parts I. and II. on a higher stand­ ard, together with some work on Balancing- of Engines, Central Power Stations, Generation and Distribution of Energy; Testing of Power Plants. B.—Marine Engines and Accessories; Principles of Design and Propulsion of Ships. Mechanics of the Aeroplane. In this cipss the work will be guided largely by the work the student will follow on completion of his course. Refer­ ence works will be recommended by the Professor. ' /

ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAWING, PABT L Drafting. Specifications. Joints and Fasteners, Transmission Mechanism. Steam Boilers and their fittings. Proper use and treatment of materials. Approved original drawings and designs with' brief specifioatipns are to be completed by the students, and submitted for examination at such times during the year as may be notified. '<&£ DETAILS Of SUBJECTS,' 1920. Text-books -.— Unwin—Machine Design, Part I. Any recognized Mechanical Engineer's Pocket Book. Books for reference:— Spooner—Machine Design Construction and Drawing. Handbook for Machine Designers and Draftsmen— Holsey. Low and Bevis—A Manual of Machine Drawing and Design. HiUer -T Steam Boiler Construction. French—Engineering Drawing. ENGINEERING DESIGN AND DRAWING, PABT it. Prime Movers. Steam and other Engines. Auxiliary Steam Machinery. Lay out of Power Plants. Piping systems. Cranes and Hoists. General examples of Machine Design, including simple Electrical appliances. Machine Tools. Approved original designs and drawings with specifica­ tions-are to be completed by the student and submitted for examination at such times during the year as may be notified. ' Text-books:— , • ' Unwin—Machine Design, Part II. Books for reference will be recommended. MACHINE DESIGN AND DRAWING— Steam turbines ' OU and gas engines Air compressors and machinery ' Refrigerating machinery Hoisting and conveying machinery Ropeways -Machine tools for special work Lay out of power plants and mills ° ' The distribution of power by mechanical, electrical and hydraulic methods ENGINEERING. 65$

Approved original designs and drawings-with specifi­ cations and estimates (together with a fair copy of all - computations), are to be completed by the student and submitted for examination, at such times during the year as may be notified. Books for reference wiU be recommended.

HYDRAULICS AND HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING? PAST I.— t . Hydraulic computations. Storage Reservoirs.—Earthen, masonry, concrete, and other dams; wastes weirs, by-washes, outlet ' works; valves and valve towers. Weirs and outlet works in concrete, masonry and timber. Pumping plants for high and low lifts. Location and general arrangement. The hydraulics of pumps and turbines. -Offtake channels, sluice gates, flumes and inverted siphons; cast Iron, wrought iron, steel, wooden- stave and reinforced concrete pipe lines; air valves and scour valves. Text-books :— Porker—Control of Water. Fidler—Calculations in Hydraulic Engineering,' Part II. Lea—Hydraulics. Rankine —Civil Engineering; selected portions. Turneaure and Russell—Public Water Supplies. Greene—Pumping Machinery, de Laval—Centrifugal Pumping Machinery. . Books for reference*— Hnmber—Water Supply. Hamilton Smith—Hydraulics. Merri man—Hydraulics. • BeUasis—Hydraulics. Kennedy—Hydraulic Diagrams. Schuyler—Reservoirs. •4U 654 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Turner and Brightmore—Waterworks Engineering. Wegmann—Masonry Dams. Loewenstein and Crissy—Centrifugal Pumps. Church—Hydraulic Motors. Gelpke and van Cleve—Hydraulic Turbines. Mead—Water Power Engineering.

HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING. PART II.— Service reservoirs; settling tanks and filter beds P water towers and tanks. Town reticulations; valves, fireplugs, hydrants, meters, etc.; cleaning pipe lines. River improvement and flood prevention. Stream gauging. Irrigation works. The sewerage ot towns and isolated buildings, sew­ age disposal, sanitary services and refuse destruc­ tors. Determination of waterways ^for bridges and cul­ verts.

' Text-books:— Burton—Tbe Water Supply of Towns. Thomas and Watt—The Improvement of Rivers. Harcourt—Rivers and Canals. Johnson—Surveying; portions relating to Hydro- graphic Surveying. Etoheverry—Irrigation Practice and Engineering. . Moore—Sanitary Engineering. Raikes—Sewage Disposal.

Books for reference.— Hunter—Rivers and Estuaries. Mackenzie—Notes on Irrigation Works. Hanbury Brown—Irrigation. WiUcocks—Egyptian Irrigation. Buckley—Irrigation Works of India. Portier— Use of Water in Irrigation Mansergh—Report on Sewerage of Melbourne^ Staley—The Separate System. ENGINEERING. 665

Vol. I. "Panama Canal"; Vol. II. " Waterways and Irrigation" and Vol. IV. "Municipal Engin­ eering"; Transactions Panama-Pacific Inter­ national Congress, 1915. Professional Memoirs, Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army. Each student entering for examination in both parts of Hydraulic Engineering is required to submit at the Exam­ ination of the fourth year the plans, etc., prescribed under tbe heading "'Civil Engineering Design and Drawing." Candidates for the degree of M.C.E., and for final honours are required to submit designs of hydraulic works or appli­ ances, the subject of the design to be chosen by the candi­ date submitting it, and approved by the lecturer. '

GEOLOGY, FART I. (Engineering Course).— This course will be taken by third year Civil and Mining Engineering students. It will include all tbe work set ont un^er Geology, Part I. (See under Science.) In addition students in Mining Engineering wiU do some additional economic geology -, and students in Civil En­ gineering will do work on the geology of building stones and rood metals, and geological considerations affecting the location of sites for dams, reservoirs, etc. Students will be expected in addition to attend a fleld excursion to be held during tbe lost two days of the -third term and the Monday following.

GEOLOGY. PART IT., AND MINING GEOLOGY— This course will be taken by fourth year students in Mining Engineering. It will include the work set out under Fart II., together with the Mining Geology given in the details for Geology, Part HI. (see under Science). Students wUl perform additional laboratory work Ulns- trative ot Mining Geology. Students will be expected to attend an excursion in Mining Geology, to be held during the first two days of the third term and the Saturday preceding. 666 DETAILS 09 SUBTESTS, 1920.

GEOLOGY OP BUILDING • STONES (Diploma of . Architecture)^— This course wiU be taken by third year Architecture- students. It will include the foUowing parts of the course of Geology, Part I. The occurrence of rocks in the field and tbe struc­ tures they present. The influence of weathering on the- mineral consti­ tuents of such rocks; their texture and struc­ ture so far as they affect, the usefulness of / materials. The physical character and chemical composition- of rock-forming minerals occurring, in build­ ing stones and road-metals. The geological and mirieralogical causes which de­ termine the quality, colour, durability and strength of building stones. Book for Reference: — Howe—The Geology of Building Stones.

GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. PART I. (Diploma Course) .-T- This course is equivalent to Geology, Port I. (Engineering Course.)

CHEMISTRY AND GEOLOGY OP QRE DEPOSITS-r This course will include selected portions of Geology, • Fort II., and Mining Geology. ^

MINING ENGINEERING AND MINING— 1. Prospecting. Boring methods and appliances, ' 2. Breaking ground. Mining tools. Explosives. Drilling and blasting. 3. Development and working. Tunnels, shafts, levels. Open-working, stoping, panelling, and other systems. 4. Support'of mine excavations—by timbering, masonry and iron, pillars and stowing^ 6. Ventilation. Lighting. ENGINEERING. 6J5T

6. Haulage—tramways, serial ropeways. 7. Winding appliances. . 8. Mine drainage, pumping appliances, underground dams. 9. Ore dressing—Reduction, sorting, sizing, concentra­ tion. 10. Hydraulic sluicing. Elevating and dredging. Puddling. 11. Examination and survey of mineral properties.. Sampling and contents of lodes. ' Construction of mine maps. 12. Preparation of specifications.. Design of mine plants.. 13. Mining Acts. Mine labour. Administration. Text-books:— Le Neve Foster—Ore and Stone Mining. Storms—Timbering and Mining. Ricbards-t-Ore Dressing. Works for reference:— Transactions of the Australasian Institute of Min­ ing Engineers. Transactions ot the Institution of Mining and Metallurgy. Transactions of American • Institute of Mining- Engineers. The Annual Reports of the States' Mining Depart­ ments. Students in Mining Engineering and Mining will be- expected to hand in original designs of Mining Plant of a. kind approved by the Lecturer. .

METALLURGY, PART L— METALLDBOT. The physical and chemical properties of metals and the common alloys. Classification of fuels. The- calorific power and intensity of fuels. The pre­ paration of fuels and their application to metal­ lurgical processes. Refractory materials. Slags- and fluxes. Furnaces and appliances used in. €58 . DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

the processes of extracting tin, copper, mercury, from their ores. Copper smelting in reverbera- tory furnace's. The extraction of mercury from its ores by dry methods. The smelting of tin concentrates in shaft and reverberatory farn-

Tbe treatment of gold ores by amalgamation, chlorina- tion and cyanidation. Methods of cleaning up. , The retorting, smelting and refining of gold bul­ lion. Books-recommended:— Hot man —General Metallurgy. Fulton—Principles of Metallurgy. Sobnabel and Louis—Handbook of Metallurgy. Louis—Handbook of Gold MiUing. Rose—The Metallurgy of Gold. Julian and Smart—The Cyaniding of Gold and SUver Ores. ASSAYING. Construction and use of furnaces for assaying. Manu­ facture and use of crucibles, roasting dishes, seorifiers, cupels. Character and use of fluxes and reagents. Sampling ores by manual labour. - The use of tbe assay balance, weights and scales. Dry methods for the assay of tin ores, copper ores, lead ores, silver ores, gold ores. Volumet­ ric methods for-the estimation of iron, copper and lead ores. Simple cases of cyanide determi­ nations. The determination of free chlorine in chlorine solutions. Partial analysis of easUy decomposable blast furnace slags. Proximate analysis of coal. Simple methods of partial gas

Books recommended:— Beringer—Text-book on A assaying. . Presenilis—Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis (Cohn); The Examination will be in part] written and in part practical. ENGINEERING. 659 * METALLURGY, PART H.— METALLUBOT. Special attention wiU be devoted to the methods for the extraction of lead, gold, silver and copper from their ores. The metallurgy of iron, nickel, cobalt, antimony, bismuth, arsenic, platinum, zinc, aluminium, sodium. General principles of ore dressing. Tbe chief appliances used for the crushing, sizing, classification and concentration of ores. Calculation of furnace charges. The use of calorimeters and pyrometers.' Sooks recommended:— Roberts Austen—Introduction to the Study of Metal­ lurgy. Peters—Principles of Copper Smelting. • Peters—Practice of Copper Smelting. Hofman—The Metallurgy of Lead. •Collins—The MetaUurgy of Silver and the Metallurgy of Lead. Lang—Matte Smelting. Turner—The Metallurgy of Iron. Harbord and Hall—The Metallurgy of Iron and Steel; Schnabel—Metallurgy. The Mineral Industry. Transactions of various Metallurgical Societies, and current literature.

ASSAYING. Sampling of ores, metals and metallurgical, products. Sampling machines. Gravimetric and volumet­ ric methods required in technical operations for the determination of lead, silver, mercury, bis­ muth, copper, antimony, arsenic, tin, iron, cobalt, nickel, manganese, chromium, aluminium, plati­ num, calcium, magnesium, potassium, sodium, tungsten, silica, sulphur, phosphorus. Electro­ lytic methods, including separations for the deter­ mination of copper nickel. Gold and sUver bul­ lion assay. Preparation of pure gold and sUver. Testing cyanide miU solutions. 660 DETAILS. OF SUBJECTS, 1020. I Books recommended:— Furman—Manual.of Practical Assaying. Treadwell—Analytical Chemistry. Classen—Quantitative Analysis by Electrolysis. - Blair—Chemical Analysis of Iron. Clennel—The Chemistry of Cyanide Solutions. Lunge and Keane—Technical Methods of Chemical , Analysis. Low—Technical Methods of Ore Analysis. The Examination will be in part written and in part practical. Students iu Parts I. and II. will be required to attend at the Laboratories for at least ^twelve hours per week during the lecture terms, such attendance to be within the.hours set apart ita the Time Table for Practical Metallurgical work. Students will also be required to record their hours of attendance in a book provided for that purpose. Written reports, showing tbe results of assays or analyses- completed, must be handed in to tbe lecturer at the close of the day during which such results were obtained, together with the final precipitates or assay buttons, upon which tbe reported results are based.

METALLOGRAPHY— Allotropy.—Proof of the existence of Allotropic Forms • by Thermal methods. Cooling Curves.—Meaning and experimental determina­ tion of cooling curves—measurement of tempera­ ture—graphic representation. Aqueous Solutions. — Freezing phenomena — graphic representation — discussion of freezing-point curves. Fused Salts.—Analogy between fused salts and aqueous ' solutions. Solid solutions. Alloys.—Analogy between aqueous solutions and molten metals. 'The freezing-point diagrams of Binary and Ternary alloys. ENGINEERING. 66 li

Practical Microscopy of Metals.—Preparation of section..' Grinding' and polishing. The various methods- of etching. Preparation of etching solutions- Photographing etched sections of. metals and alloys, 'i'he metallography of iron and steel. The metaUograpby of Industrial alloys.

ARCHITECTURE (Historical and Practical)— The lectures in Historical and Practical and Drawing- and Planning are delivered in each year. Students in CivU Engineering will require to do Fart I. of each division in their Fouth Year. Fourth Year students in CivU Engineering wiU be- expected at tbe Pass or Honour Examination to band in drawings of a design to be set or approved by tbe Lecturer, and in addition a Problem in one of the Classic - orders. Diploma Stadente in their Third year will be expected to band in at the Pass or Honour Examination drawings,, together with a specification, of a more advanced subject of design, to be set or approved by the Lecturer, also detailed. estimates. , Students entering for Honours will be expected to hand in drawings ot an original design, with specifications and estimates. ., Planning (1).—The Principles of Planning of private- bouses, business premises, churches-, public buildings, hos­ pitals, theatres, schools, government and municipal build­ ings, etc. Planning (2).—Detailed Planning of the above,'with, special reference to building, sewerage and health regula­ tions and requirements. Practical (1).—The constructive details of buildings., specifications and contracts. Principles of drainage and minor arrangements for lighting, ventilation, etc. Practical (2).—More advanced .treatment of constructive - details, drainage, lighting, etc., building calculations and-, factors of safety, with special reference to building, sewer­ age and health regulations and requirements. <662 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Historical (1).—Historical sketch of Egyptian, Assy­ rian, Greek, Roman, Romanesque,' Byzantine, Gothic, Renaissance, and Modem Architecture, Ulustrated by -reference to existing braidings, analyzing their plans, con­ struction, and decoration, and the influences of material, -climate, tools, religion, race, etc., upon these elements. Historical (2).—Moldings and features and-ornaments of ithe styles of Architecture, and their application to design.

Text-books.— Planning—The Principles of Planning (latest edition), by Percy L. Marks. Design—The Principles of Architectural Compo­ sition, by John Beverly Robinson. Practical. — Australian Building Practice, by J. .Nangle. . Modem Drainage Principles and Practice, by Anketell Henderson. Fletcher's Architectural Hygiene. Drawing—The Orders of - Architecture, by Phene Spiers. Historical.—Short Critical History of Architecture, • , by H. H. Stathom. Histery of Architecture, by Banister Fletcher. A Histery of Architecture, by A. D. P. ' , Hamlin. Ornament—A Manual of Historic Ornament, by ' Glazier. Book for consultation for Third Year Diploma Stu­ dents :— MitcheU—Building Construction. •

ARCHITECTURAL DEAWING (Elementary)— Use of drawing instruments, simple lettering and -coloring, drawing of simple architectural plans, sections, .and elevations from figured sketches, simple freehand drawing from ornament, geometrical and graphic methods -of working out problems. ENGINEERING. 663-

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING (Advanced)— More advanced drawing of the Classic orders and details- and other Histeric styles, and design problems in these? styles to be set by the Lecturer.

MODELLING IN CLAY— Students will be expected to design and fill in a panel1 from a given style. Examinations wiU not be in the form, of copying work.

ARCHITECTURAL ATELIER— The Atelier has been established by the University in. co-operation with the Royal Victorian Institute of Archi­ tects, with the object of promoting the study of principles of architectural design. It enables its members to acquire training in the Art of Architectural Composition on inc­ lines of that available in European cities; and is open to students ol Architecture who have— - (1) Passed in all subjects of the Diploma of Architecture at the University of Melbourne. (2) Completed uot less than three years in a recognised? architect's office. < (3) To other students of Architecture and Draftsmen. who can satisfy tbe Director of their knowledge- of architectural drawing and previous training.. (4)* And to such third year Diploma of'Architecture students as are considered sufficiently advanced, by the Director to undertake Atelier work. The first year is arranged to deal with design problems- based on definite historic styles, and in any subsequent year any member may work on any style to suit modem conditions. Fees.—The fees for the Atelier course are J510 10s. per annum, payable in advance, by the term (i.e., £3 10s. per term). A special fee of £3 3s. per annum is made to 3rd Year Diploma of Architecture students. > r664 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1020.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS. REQUIREMENTS AS TO WORK. 1. Lectures in the Engineering School commence on the 13th Monday of the year. .All Engineering Students are 'required to devote the three weeks of the First Term before the beginning of Engineering lectures; to Office work at tbe 'University. The Second and Third Year Civil and Mining Stu- •dents, Second Year Mechanical and Electrical Students and Second Year Diploma Students (see Regulations), are required,, before the beginning of lectures, to devote ' three weeks to practical Survey work in the field. During tbe First Term the office work and plotting con­ nected therewith must be done to the satisfaction of the Lecturer in Surveying. If this work is not done at •the University Survey Camp and in' the University Drawing Office, a satisfactory certificate from a competent •surveyor must be produced. Every student must attend -one University Survey Camp, and do the Office work in -connection therewith during his course for the Degree. . Mechanical and Electrical Students are required to spend 'five weeks, before the beginning of lectures, in acquiring a practical knowledge of Engineering in an office or works •previously approved by the Faculty. Arrangements have been made by which this work may be done in the work­ shops of the Victorian RaUways. The Dean of the Faculty of Engineering is empowered to excuse tbe attendance of Third, or Fourth Year • Students who may be engaged during the above period in obtaining -practical experience, and to authorise the substitution of 'Office work for Practical or Field work or vice versa in such cases as he may deem expedient. Students engaged 'in Public Offices to be exempt from these requirements. 2. Students shall remain in attendance during the hours notified in the Time Table; shall keep note books, report books, and calculation books fully and neatly; and conduct -themselves os if they were in an office doing responsible work -and shall not absent themselves except for attendance on •the Lectures, Laboratory, Field work or Excursions of ENGINEERING- 665

the year without consent of the Lecturer concerned. No Student shall be admitted to Examination unless his ireport and calculation books be • approved by the Dean, in consultation with the Lecturer concerned, unless he -produce a Certificate showing that he has fulfilled this •condition as to Office work, or has similarly attended in some Office approved by the Dean. The Dean is empowered to grant remission in cose of .illness or for other sufficient reason.

UNIVERSITY SURVEY CAMP. To enable students to obtain praotical experience in Sur­ veying, as required by. the Regulations, a students camp is .formed in the long vacation in each year, and three •clear weeks are devoted to the practising of various survey- ' ing operations in the fleld, under the direction of the - lecturer. The site of the camp is decided upon by the lecturer, who may ascertain what sites are preferred by a . majority of intending members. Practical work at the camp includes the performance -of most of the operations of land—and engineering— .surveying, including topographical, hydrographies!, and astronomical work. The instruments used are provided by -the University. Computations and Office work in connection, with the -camp wUl be' required to be done during tbe first three weeks of the First Term. Members ot the camp defray their own traveUing and •other expenses, including the provision of tents. The University possesses a limited number of tents, which may be hired by members of the camp at a rate sufficient to •cover wear and tear and renewal. Students in single subjects may be admitted by the lecturer to the camp. .Details as to commissariat, travelling fares, etc., are .attended to by a committee elected by intending members At a meeting held for the purpose during the second or rthird term of the year preceding that in which the camp is formed. 666 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

LAND SURVEYOR'S EXPERIENCE. Civil and Mining Engineering students who intend to- acquire the Land Surveyor's Certificate are required to- possess the degree (B.C.E. or B.M.E.) and to obtain not less' than eighteen months' experience in the practice of Land Surveying under qualified Land Surveyors. Special arrangements have been entered into between the- Lands Department of Victoria and the University, by which students who have passed in Surveying Parts I. and II. may obtain the necessary Field Experience under tbe Lands Department'by interpolating 15 months of such work bet­ ween the 3rd and 4th years of their course, that is 2 long; vacations and 1 academic year. Only such students as intend to acquire the Land Sur­ veyor's Certificate will be taken by the Lands Department.. Students should notify tbe Dean of their intention to take " , advantage ot this opportunity, and the Dean wUl'make the- necessary arrangements with the Lands Department.

AMBULANCE CLASSES. Classes for instruction in Ambulance Work (First Aid)) wiU be held during the Second Term if there is a sufficient- number of entries. Fee, 10s. 6d.. Entry to be made- before the end of the First Term.

READING AND EXCURSIONS. . AU Third and Fourth Year Students are recommended to- pernse the current numbers of the Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers, London, and of the leading Engineering journals. The attention of students is diawn to abstracts of tbe chief engineering and scientific work of the World. These are- published regularly in the latter part of the Proceedings ot the Institution of Civil Engineers, and in Science Abstracts, Div. B, ot the Institution of Electrical Engineers. ENGINEERING. 667

Excursions will be made to various, engineering and architectural works, and manufacturing establishments. Students wiU be required to attend these excursions, and to take notes of what they inspect unless specially exempted by the Lecturer. Questions may be set at the Examina­ tions upon the objects inspected at these excursions.

PRACTICAL WORK FOR DEGREE OP B.M.E. AND FOR ;DIPLOMAS OP MINING AND METALLURGY. The Faculty has prescribed the foUowing rules in regard to practical work for the Degree of B.M.E. and for Diplo­ mas in Mining and in Metallurgy, to be done at the con­ clusion of the University course:—

DEO BEE or B.M.E. (Regulation XVIIa., Section 17) AND- DIPLOMA IN MINING (Regulation XVIId., Section 6). Not more than three months may be spent in Mine Sur­ veying and Draughtsmanship and not less than three months in underground mining under a competent Mine Manager or Mining Engineer; nut more than four months may be spent in Practical Metallurgy under a competent Metallurgist; not more than three months in Geological Surveying under a competent Geological Surveyor, and not more than three months in all in unskilled work. In special cases the Faculty reserves the right to modify these re­ quirements.

DIPLOMA IN METALLURGY (Regulation XVIIe., Section 6) Not less than eight months shall be spent in purely Metallurgical work under a competent Metallurgist, and not more than four months may be spent in Assaying at a works under a competent Assayer, or in research work or the Commercial Treatment of Ores under a competent In­ structor in the University, a School of Mines, or other institution approved by the Faculty. Notwithstanding the above announcements the Faculty of Engineering may in special cases accept such experience as it deems satisfactory. 668 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920

DETAILS FOR PINAL HONOURS. The examination for Final Honours may include all work prescribed for the specified subjects..

REPORT FOR MASTER'S DEGREE. The written report required from a Candidate on his practical experience shaU be "a detailed written description which may be partly in the form of a Thesis of not less than 2,000 words, on important work which has been completed under his supervision " for the purpose ot enabling .the Faculty to judge as to whether the work is of a character to justify the conferring a Master's Degree. AGRICULTURE. 669

FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA­ TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM. 1920, AND FIRST TERM. 1921.

CHEMISTRY—PABT I. (Agricultural course) as for Chemistry, Part I. (see under Science). NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART I. (Agriculturalcourse) as for Natural Philosophy, Part I. (see under Science). BOTANY—PAST I. (see under Science). AGRICULTURAL ZOOLOGY This course will consist of three lectures and four hours' laboratory work per week, during three terms. The structure and life-history of the frog, as a typical animal, and a brief survey of its development. Equilibrium in nature, and the "survival of the fit­ test." The unstable equilibrium of artificial conditions, and the liability to disease and at­ tack by injurious forms. Beneficial, predoceous, and parasitic animals. Types ot parasitism. The principles guiding methods of control or attack. Tbe chief details of structure, life-history, and economic importance of animals with which the agriculturist is concerned in each of the following groups: — Protozoa—the typical cell, and disease-producing forms. Platyhelminthes, and Nemathelmintjies—the most common and important forms parasitic in domestic animals, crops, etc., and affecting the food, supply of man. .46i 670 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Annelida—the earthworm and leech. -Mollasca—the freshwater mussel, and garden snail. Arthropoda—beneficial and injurious forms among the'Crustacea, Myriapoda, Arachnida, and Hexopoda, as affecting stock, crops, vege­ tables, fruits, and stored products. Pisces and Amphibia—their beneficial uses. Reptilia—the poison apparatus of snakes. Aves and Mammalia—their anatomy and early de­ velopment. Types important to man. A brief outline of the principles underlying the Distribution of animals, and the chief features of the Australian fauna. In the laboratory, typical forms illustrating each group will be studied. Dissections will be made as far as possible of earthworm, leech, mussel, snail, crayfish, -cockroach, fish, frog, pigeon, and rabbit. Text-book: — Theobald's Text-book of Agricultural Zoology (latest edition). Reference-books: — Thomson's Outlines of Zoology. Sanderson's Insect pests of farm, garden, and orchard. French's Handbook of the Destructive Insects- ot Victoria. Laboratory manuals: — Marshall's Frog (latest edition). Marshall and Hurst's Practical Zoology (latest edition). All microscopes and dissecting instruments for use in the laboratory must be approved by the lecturer before purchase.

PRELIMINARY COURSE OF LECTURES IN AGRICULTURE. These lectures are delivered at the Central Research Farm, Werribee. while the students are attending practical work after the First Annual Examination.- AGRICULTURE. 671

These lectures deal in outline with the general prin­ ciples involved in such questions as the following: — The relation of agriculture to the subsidiary sciences— Climate and soil as controlling factors—The interaction •of plants and animals—The problems of food supply for plants and animals—Farming as a branch ot human industry.

AGRICULTURE. PART I., including Book-keeping and Farm Surveying— The lectures and demonstrations at Dookie Agricul­ tural College are arranged so as to illustrate and as far as possible run parallel with the practical work throughout tbe year. Agriculture:— Outline of the history of agriculture. Plant breed­ ing, especially in regard to cereals. Manage­ ment of experimental plots. Recording re­ sults. Judging grain and crops. Farm crops. Cereal and other Winter crops. Summer crops. Cultivation and treatment of farm crops from time of sowing until harvested. Ensilage and hay making. Conservation ot fodder supplies. Pastures and their manage­ ment. Rotation' of crops. The purchase of land, particularly for irrigation. Necessary equipment for working the farm. Fencing and sub-division. The stable and its management. Farm management. Handling of men. A general review of the farm work takes place every week, when comments and criticisms are invited. To keep a Paddock Book, in which is recorded the actual work done in each field, the cost of the various operations; quantity of seed and manure used; time of sowing; cost of harvest­ ing, and net returns. A general description of the land, fences, gates, tanks, etc., of each paddock to be entered. Records in relation to the livestock on the farm also. to be re­ corded. 672 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Praetical Work will include farm practice generally and that connected with the various branches of the farm. The. following are a few of the more important exercises:—Engine-driving, ploughing, sub- soiling, harrowing, cultivating, drilling, mow­ ing, nay-raking, driving reaper and binder, harvester, stocking, carting-in, thatching, winnowing and grading, marketing, clearing- land of timber, tank excavating, fencing and gate making.

Horticulture:— Orchard planting—svstems, methods and -principles of planting. Propagation of fruit trees and vines, including budding and grafting. Prun- . ing fruit trees and vines. . Fruit' drying (including raisins and currants), and canning. . Olive culture and oil making. Spraying. Cincturing. Packing trees for transport. Seeds and seeding. Identification of weeds and plant diseases. * Practical work in vegetable garden, orchard, and canning factory.

Animal Husbandry:— " Care and management of livestock. Principles and practice of stock feeding. Breeds and breed­ ing of horses, cattle, sheep, pigs, and poultry. Handling, judging, buying and selling of livestock. Preparing livestock for the show. Production of wool, shearing, management of the wool-shed and sheep-yards. Wool-classing. ' Slaughtering, skinning and dressing cattle. - - sheep and pigs. Practical work among live­ stock and poultry. Dairying.—Dairy cattle, judging and management of; milking, treatment of milk ot dairy cows, sanitary methods in the production of milk. - Sampling and testing for butter fat in cheese. AGRICULTURE. 673

cream, milk and' skim milk. Treatment of milk and cream for preservatives. Testing butter for moisture. Preparation and manage­ ment of starters. Ripening of cream and milk for butter and cheese making. Management of cream separators—hand, turbine, and belt- driven. Pasteurisation of milk and cream. Cheese making—acidity, rennet, and hot iron test. Manufacture of butter. Practical work in cow-shed and butter factory. Poultry Management.—Management ot incubators. Mating birds for stud and market purposes. Practical demonstration in the several branches. Carpentry and Building Construction:— Care and use-of tools. Characteristics and uses of the various timbers used on. the farm. Bead­ ing plans, drawing to scale plans and eleva­ tions. Practical work in carpentry. Practical Blacksmithing—Handling and care of tools and forge. Scarfing iron. Welding iron. Making of bolts, S hooks, tines, etc. Pre­ paring horses' feet for fitting shoes. Clinch­ ing on horses' shoes. Repairs to farm imple­ ments. Surveying and Levelling:— Chain Surveying:—Definitions, Instruments used. Range Poles. Process' ot chaining. Fixing direction of line. Chaining on level ground. Chaining up or down hill. Field Problems:—(a) To prolong a line, (b) To run a line over a hill when the ends are invisible from each other, (c) To drop a perpendicular. (A) To determine the angle between two lines, (e) To lay out an angle, (f) To determine the distance of an inaccessible point. Survey of a Closed Field:—Measurements. Divid­ ing the field into triangles. Tic-lines. The location ot objects. Keeping the notes. Plot­ ting - the notes. 674 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

The compass and surveying with the compass. Levelling:—Levelling instruments.- Dumpy level. Levelling staff. Precautions in levelling. Simple levelling. The level book. Reducing the levels. Contouring. Practical work in all tbe above. Field work. Book-keeping:— General principles of book-keeping by double entry. A knowledge of* the books suitable for farm and station work, such as Day Book, Invoice Book, Account Sales Book, Petty Cash Book, Cash Book, Journal, Ledger, Wages Book, Bill Book, Stock Paddock Book, Crop Paddock Book, Wool Book, Shearers' Tally Book, Store Day Book, etc. Candidates will be expected to. - work exercises comprising any transactions occurring in the business of a farm or stock station, including opening and balancing the ledger, drawing up trial balance, profit and loss account, and balance-sheet, and estimating tbe probable and the actual return per cen­ tum on the capital invested. Knowledge of commercial terms in common use.

AGRICULTURE. PART II.— Cereal Culture— The wheat belt of Australia. Climatic and soil con­ ditions, structure, growth, nutrition and food requirements of cereals. ' Diseases and their control. Systems of farming. Preparation of the land. Cultivation, seeding, harvesting operations. Rotation systems. Manures and manuring, with special reference to Victorian conditions. Position ot sheep on the wheat farm. Grazing values under various rotations. Production of export lambs. r> Closer Settlement Country— Modifications in farm practice. Rotation systems. Winter and summer crops. Farm Uve stock. Closer settlement studies. Minor farm industries. Trend ot Australian conditions. AGRICULTURE. 675 * Farm Management and Economics— Establishment and development of a farm. Capital required for farm operations. Farm buUdings . and equipment. Sanitation and water supplies. Conservation of fodder. Costs of production of farm crops and farm products. Australian land laws and systems of land tenure. -

AGRICULTURE, PART III.— Australian rainfall, climatic conditions and crop zones. The world's markets and Australian exports. Limiting factors in crop production. Soils— Soil fertility and its maintenance. Soil improvement and soil management. Tillage, drainage, crop rotations; fertilisers. Conservation of soil moisture. Application of above principles to farm practice in Australia. Crops— Food and water requirements of crops.- Cultivation, harvesting, and utilisation of grain, root, forage . and hay crops. Management ot pastures. Irri­ gated crops. Methods of preparation of the land and application of water. Plant Breeding— History of plant breeding. Acclimatisation, selection, hybridisation. Statistical and experimental study of inheritance. Application of above to production of new varieties of cereals. Experimental Work in Agriculture— The chief results of the work ot tbe experiment stations of the world in relation to (1) Soil problems and investigations. (2) Plant and animal nutrition. (3) Plant improvement and plant breeding. Text-books:— Cherry—Victorian Agriculture. Hall—Feeding of Crops and Stock. Punnet—Mendelism. Montgomery—Farm Crops. 676 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

For Reference:— •BaUey— Cyclopedia of American Agriculture. Hopkins—Soil Fertility and Permanent Agricul­ ture.

AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY— General principles of the application of Chemistry to Agricultural Science. Physical and Organic Chemistry.—Further treatment of the work of Chemistry, Part I. Water Supply, the Atmosphere and the Soil as neces­ sary to Plants. Water Supply.—Its importance, water cultures. The Atmosphere.—Its composition and content of plant food. The Soil.—Its functions, origin, and relation to sub-soil. Constitution of soils from physical and chemical standpoints. Characteristics of limestone, sand, clay and humus in soils. Sail Physics.— Mechanical texture and proximate com­ position of soil and sub-soil. Methods of mechanical analysis. Water in soil dependent on (a) rainfall, (A) drainage, (c) evaporation, (d) soil structure and texture as measured by observed porespace, permeability and capillarity. Aeration and temperature of soils and ground water. Chemical Composition of Soils.—Availability of plant food. The value and limitations of chemical analyses. Field and pot experiments. The methods of chemical and mechanical soil analy­ sis. Fertilisers.—Natural and artificial. Sources of potash, phosphates and nitrogen. Fixation of nitrogeu and its circulation in nature. Chemical and physical effects on soils of use of fertilizers, and of the growth of crops. Effects of drainage, til­ lage, root forage, and irrigation on soil moisture. Soil types.—Their chemical and mechanical character­ istics. AGRICULTURE. 677

Laboratory Work— Simple quantitative analysis, volumetric and gravi­ metric. Soil analysis,, mechanical and chemical. Examination of, and experiments with, soils, manures, other raw materials and agricultural products. Text-books:— H. Ingle—Manual of Agricultural Chemistry. Lyon and Fippin—'I'he Principles of Soil Manage­ ment. Church—Laboratory Guide, or Lincoln and Wal­ ton—Elementary Quantitative Chemical An­ alysis, or Auld and Ker—Practical Agricul­ tural Chemistry. McCall—The Physical Properties of Soils. RusseU—Soil Conditions and Plant Growth. Books for reference:— Warington—Chemistry of the Farm. ' A. D. Hall—The Soil. - Roberts—The PertiUty of the Soil. A. D. Hall—Fertilizers and Manures. TreadweU—Analytical Chemistry. Hilgard—Soils. Wiley—Agricultural Analysis. Alan Murray—Soils and Manures. HoweU—Soil Problems in Wheat Growing.

CHEMISTRY AND AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY (with Laboratory work)—

DIPLOMA COURSE. Elementary Inorganic and Organic Chemistry, with special reference to the composition and food requirements of plants and animals; - the consti­ tution of soils ; the manuring of soils ; and the more important raw materials and products of agriculture. Text-books:— H. Ingle—Elementary Agricultural Chemistry; and Any modem elementary text-book of general chemistry. 678 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19-20.

Laboratory Work— > Experiments illustrative of the subjects dealt with in . the lecture course. Text-books (for practical work):— Coleman and Addymari — Practical Agricultural Chemistry. McCall—The Physical Properties of Soils.

BOTANY, PART LT. (see under Science).

GEOLOGY, PART I. (Agricultural Course)— This course wiU include the work set out under Geology, Fort I. (see under Science), together with the origin of soils, soil surveys, etc., but will exclude those parts dealing with Cosmical Geology and Palaeontology. Students competing for honours must take the full Part I. course. Students will be expected in addition to attend a field excursion to he held during the last two days of the third term and the Monday following. Text Books for reference:— HaU—The Soil (Murray). Stockbridge—Rocks and Soils (Wiley) ' ,

PHYSICAL GEOLOGY (Diploma Course)— ' This wUl include selected portions of Geology, Fart I.

PHYSIOLOGY (Agricultural Course)—

ELEMENTARY BIOCHEMISTRY. Proximate principles of the mammalian body. Water, physiological inorganic salts, carbohydrates, fats, lipoids, proteins. Colloids. Enzymes.

PHYSIOLOGY, GENERAL AND COMPARATIVE. Nervous System— : The neuron, peripheral nervous system including the receptor mechanisms of special sense, central nervous system. AGRICULTURE. 679

Muscular System— General physiology of muscular work.' % Tbe horse as a machine. Muscular coordination. Locomotion. Digestive System— / Digestion in month, stomach, and intestines of horse, cow, sheep and pig. Correlation of activity in alimentary canal. The functions of liver and pancreas. Absorption. . The fate of the food stuffs. Animal Nutrition— The functions of the nutrients. Food rations. Nutritive ratio. The essentials of a diet for:— {a) Milk production. (A) Growing animals. (c) Working animals. (d) Production of meat. Vascular System— Blood, heart, blood vessels. The circulation and its . nervous control. I'he lym­ phatic system. Immunity. Respiratory System— Respiratory tract. The function of the lungs. Chemical and nervous control of respiration. Vitiation of air in stables, etc. Renal and other excretions— Animal Heat— The regulation of temperature in the various types of domesticated animals,' with special reference to tbe effects of characteristic Australian climatic conditions, both local and general. Shearing, clipping, rugging in their relation to animal heat. 680 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920

The Ductless Glands— Supra-renal, thyroid, pituitary, spleen, thymus. Hormones. " . t Reproduction— A general account. The oestrons cycle. Nutrition of the foetus. Influence of internal secretions. . Lactation— Controlling factors—internal secretions. . Importance in relation' to dairying and export lamb industries. . . Milk, its composition and suitability for the needs of the young.

PRACTICAL. A practical knowledge of the chemistry of the animal body, its secretions—including milk, and excretions—in­ cluding urine, together with the simple reactions of the main constituents of fodders—hay, oats, maize, etc.—is acquired by students attending the laboratory once a week and personally performing such experimental work. Books recommended:— Smith—Veterinary Physiology. Flimmer—Practical Organic and Bio-chemistry.

AGRICULTURAL BIO-CHEMISTRY—

DEGREE COURSE. Lectures twice a week for three terms. The Carbohydrates of the vegetable and animal king-' doms, including their occurrence, chemistry, and the changes they undergo in vital processes. The sugars, starches, inulin, glycogen, dextrine,' celluloses, pectins,lignin, etc., ore here included. The Fats, vegetable and animal. The Lipoids, Waxes, and associated bodies. AGRICULTURE. 681

The Proteins. Classification. Physico-Chemical pro­ perties of their solutions, and methods of purifi­ cation. Chemistry of the proteins, with reference to work done on tbe elucidation of their chemical constitution. Comparison of the vegetable and- animal proteins. Included are albumins, globu­ lins, nucleoproteins, phosphoprotei- s, mucins, histones, scleroproteins (hair, wool; horn), and their derivatives by hydrolysis, etc. _ Pigments. Chlorophyll, carotin, lipocbromes, haemo­ globin, and their derivatives. Ferment Action. Comparison of enzymes with inorganic catalysts. Laws governing their actions. Spec­ ial fermentations, e.g., alcoholic, lactic, butyric. . Colloidal Chemistry. Colloid- reactions and their im­ portance in vital processes. Foodstuffs. Their chemical composition and nutrient value. Methods of chemical analysis. Chemical changes occurring on preservation. Here includ­ ed green fodders, beans, grains, roots, straw, hay, silage, etc. Animal Tissues. Bone, muscle, blood, glandular and nervous tissues. Horn, hair and wool. Chemistry of the Excreta. Animal Metabolism. The use of inorganic salts, carbo­ hydrates, fats, proteins and protein cleavage products, with their economy in tbe animal body and interchangeability. Milk and its Products. The secretion of milk and the factors controlling it. The chemical composition of the milk, with the chemistry ot the important ingredients. Cream, butter and cheese. Special Plant Products. Essential oils, resins, tannins, gums, glucosides, and alkaloids. Special Animal Secretions. The internal secretions. Hormones. Specific immunity reactions. Practical Work wUl include quaUtative and quantitative exercises covering the above subjects. 682 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920

DIPLOMA COURSE (2nd Year). This will consist of a more elementary treatment of the subjects detailed for the Degree. The instruction will be included in the course of Physi­ ology and there will also be a set of lectures once weekly in the third term.

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY (see under Science).

AGRICULTURAL BACTERIOLOGY— v General Bacteriology and Bacteriological Technique. Isolation, Cultivation, Staining and Characters of Micro-organisms. The Bacteriology of Milk, Butter, Cheese, •• Starters," Air and Water. Soil Bacteria—A practical study of the economic as­ pects of the various species ot soil bacteria, in relation to fertility. Numbers, characters and distribution of bacteria in different kinds of soils. Influence of moisture, temperature, oxy­ gen, light, disinfectants, organic matter, etc., on bacterial contents of the soil. Resistant soil bacteria. Aerobic and an-aerobic bacteria. Nodule bacteria. The relation of micro-organ­ isms to nitrification, de-nitrification, and am- monification in the soil. The influence of artificial fertilisers. The bacteriology of stable manure and excremental substances. Other Industries—Brewing and Alcoholic Fermenta­ tions, Tanning, Acetic Fermentations, Disinfect­ ants, etc. « AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING— The subject includes a treatment, from the Agricultural standpoint, of the foUowing :— Materials. Machines. Wind motors and Pumps. AGRICULTURE. 683

Water service and Irrigation for Farms. Heat Engines.' Transport. Farm Buildings. Artificial Illumination. Elementary Electrical Work. The student is required to execute working and dimensioned sketches, drawings of machine parts, farm buildings, and lay out, as directed from time to time by the .Lecturer.

VETERINARY SCIENCE— The elementary anatomy of the important bones, muscles and joints, the digestive organs, the heart and main blood and lymphatic vessels, the generative organs, the urinary system, the skin and its associated structures, tile nervous system and the organs of special sense. The determination of age by the study of animal tissues.

.46 684 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

FACULTY OF VETERINARY SCIENCE.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOE THE ANNUAL. EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1920, AND IN FIRST TERM, 1921. FIRST YEAR.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PABT I. (Veterinary Course)— As^for Natural Philosophy, Part I. (see under Science).

ZOOLOGY, PABT I.—(Veterinary course)—. As for Biology, Part I. (Medical coarse).

BOTANY, PART I.—(Veterinary course)— As for Botany, Part I., in the Science course.

CHEMISTRY, PART I.— As for Chemistry, Port I., in the Science Course.

OSTEOLOGY AND ARTHROLOGY (3rd Term)— Students must attend one demonstration weekly. Students wiU not be be allowed to. proceed with dissec­ tions in the 2nd year unless they have a satisfactory knowledge of the bones and joints. VETERINARY SCIENCE. . 685

SECOND YEAR. HISTOLOGY— The course consists of twenty lectures delivered once a week during first and second terms, and of laboratory classes of 1J flours' duration, twice a week during first and once a week during second and third terms. The lectures are fully illustrated, and deal generally with the cell, cell division, the principles of staining, cutting, and mounting sections, the histology of the simple tissues and the details of the histological organ­ ology of one or two of tbe systems dealt with in the laboratory, tbe systems selected varying from year to year. In the laboratory students mount a series of about 96 specimens, which 'are for the most part already stained, practice being, however, also given in the mani­ pulation and mounting of fresh tissues. The specimens dealt with include the following:— Blood, bone marrow; epithelium and endothelium, the tensile connective tissues, cartilage, bone and its development, muscle, nervous tissues, heart and heart valves, blood vessels, lymphoid organs, ductless glands, skin and its append­ ages, larynx, trachea and bronchus, lung, tongue and buccal glands, pancreas, the diges­ tive tube, liver, urinary system, genital system in the male and female, the organs of special sense, spinal cord, cerebral cortex and cerebellum. Modifications in the minute anatomy of the alimen­ tary system ' in' ruminating animals, and the minute structure of the horn secreting tissues in the horse's foot will be demonstrated and studied microscopically. Text-book :— Lewis and Stdbr—A Text-book of Histology (2nd ed.).

PHYSIOLOGY-! The entire course of instruction will extend over not less than 130 hours. " 'I'he earlier lectures are restricted to the fundamental principles of bio-chemistry, so that the .46* 686 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920. practical classes on the same subject may be better under­ stood. Subsequent lectures deal with the physiology,, general and comparative, of the blood, circulation, re­ spiration, digestion, animal nutrition, metabolism,, hormone and nerve, the peripheral nervous system, in­ cluding the receptor mechanisms of general and special senses, the central nervous system, muscle and locomotion,, animal heat, renal and other excretions, reproduction, lactation, and the ductless glands. The leotures are illustrated with experiments and demonstrations, and emphasis ia laid on subjects of special importance. Practical classes in Biochemistry are held once a week throughout the year. In these classes each student has the opportunity of studying experimentally the chem­ istry of the constituents of the animal body, of animal excreta, and tbe fundamental ingredients of fodders. A coarse of practical classes, ten in number, deals with, the experimental physiology of muscle, nerve, circulation and central nervous system. The standard of the systematic course is given by the- lectures. Students are expected to read Smith's Veterinary Physiology. In the practical course the typed slips issued at each class give oil the information and directions re­ quired. Studente desirous of further knowledge in bio­ chemistry are recommended to read PUmmer's Practical Organic aud Bio-Chemistry.

ANATOMY OP THE DOMESTICATED ANIMALS— This course consists of lectures and demonstrations, extending over not less than 100 hours. It includes: — The anatomy of the horse, a systematic description of the muscular, circulatory, lymphatic and nervous • systems; the respiratory, digestive, urinary, generative, and special sense organs; the foot." The anatomy of the ox, camel, pig, sheep, dog, cat and fowl is dealt with by comparative- methods. Each student must attend at the dissecting room and engage in the dissection of the horse and other domesti­ cated animals,, for a total period of not less than 300- hours. . VETERINARY SCIENCE.' ' 687

SYSTEMATIC 'BOTANY— See under Faculty of Science. Botany, Fart II., Sect. <3). The course will consist of lectures and demonstrations •extending over a period of not less than 100 hours. This subject is dealt with in lectures and demonstra­ tors, including field excursions. They comprise the classification and characters of plants generally, and their characteristics, both macro­ scopic and microscopic, the structure and classification and economic value of grasses and fodder plants, the properties and treatment of noxious and poisonous plants and of weeds. PLANT PATHOLOGY— A short course of 6 leotures and 8 hours' praotical work will be given prior to the commencement of this course. It will include an account of the commoner parasitic fungi, such as Ergot, Rust, Smut, Mildew, Aspergillus, Ring­ worm (Oosporo, Sporotrichum), Actinomyces, etc., their mode of treatment and their effect upon stock.

MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY (Veterinary Course)— (a) Weights and Measures of the Imperial and Metric Systems. (b) The general nature and composition, and the more important physical and chemical characters of the drugs utilized in Veterinary medicine. - (c) The composition of the Pharmacopoeial prepara­ tions of these drugs, and the processes employed in their manufacture. . (d) The doses of these drugs and of their preparations for the various domesticated animals. (e) Chemical and Pharmaceutical incompatibilities. {f) The candidate will be required to recosrnise the more important drugs used in Veterinary medicine. ig) The candidate will be required to write prescrip­ tions with and without abbreviations. (h) General dispensing of Veterinary medicines and I preparations. (/) Methods of administering medicines to animals. 688 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1950.

Text-books:— Finlay.Dunn.—Veterinary Medicines. Bruce and DiUing—Materia Medica.

STABLE MANAGEMENT AND MANIPULATION OF ANIMALS— This is a practical course consisting of demonstration and practising classes, held weekly, .during the 1st and 2nd years. ' It deals with the general care of animals, grooming, cleaning; feeding and watering; bandaging and clothing; saddlery; harness; means of restraint, etc. Students must obtain a certificate ot proficiency in this- -ubject before being allowed to proceed to the work of the- 3rd year.

THIRD YEAR. PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY— The course will consist of lectures and demonstrations, including laboratory work, extending over not less than 150 hours. The lectures in General Pathology deal with: — The Causes of Disease—general considerations; clas­ sification of disease; mechanical, physical, chemical, and parasitic causes of disease. Re­ actions to Injury—inflammation and local reactions; regeneration and healing of wounds; systemic reaction to infection; fever; necrosis ; death. The degenerations and infiltrations. Hypertrophy and atrophy. Neoplasms; cysts; teratomata. Special Pathology— The disease process affecting the various organs and systems of the body: — Circulatory—the blood, heart, vessels, spleen, lym­ phatic system, and blood-forming organs. Respiratory — nasal passages, larynx, trachea, bronchi, lungs and pleura. Digestive—mouth, oesophagus, stomach, intestines, liver, pancreas, peritoneum. Urinary—kidneys and ureters, bladder, urethra. VETERINARY SCIENCE. 689

Reproductive—male generative organs, female gene­ rative organs, mammary glands Osseous—bones, joints, cartilages. Muscular—the skeletal muscles. Nervous—brain, spinal cord, peripheral nerves. The Eye. The Ductless Glands. . The Skin. Bacteriology— The classification, morphology, isolation, and culti­ vation of bacteria. Filtrable viruses. Protozoan parasites. Immunity. - Practical Work. This comprises the macroscopic ex­ amination of diseased tissues and organs; post-mortem examinations; the study of museum specimens; the pre­ paration of sections of tissues exhibiting the various pathological conditions and their microscopic study. The examination of type cultures ot bacteria; methods of staining; cultivation and identifi­ cation of common organisms.

PHARMACOLOGY— The course, extending over not less than one term, wiU consist of lectures accompanied by lecture-demonstrations. The action of the foUowing groups of drugs is dealt with: — Drugs acting on the Alimentary Canal; Anaesthetics; Hypnotics and Sedatives; Local Anaesthetics, Nerve Stimulants; Drugs acting on the Heart, Respiratory and Renal Systems; Drugs acting on the Circulation ; Antiseptics; etc.

VETERINARY HYGIENE AND DIETETICS— The course will consist of lectures and demonstrations extending over not less than 60 hours. Hygiene— Air—composition, impurities, air-borne diseases. Ventilation—air exchange, perflation, draughts, cubic space, means of ventilation, suction, convection, diffusion, air inlets and outlets, ventilating shafts, tubes and devices. 690 DETAILS OF. SUBJECT'S, 1920.

Buildings—site, location, relationship to contiguous buildings, construction, materials, and drainage of live stock buildings and yards. Disposal ot manure and auimal fluids. Disinfection Methods— Disposal of Dead Animals— Dietetics— Natural Foods of animals—evolution of artificial feeding, source and effect of food, nutrition of animals. Grouping of Foods—Flesh formers. Heat givers. Proximate constituents, water, mineral matter, < protein, nitrogen-free compounds(carbo-hydnite8, ' fats) Palaiability and Digestibility of Foods—Palati- bility, quantity,'dryness, preserved and cured fodders, maturity, preparation of fodders for feeding, frequency of feeding, ratio of food nutrients, influence of individuality, species and age of animals, determination of digest- bility. Values of Foods—commercial values; nutritive values; basis and standards of valuation. Bations—palatability, suitability, digestibility, cal­ culation ot nutritive ratio; compounding of. rations, maintenance rations, rations for work (horses), milk production (cows), (quantities, varieties), development rations (calf, foal and lamb feeding), fattening rations (bullocks, sheep and pigs). Water—source and means of supply (storage tanks, wells, waterholes, pumps and troughs), quan­ tity, purity and mineral content. . Excursions are made to suitable premises for pr.ictical Demonstrations.

THERAPEUTICS AND TOXICOLOGY— This course will consist of lectures dealing with the ' general rales of treatment, general and special methods of treatment in different types of diseases. Drugs, their VETERINARY SCIENCE. 691 mode of action, methods of administration and uses. Suitable Housing. Exercise and Diet for sick animals. Poisons, their classification, effects, antidotes and anti­ dotal treatment: PARASITOLOGY. PABT I.— The full course in Parasitology will comprise work in two years. The first part will consist ot lectures, demon­ strations, and practical work extending over not less than 45 hours, and will deal with the following subject matter:— Parasitism in general: definitions, types and degrees of parasitism, propagation of parasites, pre­ disposing conditions, influence of parasitism on the host, and on the parasite, prophylaxis, treatment, interrelation of man and domesti­ cated animals as regards their parasites. Directions for collection, preservation and examina­ tion of parasites. - Systematic study of the parasites of domestic ani­ mals. General account of- the dhief distin­ guishing features of each of the following groups, with brief descriptions of the more im­ portant points in the structure, and the life- history of the more common and important genera of each:—Trematoda, Cestoda, Nema- toda, Acanthocephala, Gordiocea, and Him- dinea. Books for Reference— Parasitologic des animaux domestiques, by Neven- Lemaire. * _ Practical Parasitology, by Braun and Lube. Neumann's Parasites, by Macqueen. Laboratory Guide to Parasitology, by Herms.

GENERAL ZOOTBCHNY AND THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF SHOEING— Zootechny— Principles of breeding—points of the horse, history of different breeds, with chief points; breeds of cattle, different types of cattle for special purposes. 692 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

Shoeing— ResumS of structure"- and functions of the foot. Pre­ paration of the foot for a shoe. Different types of shoes for special purposes. Fitting and nailing on of the shoe. Defective action and its management. Injuries from shoeing. Bad feet. Leather and rubber pads. These subjects are dealt with by series of special lec­ ture demonstrations during both the second and third years, and extending over not less than 50 hours. Students must obtain a certificate of proficiency in these subjects before being allowed to proceed to the work of the 4th year. CLINICS— Students must attend not less than 101 hours at tbe hospital practice, paying particular attention to the pre­ paration, dispensing and administration of medicines.

FOURTH YEAR. PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY OP INFEC­ TIOUS DISEASES OP THE DOMESTICATED ANIMALS— The course will consist of lectures and demonstrations . with laboratory work, extending over not less than 100 hours, on the various pathogenic bacteria, filtrable viruses, fungi and micr.o-parasites affecting the domesti­ cated animals; the pathology of the specific and con­ tagious diseases, including tropical diseases; and the practical application of the principles of immunity, in­ cluding serumtherapy and vaccination. In .the Practical Work the student has opportunities for the practical study of the morphology and biology of the more important micro-organisms, including those associated with:—Anthrax, malignant oedema, black- quarter, braxy, tetanus, tuberculosis, glanders, caseous lymphadenitis, actinomycosis, botriomycosis, dermatomy- cosis, Johne's disease, contagious abortion of cattle, swine fever, swine erysipelas, fowl cholera, hemorrhagic septicemia, strangles, mastitis and suppuration. VETERINARY SCIENCE. 693

MEAT INSPECTION— The course consists of lectures and demonstrations. The lectures deal with the objects and methods of meat inspection; the construction and types of abattoirs; the law relating to the preparation and sale of meat; and the application ot the teachings of veterinary pathology ' and bacteriology to the special purposes of meat inspec­ tion. The demonstrations are conducted weekly at the City Abattoirs to students of both 3rd and 4th years.

VETERINARY SURGERY— This course consists of not less than 90 lectures and demonstrations on the principles of General Surgery and Regional Surgery. Surgical diagnosis. Methods of restraint and hand­ ling. . Sterilisation of hands, skin, instruments, dressings and sutures. Antiseptics, antisepsis, and asepsis. Disinfection and disinfectants. Anaesthesia. General and local. Anaesthetics. Methods of administration. Sepsis, septicaemia, pyaemia and sapraemia. Treatment of abscess and ulcer. Wounds and in­ juries. Surgical diseases of bones and joints. Injuries: Periostitis, osteitis, and arthritis. Fractures and dislocations. Tumours of bone. Special fractures. Surgery of muscle and tendons. Strain and rupture; dislocation of tendons. Knuckling over; tenotomy. Surgery of the abdomen. Injuries to the abdominal wall, and deep structures. Surgical conditions of the mouth and pharynx; teeth; oseophagus; stomach and intestines. Obstruction, strangulation and intussuscep­ tion. Tympanitis. Hernia. Surgery of the respiratory system. Catarrh of the nasal cavity and sinuses. 694 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1020.

Trephining of the skull sinuses. Laryngitis; roar­ ing. Tracheotomy. Puncture ot the thorax. Broken wind. Surgery of the nrinogenital system. Injuries to the kidney. Calculus and abscess. Cystitis, vesical calculus, tumours of the bladder; atony of the bladder. Cafaheterisation of various animals. Examination of the bladder. Ure­ thral calculus, retention of urine, incontinence of urine. Haematuria. New growths of penis and vulva. Surgery of the uterus and ovaries. Hysterectomy and oophorectomy. Castration; cryptorchidism and monorchidism.. In­ guinal hernia. Surgical diseases of the nervous system. Symptoms of spinal lesion's. Paraplegia and hemiplegia. Facial paralysis, paralysis of the fifth nerve. Paralysis of the recurrent laryngeal nerve. Median and radial paralysis. Neurectomy. Surgery of the foot. Lominitis, quitter, canker, grease, thrush, sandcrack. Pus in the foot. Picked up and buckled nail, corns. Surgery of the eye. nose and ear. Injuries, conjunc­ tivitis, cataract, glaucoma, staphyloma, otor- rhoea, etc.

OPERATIVE SURGERY— During this course, which is essentiaUy practical, all the usual operations in Veterinary Surgery will be demon­ strated, and opportunity wiU be afforded students to perform them on the dead subject.

VETERINARY MEDICINE— Diagnosis of Disease—History. Present state. General Examination—Attitude of patient, condi­ tion, conformation, temperament, condition of coat, visible mucous membranes, pulse, tem­ perature, respiration. VETERINARY SCIENCE. 695

Special Examination—Circulatory apparatus, re­ spiratory, digestive, urinary, genital, nervous system. Examination of blood, urine, and body fluids. Diagnostic inoculations; Sporadic Diseases—Diseases of the digestive organs, mouth, oesophagus, .stomach and intestines; the liver; the peritoneum; the urinary appa­ ratus, kidneys, bladder; the genital organs; the circulatory system, heart, pericardium, blood-vessels; the blood and blood-forming organs, spleen; the respiratory system, larynx, bronchi, lungs, pleura; the nervous system, brain, spinal cord, peripheral nerves; the skin. Constitutional Diseases—Diabetes, gout, haemo- globinnria. Infective Diseases including:—Septicaemia, Pyae^ mia, Anthrax, .' Malignant -Oedema, Black- quarter, Braxy, Tetanus, Glanders, Tuber­ culosis, Johne's Disease, Contagious Abortion. Distemper, Rabies, Foot and Mouth Disease, Variolae, Rinderpest, Swine Fever, Swine Erysipelas, Swine Plague, Fowl Cholera, Haemorrhagic Septicaemia, Septic pneumonia in pigs and calves. Strangles, Influenza, Pur­ pura hemorrhagica, Equine Pneumonia, Contagious Bovine Flenro-pneumonia, Calf Diphtheria, Actinomycosis, Botriomyoosis, Malignant Catarrh, Contagious Pustular Stomatitis, Infectious Vaginal Catarrh, Sheep Scab, Mange, Ringworm, - Texas. Fever, Piro- plasmosis. Surra, Donrine.

OBSTETRICS— Generative Organs of the Female—Oestrum, Fecun­ dation, Sterility, Gestation, Signs of Preg­ nancy, Foetal'Coverings. Diseases and Accidents of Pregnancy—Constipa­ tion, Oedema, Amaurosis, Albuminuria, Abor­ tion, Premature Labour, Hernia, Rupture and Torsion of the uterus. Normal Parturition—Subsequent changes in the Maternal Organs. 696 v DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1920.

Accidents and Diseases following Parturition— Retention of Foetal Membranes, Post-partnm Haemorrhage. Inversion of the Uterus, Vagina , and Bladder, Vaginitis, Wounds of tbe Genital Or­ gans, Metritis, Metro-peritonitis, Parturient Apo­ plexy, Post-jjartum Paralysis, Laminitis, Mam- mitis and Diseases of the Teats, Maternal and -Foetal Dystokia, Deformities, Tumours, Indu- ' ration of the Os uteri. Hydrocephalus, Ascites, Anasarca, Emphysema, Monstrosities, Malpre- sentations of the Foetus, Obstetrical Opera- , tions. Mechanical Aids, Embryotomy, etc. Diseases of New-bom Animals—Haemorrhage from she Umbilicus. Pervious Crachus, Hernia, Joint Disease, Indigestion, Diarrnoea, Consti­ pation, etc. Demonstrations with Phantom and Obstetrical prac­ tice.

STATE VETERINARY SANITARY SCIENCE— The course wUl consist ot lectures chiefly explanatory of the legislative enactments in the Commonwealth and States dealing with the control of animals in health and disease, including the foUowing:— Federal Quarantine Act 1908. Stock Diseases Act 1890. Meat Supervision Act 1900. Milk and Dairy Supervision Act 1905. Chaff Adulteration Act 1908. Sheep Dipping Act. Regulations and Administration —Over-sea quar­ antine (exotic diseases), Inter-State quarantine (Tick infestation, Plenro-pneumonia, Anthrax, Swine Fever), Internal quarantine (contagious and infectious diseases). The principles and practical application of quarantine and veterinary police measures as Ulustrated by the control ot contagious diseases of animals in the Commonwealth and other countries wUl ba dealt with.

PABASITOLOGY, PAIRT IT.— The second part of this course will con

Systematic study of the parasites of domestic' ani­ mals (continued), dealing more especially with the Arthropoda inimical to domesticated animals. General account of the chief distinguishing features of each of the following groups, with brief descriptions of the more important points in the structure and life-history of the more common and important genera of each: — Arachnida, especially Pentastomida and Acarina and' Hexapoda, especially Diptera, Siphon- aptera, Hemiptera, Anoplura, Mallophaga. A brief survey of the chief parasites found in special systems and organs of the body in different domestic animals. Books for reference (additional)— Entomology for Medical Officers, by Alcock. Medical Entomology, by Patton and Cragg. Medical and Veterinary Entomology, by Herms.

CLINICS— Students must attend for not less than 300 hours at the hospital practice of the Veterinary School. 698 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1921.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS OP EXAMINATION FOR THE DEGREE OP MASTER OP VETERINARY SCIENCE. TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM. 1921.

• GROUP (A). VETERINARY MEDICINE AND SURGERY. (1) MEDICINE AND OBSTETRICS— Physical signs of disease, and means of diagnosis. Clinical recording. Evidence of contagious disease. Conducting post-mortems, and obtaining material for investigation. Examination—for clinical purposes—of body fluids, urine, milk, etc Therapeutic actions of drugs. Toxicology. Methods ot treatment and prophylaxis. Obstetrics and diseases ot pregnancy. Diseases of young stock. Field Work: 1 month in an obstetric practice. 1 month as locum tenens in a general practice.

(2) VETERINARY SURGERY— The subject includes the technique and practice of Veterinary Surgery, Veterinary Ophthal­ mology, Surgical Anatomy,- Surgical Path­ ology; the causes and detection of unsoundness in horses. i ' Field Work: A period of one month's practice with an officer ot the Agricultural Department during the inspection of horses for soundness. A period of two weeks or one short vacation in charge of the surgical clinic of the Veterinary Hospital. VETERINARY SCIENCE. 699

Candidates taking this group will be expected to assist the surgeons during major operations, and to perform minor operations when necessary. Text books recommended: — Dollar—Regional Surgery and Operative Tech­ nique. French—Surgery of the Dog. Sharpe—Veterinary Ophthalmology. Share Jones—Veterinary Surgical Anatomy.

GBOUP (B). VETERINARY PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY. (1) PATHOLOGY— Examination of the blood, diseases of the blood. Examination of milk. Examination of urine. Preparation of microscopic sections—fixing, harden- - - - ing, embedding, catting, staining and mount­ ing. The neoplasms of the domesticated animals, benign and malignant. Diseases of the nervous system of animals. Preservation and mounting of post-mortem speci­ mens. Immunity—Its practical applications. (2) BACTERIOLOGY— A practical knowledge of laboratory methods and technique, including the preparation of media, methods of staining, -filtration, cultivation, isolation, experimental infection, and identifi­ cation of the common pathogenic organisms, including bacteria, fungi, and filtrable viruses. The bacteriological examination of milk (3) PARASITOLOGY^— (a) Vermes. (b) Protozoa ' (c) Arthropods. Candidates taking Section 3 must do subsection (a) and either (b) or (c). ,, 700 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1021.

(4) TROPICAL DISEASES OP ANIMALS. Sections 3 and 4 are alternative subjects, and only one of the two it to be taken. Field Work: Practical application of immunity; vaccination of animals; serological testing. Examination of, and reports on, post-mortem speci­ mens in the field and in the laboratory. Collection and demonstration of parasites of groups selected.

GROUP (CI). VETERINARY SANITARY SCIENCE. (1) CONTROL OP CONTAGIOUS DISEASES OF ANI. MALS. VETERINARY QUARANTINE AND POLICE MEASURES— Contagious diseases of animals—their geographical distribution and prevalence. Means of diagnosis; obtaining specimens and materials for diagnosis and investigation. Means of prevention, control, and eradication. Sanitary laws and veterinary police measures in different countries; special measures for cer­ tain diseases. Transport of animals. Preparation of reports and vital statistics. Field Work: Not less than one month under control of the Chief Veterinary Officer in the practical application of the provisions of the Stocks Diseases Act.

<2) MEAT INSPECTION— The meat. supply—world sources; home supply, export. Laws relating to meat inspection and import in various countries. , VETERINARY SCIENCE. 701

Diseases of meat, and meat-producing animals. Conditions rendering meat unfit tor food. Ante-mortem inspection of food animals. Slaughtering methods. . Identification of organs, tissues, etc., by chemical anatomical and biological tests. Post-mortem inspection; jointing. Preservation ot meat.and meat products. Abattoir construction and management. Field Work: Not less than one month at a public abattoir.

<3) MILK AND DAIRY INSPECTION— Chemistry of milk; differences in different species, and the conditions causing variation. of milk secretion; cellular content of mill Bacteriology of milk; bacterial counts; common bacteria present; methods.of identification. Diseases of the udder and teats. The economics of milk production; preservation, pas­ teurisation and sterilisation ot milk; use of preservatives. Adulteration ond its detection. Inspection of dairies. Inspection of cows. Herd testing Field Work: Not less than one month spent; in dairy super­ vision.

.47A 702 . DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

FACULTY OF DENTISTRY.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOE THE ANNUAL- EXAMINATIONS, TO BE HELD IN 1920, AND- SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION IN FEBRU­ ARY, 1921.

CHEMISTRY— Physics—The elements of Physics in relation to- Chemistry. The, general properties of solidsr liquids and gases. The simpler phenomena of heat, light and electricity, in relation to- Chemical change. Chemical Theory—Tbe nature of chemical elements and chemical compounds. Chemical change. Distinction between elements, compounds and. mechanical mixtures. Atoms and molecules. Chemical notation. The meaning of chemical formulae and of chemical equations. Chemical change quantitatively considered. Simple cal­ culations. Inorganic Chemistry—The preparation, properties and uses of the common elements and their more- important compounds, with special reference to- those employed in dentistry: — Hydrogen -r chlorine, bromine iodine; oxygen, sulphur.; nitrogen, phosphorus, arsenic, antimony, bis­ muth; potassium, sodium (and salts of ammo­ nium); copper,silver, gold; magnesium,calcium, strontium, barium; zinc, mercury; boron, alu­ minium; carbon, silicon, lead; chromium; man­ ganese; iron; platinum. Organic Chemistry—The classification of the hydro­ carbons and their more important derivatives. The chemistry of the more important organic- compounds employed in dentistry — alcohol, ether, chloroform, iodoform, ethyl chloride, chloral, etc. DENTISTRY. 703

Practical Chemistry—• The use of. the blowpipe. General analytical operations—solution, filtra­ tion, evaporation, crystallisation, etc. The qualitative analysis ot simple salts by wet and . dry methods. Text-book:— Inorganic Chemistry for Beginners. Roscoe and Lunt. London: Macmillau & Co.

JUNIOR ANATOMY— Second Term. —Lectures twice a week on the bones of the skull, the vertebrae, the ribs and the sternum. Lectures once a week on the abaomen and thorax. Third Term.—Lectures thrice a week on the head and neck. Text-books:— Dixon's " Manual of Osteology." Berry's Practical Anatomy, vols. 2 and 3. Cunningham's Text-book of Anatomy (last edition). -JUNIOR DENTAL ANATOMY. HUMAN AND COM­ PARATIVE— Elementary Biology. Dental Anatomy. The lectures include a detailed macroscopic description* of the teeth of man, with on account of their arranger ment and occlusion. Books recommended:— Black; Hopewell-Smith. JUNIOR DENTAL MECHANICS & METALLURGY-— (n) Junior Dental Mechanics—The general principles of Dental Mechanics. The treatment of the mouth preparatory to the insertion of artificial dentures. Materials, appliances and methods employed in taking impressions of the mouth. The preparation of models, dies and counter dies. The choice of material and type* of den­ ture. Articulation, selection and arrangement of teeth. Vulcanite, construction of. dentures in vulcanite. Repairing dentures. The retention of dentures. 704 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

(*) Junior Metallurgy.— The consideration of the- principles of Metallurgy, the metallic elements, properties, alloys, and and uses of metals in common use in laboratory.

SENIOR ANATOMY— . Second Term.—Lectures once a week on the abdomen and thorax. Third Term.—Lectures three times a week on the head and neck. Text-books:— Berry's Practical Anatomy, vols. 2 and 3. * Cunningham's Text-book of Anatomy (last edition)! SENIOR DENTAL ANATOMY, HUMAN AND COM­ PARATIVE— The course ot lectures includes an account of the nature of teeth in general, and of the Dental Tissues in parti­ cular ; also a consideration of their development and calcification. Comparative studies of the teetn' of fishes, reptiles and mammals. Books recommended: — Dental Anatomy, Tomes, Underwood, Hopewell- Smith.

C- PHYSIOLOGY (with special reference to Dentistry)— Physiology. The elements of Biochemistry. The Physiology of the body as a whole. The inter­ dependence of organs. Repair. Transplanta­ tion, etc. The Blood—With special reference to coagulation. The Heart and Circulatory System — With special reference to the effects of anesthetics, ot posture, of pain, of surgical shock and haemorrhage. The Lymphatic systems, with special reference to those in the mouth. Respiration—The gaseous interchange in tbe lungs » the nervous and chemical control of respiration' Effects of vitiated air, etc. DENTISTRY. 705

Digestion—The physiology of the mouth in fuU detail Digestion in the stomach and in tbe small and - large intestines, including.the action of the liver' and pancreas, with special, reference to the di­ gestive' mechanisms influenced by the act of eating. Excretion—An elementary knowledge ot the mechanism of renal excretion and the composition of urine wiU be required. Tbe skin and sweat (also elementary). Animal Heal—An elementary knowledge of the main facts will be required. The Peripheral Nervous System—With special reference to the fifth, seventh, ninth and tenth cranial- nerves, and the autonomic supply of the salivary glands. The organs of sensation, including an elementary knowledge of the eye and ear. The Central Nervous System—An elementary know­ ledge will be required. Text-book— Essentials of Physiology (Bainbridge & Menzies).

PRACTICAL HISTOLOGY AND MICROSCOPY (with special reference to Dentistry)— During the course students are required to examine a series of specimens illustrating the structure of the fol­ lowing tissues: — The cell, epithelium, connective tissues, muscular and nervous tissues, blood and its development, and the microscopic anatomy of the following structures:— Tongue, teeth and their development, salivary glands, tonsil, respiratory system, digestive tract and kidney. PRACTICAL METALLURGY— The Physical Properties of the Metals—Gold, Platinum Palladium, Silver, Tin, Antimony, Mercury, Lead, Bismuth, Zinc, Cadmium, Copper, Alumi- ° •nium, Iron, Nickel, viz.:—Lustre; Tenacity; Elasticity; Malleability; Ductility; Conduc­ tivity for Heat and for Electricity: FusibUity; Specific Gravity; Specific Heat; Expansion by Heat; Brittleness ; Hardness; Crystalline Char- 706 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

- acter; Change of Volume en Solidification; Action of.air (either .hot or cold), of water, of acids, or alkalis, and of sulphuretted, hydrogen on the above metals and their principal alloys and amalgams. Effect of Exposure of the above Metals, their alloys and amalgams in the mouth. Gold—Preparation and' Properties of Pure Gold. Cohesive and non-cohesive Gold. Precipitated and Spongy Gold. Assay of Gold. Calculation of amount of base metal to be added to reduce the fineness of Gold to a given carat, or of the amount of fine- gold or of gold of high carat needed to.be added to raise the fineness of an alloy to a given carat. The detection and esti­ mation of Gold in alloys. The purple of Cassius. The effect of impurities on the properties of Gold. The properties of the alloys of Gold Composition of solders of Gold. • Platinum—Preparation and Properties of Platinum. Platinum-Black and Spongy Platinum. Detec­ tion and' estimation of Platinum in alloys. Alloys of ^Platinum with Iridium, Gold, Silver and other Metals. Dental Alloy. Palladium—Preparation and Properties of Palladium and its combinations with Silver, Gold and Mercury. Silver—Preparation and Properties of Pure Silver. Assay ot Silver by Cupellation and in the wet way. Preparation and Properties of the com­ binations of Silver with Copper, Gold, Platinum and Mercury. Composition and preparation of solders for Silver. Electro-plating. • Tin.—Preparation and Properties of Tin. Detection of Tin in alloys. Preparation and Properties of the Alloys of Tin. Its combination with Zinc, Copper and Mercury. Composition and melting- points of readily fusible alloys. Antimony—Preparation and Properties. Properties ot AUoys. DENTISTRY. ' 707

Mercury—Preparation and Properties of Pure Mercury- Testing the purity of Mercury. VermUion and detection of impurities therein. Preparation and Properties of amalgams of the various metals „. mentioned in this Synopsis. Composition and preparation of the principal alloys which have been used for preparing Dental Amalgams. Methods of testing such amalgams, as to the causes of their change of volume, permanence in 'the month, and change of colour. Effects of different metals in these amalgams. Possible action of amalgam fillings on other metals used in the Month. Lead—Preparation and Properties. Effect of alloying on its Properties. Solders and soft soldering. Bismuth—Preparation and Properties. AUoys. Zinc —Preparation, Purification and Properties. Pre paration of Zinc Oxide, Zinc Chloride, and the various materials for the Oxychloride, Oxyphos- phate, and Oxysulphato Cements. Action of Acids and Alkaline Solutions on Cements in the Mouth. Alloys of Zinc. Cadmium—Properties, its advantages and disadvantages in alloys and amalgams. Copper—Preparation and properties. Effect of impuri ties on its properties. Alloys. Modes of pre­ paration and properties of Copper Amalgams. Aluminium—Preparation and Properties of Aluminium and Aluminium-bronze. Solders for Aluminium and Aluminium-bronze. Nickel—Preparation and properties. Alloys. German SUver. Nickel-plating. Iron—Differences between Cast Iron, Wrought Iron and Steel. Effect of presence of Impurities in Irqn. Hardening, Tempering, Annealing und Burning Steel. Methods of testing Metals and Alloys for their various . properties as described in first paragraph. Methods of testing Dental Amalgams for changes of volume. Effect of Sulphuretted Hydrogen, Water, Air, Acids and Alkalis on •.Dental Amalgams. 708 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Methods of parting Gold from SUver; rough testator fineness ot Gold. AUoys (Touchstone); of pre­ paration ot Gold Alloy of required fineness; of recovery of Gold from Scraps; of preparation of Solders for Gold; of recovery of Platinum and Silver from Scraps; of preparation of pure Sil- . ver; of preparation of Amalgam AUoys contain­ ing two or more of the foUowing metals:—SUver. Tin, Gold, Platinum, Copper, Zinc j of prepara­ tion ot readUy fusible Alloys containing two or more of the metals Tin, Lead, Bismuth, Mercury. Cadmium, Antimony, and Zinc. Methods of determining melting-points of readily fusible Alloys; of preparation of Alloys recommended for Dies and Counter-dies. Description of Furnaces and Muffles used in Metallurgy. Theory and varieties of Blow-pipes and Fluxes. Colouring and Gilding Gold. Purification of Sweep or Lemel.

OPERATIVE DENTISTRY (3rd Year)— Curies. Miller's Theory of Caries— The formation of bacterial placques in selective areas. Its clinical aspect with regard to cavity preparation. Treatment of'Caries.— , Description of the various instruments employed. Nomenclaure. Preparation of cavities. Materials used for filling: — (a) Gold, cohesive and nun-cohesive. (b) Tin. (c) Amalgams. (d) Cements. (e) Gutta percha. Temporary fillings. Insertion of the filling. Exclusion of saliva. The use of Matrices. Inlays—Gold and Porcelain. Diseases of the Tooth Pulp and Periodontal Mem­ brane-— Diagnosis of diseases of the pulp. DENTISTRY. 709

Technical treatment of operations on the pulp. Diagnosis and technical treatment of periodontitis, acute and chronic abscesses, and discoloration 'of teeth. Treatment of canals, root-filling materials. 'Management of Deciduous Teeth.— Odontalgia, treatment and filling ot. cavities, alve­ olar abscess, extractions, prophylaxis. The operation of extraction of the teeth—Complica­ tions and sequelae (taught by the Superinten­ dent). Books recommended: — J. F. Colyer. G. V. Black (last editions). Vols. I., II.

GENERAL SURQERY. PATHOLOGY AND BACTERI. OLOQY— Inflammation, Regeneration and Repair of Injuries, Thrombosis and Embolism, Degenerations and Infiltrations, Atrophy and Hypertrophy, Tum­ ours, Development of Bacteriology, Nature of Bacteria and their properties. Methods of Culti­ vation and examination ot Bacteria, Chemical Products of Bacteria, Immunity, Serum Treat­ ment of Disease, Antiseptic and Aseptic Methods in Surgery, Description of Pyogenic Organisms, Septicaemia and Pyaemia, Erysipelas, Boils, Car­ buncles, and Malignant Pustule, Ulceration and Gangrene, Tuberculosis, especially forms amen­ able to Surgical treatment. Syphilis, Fractures and Dislocations (General), Pathological condi- . tions about the Mouth. Books recommended:— Hewlett—Pathology, General and Special. Green—Pathology and Morbid Anatomy.

MATERIA MEDICA AND THERAPEUTICS— (a) Definition and consideration of Materia Medica. Pharmacology, Toxicology, Therapeutics. (b) Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Preparations. 710 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

(c) Pharmacopoeias and Official Preparations. (d) Weights and Measures and percentage solutions. (e) Drugs—their names and synonyms, sources, char­ acters, preparations, doses, pharmacology and therapeutics: Methods of administering and,applying drugs and conditions modifying their actions. Classification of Drugs and Remedies under the follow­ ing headings: — Local Antacids, Antiseptics and Disinfectants, As­ tringents Styptics and Escbarotics, Bleaching Agents, Counter-irritants, Demulcents and Emollients, Local Anaesthetics (Analgesics and Obtundents). General.1—Alteratives Restoratives and Tonics, Anodynes Sedatives and Hypnotics, Anaes­ thetics, Antipyretics, Cathartics, Diaphoretics, Diuretics, Emetics, Sialogogues. Stimulants. Organo-Therapy—Serums, Vaccines. Artificial Hyperaemia, Massage, Light, Heat, Elec­ tricity, Radium and X-rays. (f) Incompatibility—Physical, Chemical and Physio­ logical. ' • •. (g) Poisons—Their actions and antidotes. (h) Prescriptions—Prescription writing, with and without abbreviations, using Apothecaries' and • Metric systems. (i) Anaesthetics— General. History ot General Anaesthetics. Physiological Action of Anaesthetics. Selection of the Anaesthetic. Preparation of the Patient. Accessory Appliances. Pharmacology. —Methods of administration, phenomena of anaesthesia, etc., of the foUowing:— Chloroform. Ether. ' Ethyl Chloride and its substitutes. Nitrous Oxide. Combinations of Nitrous Oxide. Analgesia. Dangers and difficulties of anaesthesia. Remedial Measures. DENTISTRY. '711

Local. . History of Local Anaesthesia. Preparation of the Patient. Methods ot obtaining Local Anaesthesia. Chemically Active Agents.—Cocaine, Novocaine, Supra­ renal Extract. Preparation ot Solutions—Isotonia, Sterility, Temper- • ature, Stability, Toxicity. Instrnmentarium. Disinfection of tbe field of operation. Technique ot Injection.—(a) mucous or infiltration method, (b) intra-alveolar method* (c) conductive method. Dangers of Local Anaesthetics. Note.—The above list is intended as a guide to stu­ dents and must not be taken as limiting the scope ot the lectures or the examinations. Students will be expected to recognise drugs which have well-marked characteristics. * Text books recommended:'— Modern Dental Materia Medica, Pharmacology and Therapeutics—Buckley, 4th Ed. Anaesthetics and their Administration—Hewitt.

SENlOB DENTAL MECHANICS— Senior Dental Mechanics embraces the exhaustive consideration of aU the higher branches of this subject, including the construction of dentures on metal bases in all their different forms. Methods of casting metals for dentures, crowns, bridges and inlays. Continuous gum dentures together with the elementary consideration of electricity in relation to dental electrical appliances, as the furnace, pyrometer, gold anneoler, lathe, etc. All the approved methods of Crown and Bridge Work. Mechanical treatment of Cleft Palates, including the various methods of constructing obturators and artificial vela. The treatment ot fractures of the jaws, including the making of inter-dental splints. 712 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

ORTHODONTICS (3rd Year)— Historical sketch. Consideration of former methods. -. Nomenclature and definitions. Materials used and technique of their manipulation. Norman occlusion and forces governing some. - The key to occlusion. , The lime of occlusion. Sizes, forms, interdigitating surfaces, and position of teeth in the arches. Facial harmony and balance. Malocclusion and forces governing same. Classification and* diagnosis according to Angle and Lischer. Etiology. •Prognosis and sequelae of malocclusion and benefits resulting from its correction. The Physiologoy of tooth movement. Anchorage and Dynamics. The most suitable age for treatment. . Possibilities and limitations, and the question of extraction. Management of cases, care-of the mouth, and filing of records. Impressions, Facial caste. Photographs. Selection of appliances and their correct adjustment. Treatment of Cases— Neutroclusion. Distoclusion. Mesioclusion. The principles of retention by classes. The relation of the orthodontist to the family - dentist.

ORTHODONTIC TECHNIQUE— , This course is a practical one, occupying one term, and includes the oonstrnction of the following appli­ ances:— Expansion arch. • < Jackscrew. Traction screw. . Plain bonds for central, lateral, cuspid' and bicuspid teeth. DENTISTRY. 713

. Various attachments for same. Retaining appliances. Sheath hooks, -spurs and soft soldering. One set of models, accurately carved and articulated according to Angle's principles. The work of this class will be taken into consideration by the Examiners in Orthodontics. MEDICINE- Infectious Diseases, Nature of Infection, Action of Con­ tagion in the recipient. Transmission ef Infec­ tious Diseases, Mixed Infections, Prevention of Infection,' Isolation, Disinfection, Immunity, Classification, Pyrexia—Registration of Tem­ perature, Varieties of Pyrexia, consideration of tbe leading features of Enteric Fever, Influenza, Tuberculosis, Acute Rheumatism, Pneumonia, Tetanus, Actinomycosis. Diseases of the Heart—Endocarditis, Pericarditis, Myo­ carditis, Chronic Valvular Disease of the Heart, Aortic Incompetency and Stenosis, Mitral Sten­ osis, Mitral Incompetency. Functional Affections of the Heart—Palpitation, Arryth- mia, Rapid Heart, Slow Heart, Angina Pectoris. Diseases of the Blood Vessels—Especially the arteries— Arterio-Sclerosis, 'JTioracic Aneurysm. Diseases of the Brain and Nervous System — Cerebral Haemorrhage, Epilepsy, Chorea, Migraine, Headache, Neuritis, Neuralgia, Infantile Con­ vulsions, Hysteria, Neurasthenia, Shock. 'I'he effects of Perfect and Imperfect Mastication. Diseases of the Blood—Especially primary and secondary anaemias. Diseases of the Stomach, Intestine and Liver—Especially . Dyspepsia and Constipation. Diseases of the Kidneys — Albuminuria, Haematnria, various forms of Bright's Disease. Diseases of the Thyroid Gland—Bronchocele, Exo- thalmic Goitre, Myxoedema. Morbid Conditions independent of Primary Disease of the Urinary Organs—Diabetes Mellitus. Chronic Intoxications—Especially Alcoholism, Lead and Mercurial Poisoning. - 714 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

Disorders of Nutrition—Mostly involving Bones and' Joints—Gout, Osteo-orthritis, and Rickets. Oral Sepsis and Asepsis. Regular Clinical Demonstrations on Medical Cases of special importance to tbe Dental Surgeon are given at the Melbourne Hospital.

Books recommended:— Practice of Medicine—Frederick Taylor. Principles and Practice of Medicine—Osier. Allbutt's System of Medicine.

ORAL SURGERY— 1. Surgical Anatomy, of the Mouth, Tongue, Jaws, Ac. 2. Surgical affections of the Lips, including congenital malformations. 8. Surgical Diseases in connection with the Teeth. 4. Tumours of the Upper and Lower Jaws. 5. Fractures and Dislocations of the Jaws. 6. Diseases ot the Antrum ot Highmore. 7. Diseases of the Salivary Glands. 8. Surgical affections of the Tongue and Lips. 9. Surgical affections ot the Tonsil. 10. Cleft Palate. 11. Post-nasal Growths.. 12. The method of controlling hemorrhage.of tbe Oral Cavity.. 18. The technique of Oral Operations and complications attending them. 14. Diseases of the Mouth. 15. Injuries of Oral Cavity. . 16. Complications occurring after operations about the month. 17. SyphUis in relation to Oral Cavity.

Tbe Demonstrations at the Melbourne Hospital will con­ sist of Clinical Instruction at the bedside on Oral Cases, and the attendance of the class at all operations in the Theatre connected with this subject. DENTISTRY. 715

DENTAL SURGERY AND PATHOLOGY (4th Year)— Pathological Dentition and Disorders associated with the process ot teething. Caries—the theories as to susceptibility, immunity and prevention. Injuries to the teeth arising from Trauma. Erosion, Attrition, and Abrasion. Periodontitis—its Pathology, Symptoms, and Treat­ ment of the various stages in sequence, from the early infection of the Pulp to Alveolar Abscess with its complications. Pyorrhoea Alvoolaris—its Etiology, Pathology, Bac­ teriology and Treatment. Diseases ot the Gams—Hypertrophy, Inflammation, Gingivitis. Odontomes—Epithelial, Composite, Connective Tissue. Odontalgia, and Diseases arising from Reflex Irrita­ tion from the Teeth, including Affections of .the Nervous System, Ear and Eye. Oral Sepsis—its local and general effects, modes of infection. Books recommended: — J. P. Colyer. G. V. Block, N. G. Bennett (last editions).

PRACTICAL BACTERIOLOGY (with special reference to Dentistry)— A. General Bacteriology— 1. Apparatus—Use and Sterilisation. 2. Nutrient Media—Preparation, Neutralisation, Steril­ isation, Standardisation. 8. Bacteriological Methods—Demonstration, Isolation, Identification of Specific Micro-organisms, Pare Cultures, Staining Methods, Spores, etc. 4. Pathogenic Bacteria—A study of tbe principal Micro­ organisms affecting human beings, with special reference to Pyogenic cocci, Diphtheria, Tubercle, Pneumonia, Typhoid, Colon, Anthrax. 6. Examination of Air and Water, .48 716 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

6. Methods of Sterilisation and Disinfection—Instru­ ments, etc. Action of Heat, Light and Dis­ infectants. B. Special Bacteriology— 1. Micro-organisms in healthy and diseased mouths. •Conditions influencing presence and multipli­ cation. Special Mouth Bacteria (Special Media)—Demon­ stration and Isolation. 2. Dental Caries—Aetiology—Action of Micro-organ­ isms, Acid production. Decalcification and Lique­ faction with Experiments, Preparation and Staining of microscopic sections. 3. Bacteriology of Inflammatory and Suppurative Con­ ditions of the Mouth.

* PRACTICAL REQUIREMENTS ^ Minimum Requirements for Second Tear Students.

OPERATIVE TECHNIQUE. Lectures and Demonstrations shall be given in Opera­ tive Technique, as follows: — (1) Sections Sections shall be shown in the natural teeth so as to demonstrate oatUne form, cusps, ridges, sulci, gingival line, roots, distribution of enamel, palp chamber, and contact points. - Sections shall be as follows: — (a) Incisors (Upper and Lower)— (IV transverse at gingival margin. (2) transverse half-way to apex. (3) longitudinal mesio-dtstally. (4) longitudinal labio-lingually. • (b) Bicuspids (Upper and Lower)— (1) transverse at gingival margin. 12) transverse half-way to apex. (3) longitudinal mesio-dietalfv. ' (4) longitudinal buoco-lingually. DENTISTRY. 717

(c) Molars (Upper)— (1) transverse at gingival margin. (2) transverse half-way to apex. (3) longitudinal bucoo-lingually; exposing pulp canals of the mesio-buccal and lingual roots. (4) longitudinal mesio-distally, exposing pulp canals of the two buccal roots. (d) Molars (Lower)— (1) .transverse at gingival margin. (2) transverse half-way to apex. (2) Preparatory operative technique' methods. - Mounting ot teeth. Instruments used. J Explanation of same. (3) Opening of Pulp Chambers. Use of barbed broaches. Use of smooth broaches. , Placing of dressings in canals; The sealing of'same with G.P. and cement. The filling of root canals. (4) General principles of cavity preparation. Excavation of cavities by classes, i.e.— (5) Beginning in pits and fissures. (6) Proximal surface in bicuspids and molars. (7) Cavities in Proximal Surface of cuspids' and in­ cisors not involving incisal. (8) Cavities in Proximal Surfaces of cuspids and in­ cisors involving-incisal. (9) .Cavities in the gingival third. <10) Cavities shall be prepared for inlays as follows:— 1) Proximo-occlusal tooth—molar or bicuspid. !2) Anterior tooth involving angle. {11) The use of filling materials: — (a) Gold (tin foil)— (1) Method of manipulating gold to form rolls and pellets or any other form that gold is used in in the operation of filling: (2) Method of inserting and condensing in various cavities in regard to the relative force and power required 'tor the various sized plugger points. I .48A 718 . DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

(b) Amalgam— Mixing—relative quantities of alloy and1 mercury. (c) Cements— Mixing—for filling purposes and lining- cavities, etc. (d) Gutta-percha. (12) Finishing fillings. (13) Use of filling materials and their insertion.

Practical Requirements. Eaoh student must attend 30 Demonstrations ID Operative Technique and make and complete: — (a) Boot Canal FiUings— l) Two upper molars. 2) One lower molar. 3) One upper first and second bicuspid. 4) One anterior—upper. i5) One anterior—lower. (b) Boot Canal Treatments— Two dressings in root canals and sealing ID the same with G.P. and cement. (c) Amalgam Fillings— 1)'Approximo-occlusal in a molar. !2) Approximo-occlusal in a bicuspid. (3) .One occlusal cavity' showing restoration of cusp or cusps. (4) One gingival third. (d) Cement FiUings— One Synthetic filling. (e) Tin FiUings— Three tin fillings— (a) approximo-occlusal. (b) gingival third. (c) approximo-incisal cavity. Three fillings in dummy head— Igold. 1 synthetic. 1 amalgam. All teeth to be mounted on plaster blocks. DENTISTRY. 719

SECOND YEAR VULCANITE CLASS. Requirements. In addition to certain technique work, each student will be required to make: — 1 cost metal impression tray. 1 Full Upper and Lower Denture (for the mouth) on the ISymplex Gysi Articulator. 1 Partial Upper Denture with bands (out ot the mouth). Minimum Requirements for Third Tear Students. (a) Students must attend the extracting surgery on the days allotted to them, for the purpose of extracting, and administering anaesthetics. Each third year student must complete in each term:— 26. anaesthetics (10 local, 15 general). 36 amalgam fillings. 10 gold flUings. 10 scaling cases. During the three terms 60 root fillings to be done. (b) Each student must complete and adjust to a patient's mouth 2 dentures on vulcanite base, e.g., 1 full upper and lower denture and 1 full upper or 1 full lower denture—giving preference to plaster impressions and mounting gum block teeth— constructed wholly by himself in the Hospital under the supervision of the Instructor in Dental Mechanics. I ' All work mast be signed up by the Prosthetic Demon­ strator at each stage and on completion. ,

Crown and Bridge Technique Class. The use of the file. Filing fiat surfaces. Approximating of flat surfaces. Filing cubes, etc. Grinding porcelain facings to flat surfaces. Technique ot soldering, sweating and investing. Root preparation. . 720- DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

Band making and contouring. Carving cusps. Fittings cusps and backings to facings. Construction of tubes. - Construction of split pins and fitting same to tubes. Construction of various types ot crowns. -Construction of dummies (porcelain faced and all- - gold). Construction of saddles. Assembling of abutment pieces and dummies. Repairing crowns and bridges. In addition to the above requirements the .student shall construct two cast inlays in cavities already pre­ pared in the 2nd year Operative Technique Class.

Aftnimum Requirements for Fourth Tear Students. (a) Studente must attend the extracting surgery on the days allotted to them, for the purpose of extracting, and administering anaesthetics. Each fourth year student must complete in each term te- the satisfaction of the Honorary Dental Surgeons and the Superintendent of the Melbourne Dental Hospital.— .30 anaesthetics (10 local, 20 general). 25 amalgam fillings. 20 gold fillings. 10 scaling coses. 4 inlays. • 3 crowns. During the three terms 40 root fillings te be inserted. (b) The student must construct .and complete to the satisfaction of tbe Honorary Djental Surgeons and the Superintendent of the Dental Hospital:— 1 case of bridge work, with a minimum of three teeth. Each and all of the above to be done wholly by himself in the Hospital under the supervision of the Demonstrator -or Superintendent. All work must be signed up by the Honorary Dental Surgeons or Demonstrators at each stage and on completion. (c) Minimum requirements of the Fourth Year Course of practical laboratory work in Dental Mechanics:— DENTISTRY. Z21

6 Metal Dentures— (a) 1 -partial upper. (b) 1 partial lower, with turned or beaded rim. (c) 1 partial upper with tube teeth: (d) 1 partial upper with turned rim with single gum block with a minimum ot 6 teeth. . (e) I cast metal denture for the mouth. Also 1 full upper and lower denture with gum block teeth mounted on vulcanite or metal base, from plaster impressions taken by the student, com­ pleted and adjusted to a patient's month, con­ structed whoUy by himself in the Hospital under the supervision of the Instructor in Dental Mechanics. The treatment ot one case of malocclusion. The student must also in both the Second and Third Terms complete to the satisfaction of the Demonstrators in Graduation FiUings:— 2 gold fillings, 3 amalgams, 2 cement. Gold fillings to be an approximo-occlusal cavity in either bicuspid or molar, and an approx- imal cavity, including restoration of incisal angle in an incisor tooth, or a distal cavity in a cuspid tooth. Amalgam fillings—Compound cavities. , The Fourth Year Class work wUl foe taken into account by the Examiners in Practical Dental Mechanics. • All work in each year is subject to inspection by the Examiners. 722 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1920.

FOURTH YEAR CROWN AND BRIDGE CLASS.

REQUIREMENTS. A six-tooth bridge.

DENTAL MECHANICS. ADDITIONAL PRACTICAL REQUIREMENTS IN LABORATORY FOB STUDENTS INDENTURED TO THE COLLEOE. All this work shall be done under the direct supervision of the Demonstrator, and in ust be sigaed-ap by him at each . stage. A During the First Year (a) During the first three months each student shall - attend a class in Introductory Practical Dental Mechanics, to be conducted by the Prosthetic Demonstrator, and shall perform such opera­ tions as the Demonstrator requires, (b) Construct a minimum of twenty dentures on vul­ canite base, and thirty repairs, (c) Make as an introduction to metal work, six impres­ sion trays in German Silver.

During the Second Year (a) Each student shall construct, and adjust to the , mouth— 36 Dentures on Vulcanite base. 16 Repairs. (b) Each student shall construct, out of the mouth— . 1 Partial Upper Plate in metal, with bands. 1 Partial Lower Plate in metal, with bands. During the Third Year (a) Each student shall construct and adjust to the mouth— DENTISTRY. 723

10 Dentures on Vulcanite base. Prefer­ ence to be given to gum-block work and to work done on an anatomical • articulator. (b) Each student shall construct, out ot the month— 3 Metal dentures, one of which shall be a partial lower with beaded rim.

* During the Fourth Year Each student shall moke at least four full upper and lower dentures fitted to the mouth on vulcanite base. Pre­ ference to be given to gum block work and to work done on an anatomical articulator. 724 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1921.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOE THE EXAMINATIONS FOB THE DEGREE OP DOCTOR OP DENTAL SCIENCE. TO BE HELP IN MARCH, 1921.

1. ST/BOICAL PATHOLOGY. Practical and Theoretical. A knowledge ot the Pathology of the following condi­ tions will be required;— • Inflammation and Immunity, Septicaemia, Pyaemia, Syphilis, Tubercle, Tumors, Cysts, Disease of Bone and Joints, Diseases of Mouth Nose Ear and accessory sinuses, Diseases of Pharynx Larynx Trachea and Lungs, Diseases of Heart and .Blood Vessels, Kidneys. Books of Reference:— ' i Green—Pathology and Morbid Anatomy. Adami—Inflammation. Bowlby—Surgical Pathology. The examination will include examinations of macro­ scopic and microscopic specimens.

2. BACTERIOLOGY, Practical and Theoretical. Bacteriological Technique. Apparatus. Nature and properties of Bacteria. Staining Methods. Fermentation, Putrefaction and Disease. Bac­ teriology and Diagnosis of Infectious Diseases. Methods of infection and prevention. Germ Carriers. Antigens and anti-bodies, and the more important serum re-actions in the diag­ nosis of infectious diseases. Agglutinins and the Widal re-action. Precipitins. Comple­ ment, Immune body. Haemolysis and Bac-' teriolysis. "Complement deviation and the Wasserman reaction. Toxin's and anti-toxins and their standardisation. Vaccines and Vac- cina'tion. Manufacture, and standardisation of vaccines. Dental Bacteriology, with special reference to dental caries and pyorrhoea alveolaris. Disinfection. Various Methods ot. Antiseptics and disinfectants. Resistance of micro-organisms to heat and disinfectants. DENTISTRY. , 725

Books of Reference:— Mycology of the Mouth—K. Goadby. M.B.C.S., L.D.S. Manual of Bacteriology — Mnir and Ritchie, 6th Edition. University Laboratory Hand-book, Practical Bacteriology—R. J. Bull.

3. OPERATIVE DENTAL SUROEBT. All Surgical Operations met with in daily practice. Books of Reference :— Operative Dentistry, edited by C. N. Johnson,- (latest Edition). [ The Science and Practice of Dental Surgery by Norman D. Bennett Operative Dentistry by G. V. Black. Current dental literature.

4. DENTAL MECHANICS. The;candidates must have:— (a) A clear conception of the best methods of correcting and restoring the partial or complete loss of the organs of mastication and speech from the stand­ point of both durability and aesthetic require­ ments. (b) An intimate knowledge ot the physical and chemi­ cal properties and peculiarities of the various materials employed. (c) Knowledge of current dental literature upon the subject of dental mechanics. The details include:— . The treatment of the mouth preparatory to the inser­ tion of artifical dentures. - The materials, appliances and methods employed in taking impressions of the mouth. The preparation of models, dies, and counter dies. The choice of material and type of denture. Articulation, selection and arrangement of teeth. Vulcanite, construction of dentures in vulcanite. 726 . DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1921.

Repairing dentures. The retention of dentures. The construction of metalUo dentures in all their different forms. Methods of casting metals for dentures, crowns, bridges and inlays. Continuous gum dentures. All the approved methods of crown and bridge work. . The mechanical treatment of cleft palates; including tbe various methods of constructing obturators and artificial vela. The treatment of fractures of the jaws, including the making of interdental splints. Books of Reference:— • The American Text Book of Prosthetic Dentistry, edited by Chas. Turner (last edition). Current periodical dental literature.

6. DENTAL SUBSEBT, PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY. Orthodontics and study of development of the maxilla and mandible with special reference to the - etiology of malformations. Month breathing—its local and general effects. De­ fective formation of the teeth. Injuries of the teeth. Caries, clinical and pathological conditions, theories of susceptibility and im­ munity. Erosion, attrition and abrasion. Diseases of the pulp. Diseases ot the perio­ dontal membrane. Alveolar abscess. Root in­ fection and treatment. SaUva, composition and properties, pathological conditions, relation to caries, etc. Salivary Calculi. Diseases ot the gums. Odontomes. Odontalgia and Neural­ gia. After effects of extraction, haemorrhage, difficulties, complications. Oral sepsis and diseases arising therefrom. Prophylaxis. Sup­ puration in Antrum, diagnosis, etc. Fractures, and dislocation of the jaw. Necrosis of the jaws. Cysts, tumours of the lows. Diagnosis of swellings about the jaws. Interference with closure of the jaw. Local Anaesthesia com­ plications, etc. Principles of general path­ ology as applied to dental pathology. The DENTISTRY. 727

remote and direct relations of dental to general disease. Pathology of nutrition, atro­ phy, degeneration, hypertrophy, with special reference to such diseases as those associated with dentiton, pyorrhoea alveoloris, pulpitis, gingivitis, etc. Disturbances of vascular .sys­ tem and infective inflammations, with special reference to alveolar abscess and disease affect­ ing the periodontal mebrane, etc. Dental Bacteriology, special reference to pathogenic micro-organisms in such dental and oral dis­ eases as caries, pyorrhoea alveoloris, oral sepsis, etc., etc., vaccines and serum therapy. Books of Reference: Dental Surgery and Pathology, by J. P. Colyer (last edition). American Text Book of Operative Dentistry, by Edward C. Kirk. 'I'he'Science and Practice of Dental Surgery (ed­ ited by Norman Bennett. Current periodical dental literature.

6. DENTAL MATERIA MEDICA AND THERAPEUTICS. Drugs and Remedies. A general knowledge of those used in dental pathology. Dental Anaesthetics, Local and General. Prescription Writing, using Metric and Imperial weights and measures. Candidates wiU be required to possess a knowledge of the principles underlying methods ot treatment recom­ mended in current dental literature. Books ot Reference:— Dental Materia Medica—Gabell and Austin. Dental Materia Medica Therapeutics, and Pre­ scription Writing—Long. Anaesthetics and their Administration—Hewitt. Local Anaesthesia—Fischer. Current periodical dental literature. The examinations wUl be partly written, partly practical, partly oral. 738 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

MUSIC. • DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS • FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1920, AND FIRST TERM, 1921. •

DIPLOMA IN MUSIC. FIRST YEAR. , MUSICAL TERMINOLOGY, FORM, HISTORY AND LITERATURE— A thorough' knowledge ot all the details of musical notation. - A general knowledge ot the prin­ cipal musical Terms, illustrated chiefly from Bach's suites and fugues, Handel's oratorios, Haydn, Mozart and Beethoven senates, Schu­ bert songs. Historical survey of the art up to 1600. General musical knowledge as dealt with in the Director's class. N.B-.—Candidates must show a detailed knowledge'of such works as may be prescribed during, tbe year, and shall submit a list of works in which they are prepared to be examined to the Ormond Professor, not later than the last day of the (3rd), third term. EAB TESTS AND SIGHT BEADING (Including Sol­ feggio)— - Pitch.—All Intervals, Chords major arid' minor, Dominant Sevenths, Diminished Seventh, in root position and in inversion. Bhythm.—Any combination of species of note up to semiquavers, including dotted notes. - Sight Beading.—The standard required as per Grade II. of the Examination Board. HARMONY. SCHOOL'S A AND C. • ' General- knowledge of Chords, -'Suspensions, etc.", laws governing Part Writing, Figured and1 Un- MUSIC. 729

figured Basses. Hormonisation • ot melodies, in 3 and 4 parts, chiefly diatonic; Harmonic analysis of passages, writing short passages in which modulations to near related keys are • made. Writing passages of simple original Harmony, preferably in choral style or simi­ lar vocal style. Practical harmony at the pianoforte will also be required.

. SCHOOL B. Common Chords and Triads in the Diatonic Scales with their inversions in the simplest form. Chord of the Domi­ nant Seventh and its inversions. I'he simplest forms of Cadences—perfect, imperfect, and interrupted—including those called Authentic and Plagal. Figuring the Bass of a given passage and correcting errors in simple four-part writing. Adding three parts about a figured boss, using the Chords referred to above. Harmonisation of a simple melody. COUNTERPOINT, (for Schools A and C)— A general understanding of the first principles of counterpoint will be required, with examples in two parts in strict and free styles, also three part counterpoint with one moving part (strict and free). N.B.—By " strict" is meant the style in Gladstone's "strict counterpoint"; and by "free" is meant .the style seen in the Chorales, Fugues, and other works ot Bach. MODERN LANGUAGES (For School B)— ENGLISH DICTION— Thorough knowledge "of the different classes of vowels and their pronunciation. Exercises for perfecting distinct enunciation, illustration and treatment of faults in articulation. ITALIAN (Musio Course), PART I. Tbe first part of Sauer's Italian Conversation Gram­ mar. Reading and Dictation. Simple translation. 730 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS; 1920.

CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES— Studies and works as prescribed during the year, including a "work" set by the Ormond Pro­ fessor one month before the date of the prac­ tical exam., in the subject of the Chief Study, which must be prepared unaided and pre­ sented at the Examination. Books Recommended for Reference— Ear Training—Shinn, Sawyer. Harmony—Bridge and Sawyer; Mocpherson (with appendix). (a) Introduction to> Theory (b) Handbook on Form I Franklin. Peterson. (c) Handbook of M usical Knowledge • History of Music—Naumann, Biemann, Pratt. Summary ot Musical History—Hubert Parry. Dictionary—Grove.

SECOND AND THIRD YEARS. As tor First and Second Years ot Mus. Bac. Course. MUSIC. 73 J

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS- FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE. . HELD IN THE FOURTH TEEM, 1920, AND- FIRST TERM, 1921.

BACHELOR OF MUSIC. FIRST YEAR. HARMONY— SCHOOLS A AND C. Writing passages iu which modulation to unrelatedi keys are made, making a draftv of the essen­ tial harmony underlying a passage taken from ' an instrumental work (of moderate complexity).1. Writing short passages of original harmony in either vocal or instrumental style. Prac­ tical harmony at the pianoforte' will also be- required, i.e., the harmonisation of a melody at sight' at the pianoforte, and the adding; of parte of a Figured Bass HARMONY (School B) — As prescribed for Schools A and C for 1st year Diploma. COUNTERPOINT (for Schools A and C)— ' Strict—Combined Counterpoint in three parts (all- species); four part Counterpoint with one- moving part. Free—Specimens of choral and instrumental writing,, illustrating in a simple form the main features' of the School of Falestrina. MODERN LANGUAGES (for School B)—. ENGLISH DICTION— Thorough knowledge of all consonant and vowel' sounds, and their classification, .pronuncia­ tion, accent and emphasis. Beading of English) prose and poetry of moderate difficulty at sight. .49 732 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

. ITALIAN (Music Course), PART II. The second part of Sauer's Italian Conversation Gram­ mar. Reading and Dictation. Translation. Com-' position. Conversation, and either FR'ENCH (Music Course), PART I. or ' GERMAN (Music Course), PART I. -.

FORM AND ANALYSIS— Thorough knowledge of the classic musical forms and of the principles underlying all form. , , ' Analysis (technical and poetical) of such as the following works and such others as may be prescribed during the year: — Bach's Preludes and Fugues. t Corelli, Bach, Vivaldi, Tartini, Nardini, Leclair— Old Violin Sonatas. - Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven—Sonatas. Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven—Symphonies. Handel, Gluck, Mozart, Beethoven—Overtures. Schubert, Schumann, Brahms—Songs. Chamber Music.—Pianoforte and Violin Sonatas, T/ios. Quartettes (string, and pianoforte and strings), by Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, etc.

HISTORY. LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS OF MUSIC— History of the progress of the art from the begin­ ning of the Christian era to the end of the Beethoven period, including the rise and gene­ ral development to that,.time of the Sonata, Overture. Symphony, Song, and Opera. . N.B.—Candidates must show a detailed knowledge of such works, as may be prescribed during the year, and shall submit a list of works in which they are prepared to be examined to the Ormond Professor, not later than' the last day of the (3rd) third term. MUSIC. 733

CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES— Studies and works • as prescribed during the year, including a work set by the Ormond Professor one month before the date ot the practical examination, in the subject of tbe Chief Study, which must be prepared unaided and presented at the examination. Books recommended for reference- Harmony—Macphereon .(with appendix). Bridge and Sawyer. Counterpoint—Cherubini, Prout, Kidston, Glad­ stone. Fugue—Prout. Musical Form—Prout. History of Music—Parry's "Summary," Parry's The Art of Music, " The Oxford," Riemann, Naumann, Pratt. v. Aesthetics—Fauer, MacDowell, Spencer's " Origin and Function of Music."

SEOOND YEAR. HABMONY (for Schools A and C)— Harmonic analysis of modern works. Harmonisa- tion of melodies. Ground- Bass. Writing pas- * sages of original .harmony in either vocal or instrumental style. Writing simple instru­ mental accompaniment to a given melody. Practical barmony at the pianoforte.

COUNTERPOINT AND FUGUE (for Schools A and O)— Strict—Four-part writing (a) with one moving port, (b) with three florid parts: ( Free—Simple specimens of double counterpoint— contrapuntal writing on a choral or an in­ strumental prelude, showing tbe use of de­ signed figure work. Fugue—The general laws of (a) Subject and answer, (b) Exposition, .(c) Episode, (d) Stretto.

.49A 734 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 192

MODERN LANGUAGES (for School B)— ITALIAN (Music Course). PART III. Literature and History. Translation. Compo­ sition. Conversation. Reading and translating at sight. and either FRENCH (Music Course). PART II. or GERMAN (Music Course), PART IL.

FORM AND ANALYSIS AND INSTRUMENTATION— All musical forms used by the great masters. Can­ didates must show a detailed knowledge of such ot tbe following works as may be prescribed during the year. . Sonatas—Beethoven—Op. 31, No. 1.' 2. 3; Op. 53, 57, 81a, 110, 111. Chopin—B flat minor. Schumann—F sharp minor: Brahms—F minor. Symphonies—Haydn— The Surprise, The Clock^. Mozart—The Jupiter, G minor and E flat. Beethoven—No. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9. Schubert—in B minor and C major. Overtures—Handel—Messiah. Mozart—Figaro, Magic Flute, • and Don- Giovanni. Beethoven—Egjnont, Leonora No. HI. Weber—Der Freischiitz, Oberqn, Eur- yante. Wagner—All operas and inusie dramasv Tschaikowsky—1812.-. Brahms—" Academic." Elgar—In the Soutbv MUSIC. 735

Operas—Pnxeell—Dido and . Aeneas. , iGlucft—Orpheus, Iphigenia. Mozart—Don Giovanni, Figaro, Magic Flute. Beethoven—" Fidelio." Weber—Der Freischiitz. Verdi—" Othello," Aida. " Wagner—Flying Dutchman, Tannhauser, Lohengrin, Tristan, Mastersingers, The Nibelungen Ring,-Parsifal. Songs—Schubert. Schumann. Brahms. Tschaikowsky. Rubinstein. Grieg. Masses—Bach—B minor, St. Matthew Passion. Beethoven—D Major. Chamber Music—String Quartettes' of Haydn, • Mozart, Beethoven. Pianoforte Quartettes ot Mozart, Schumann, Brahms. Pianoforte -Trios qf Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, Schubert, Schumann, Brahms, Arensky. Pianoforte and Violin Sonatas— . Beethoven, Brahms, Franck, Grieg. HISTORY, LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS— History of the art from the Beethoven period to the present time, including the development of the following special subjects: — The orchestra, overture, symphony, song, sonata, opera, •music drama. N.B—Candidates shall submit a list of works, in which they are prepared to be examined, to the Ormond Professor, not later than the last day of the third term. CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES— Studies and works as prescribed during the year. In. eluding a work set by the Ormond Professor, one month 736 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1020. before the date of the practical examination, in the subject of the Chief Study, which must be prepared unaided and presented at the examination.

THIRD YEAR. HARMONY (for Schools A and C)— 1. Harmonisation' of melody in five vocal parts. 2. Harmonisation in four instrumental parts (sucb as a string quartette), the given part not necessarily being confined to either the upper or lower part. 3. (a) Expansion or development of a given har­ monic phrase, or alternatively :— (b) The oddition to a given melody of a free accompaniment; or (c) The setting to music of given words in the- style of a part song or a madrigal. • N.B If the Candidate choose the latter alternative, interesting treatment of the vocal parts, together with resourceful handling of the harmony, will be expected of him. 4. Some acquaintance with modern harmonic ten­ dencies. COUNTERPOINT, CANON, AND FUGUE (for School* A and C)— Free—(a) Specimens of double counterpoint. (b) Contrapuntal writing in four parts as a > choral or instrumental subject, showing the use of designed figure work. (c) Short canon in four parts in the octave. (d) Complete fugue, either vocal or instru­ mental, in four ports. MODERN LANGUAGES (for School B)— ITALIAN (Music Course), PART IV. FRENCH (Music Course), PART III. or' GERMAN (Music Course), PART HI. MUSIC. 737

INSTRUMENTATION AND ORCHESTRATION. PLAY­ ING ON THE PIANOFORTE FKOM FULL SCORE (for Schools A and C)— (a) The nature and compass of the various instru­ ments, and their treatment, as found in the- scores of the chief composers. (b) The history of orchestration up to the present time. (c) A critical knowledge of the instrumentation of compositions as prescribed during tbe year, including all Wagner's operas. (d) To score'for full orchestra a given work; for. example, a song or a movement of a pianoforte- sonata.

HISTORY. LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS— Candidates must show familiarity with the chief works, vocal (including choral), instrumental (including orchestral and chamber, music) of the foUowing composers: — Bach, Handel, Haydn, Gl uck, Mozart, Beethoven, Weber Schubert, Schumann, Ohopin, Mendelssohn, Brahms, Grieg, Verdi, Tschaikowsky, Rubin­ stein, Wolff, Wagner, Strauss, Elgar, Puccini. Franck, Debussy, Dvorak.' Candidates shall, according to their special branch) of study, submit to the Ormond Professor, not. later than the last day of the third term, a list of works which must comprise various; schools ot composition, in which they are pre­ pared to be examined.

COMPOSITION. DOUBLE COUNTERPOINT, CANON AND FUGUE (for School C) School C(a) and (b)— Double Counterpoint, Canon and Fugue— Free—(a) Specimens of Double Counterpoint, Nos. 9. 10, 11, 12, 13, 14. 738 DETAILS OF SUBJECT'S, 1920.

(b) Specimens of various, formf of Canon, in­ cluding examples in augmentation and diminution. (c) General knowledge ot the principles govern-. ing Triple and Quadruple Counterpoint. (d) Complete Fugue, either Choral or Orchestral. :Sohool C(a)— •Composition— ' Candidates must present an original composition which may be any one of the foUowing:— 1, A symphonic movement. 2, An overture. 3, A choral and orchestral work. iSchool C(b)— A thorough knowledge of aU the laws governing harmonic and contrapuntal writing, including movements in sonata and fagal forms. Sound knowledge ot the chief harmonic and contra­ puntal writings. Demonstrations of teaching the various branches. rSbhool C(o)— Thorough knowledge of the various schools of com­ position and styles in vocal and instrumental performances. Sound knowledge of the chief critical essays on musical subjects.. Critical essays on subjecte submitted, and perform­ ances of vocal and instrumental works, arranged by the Ormond Professor.

(PRACTICAL STUDY— Instrumental—(a) Concert Soloist. Candidates must submit a full concert programme, including one work at least of the foUowing composers, for example: — Pianoforte—Bach, Beethoven, Chopin, Schumann, Brahms, Debussy, or Bavel. Tiolin—Bach, Beethoven, Vienxtemps, Spohr, Brahms. MUSIC. 739

ENGLISH, PART I.^-(for School C(c) )- See under Arts. PSYCHOLOGY, LOGIC AND ETHICS (for School C(c) )— See under Arts. 740 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

PRIZES AND SCHOLARSHIPS.

SHAKESPEARE SCHOLARSHIP. Not open till 1922.

BOWEN PRIZE.

/ SUBJECT FOB MABCH, 1920. The Development of the Constitution of the British Empire- since the beginning of the Great War.

PROFESSOR MORRIS PRIZE. SUBJECT FOB MABCH, 1920. The Development ot the English Sonnet.

THE WYSELASKIE SCHOLARSHIPS.

)'. MATHEMATICS— (1) The higher parts ot Dynamics. (2) Hydrodynamics. (3) Conduction of Heat. (4) Mathematical theory of Electricity and Mag- . netism.

2. NATURAL SCIENCE— (1) Geplogy, Palaeontology and Mineralogy. (2) Chemistry, with Laboratory work. (3) Zoology, with Laboratory work. (4) Botany, with Laboratory work. ., . The Examination in the foregoing groups will cover the ground of tbe following University Courses.— (1) Geology, Parts I., II., and III., with Laboratory and Field work. (2) Chemistry, Parts I., II., and III., with Labora­ tory work. , SCHOLARSHIPS, ETC. 741'

(3) Zoology, Parts I., IL, and III., with Laboratory work. (4) Botany, Fart I., II.. and III, with Laboratory- work. The Examination for the next Wyselaskie Scholarship in Natural Science (March. 1920) will be in Group (4) of tbe subjects above set out; the next, following, in Group - (1) ; the next following, in Group (2); the next following- in group (3) and so on, in rotation, at subsequent Examina­ tions.

3. ENGLISH CONSTITUTIONAL HIBTOBJ— The University Course in History of the British Empire Part I., in History of the British Empire Part II., and in Modern Political Institutions (a) and (b), as prescribed for the- Final Examination.

4 POLITICAL ECONOMY— (1) The .University Course in Political Economy. (2) The Practical Applications of Political Economy.. (3) The History of Commercial Legislation in Great Britain. (4) The History of Industry. (5) The History of Industrial Legislation in Great - < Britain and Australasia; (6) The Commercial and Industrial position of and-. in Australasia.

6. MODERN LANGUAGES— (1) English. • (2) French. (3) German. The Examination for the next Wyselaskie Scholarship in < Modern Languages (March, 1920) wiU be in French, the next following in German, the next foUowing in English, and so on in rotation. The papers set in the Examination wUl. be, tor English, the same papers as those set in tbe Final Honour School of' English in the same term; for French, the papers set in 7742 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1920.

French in the Final Honour School ot which French is a ipart; tor German, the papers set in German in the Final Honour School of which German is a part. Candidates will also present, an Essay on some subject .-connected with the examination; the subject will be pres­ cribed before the end of the first term in the year immedi­ ately preceding the examination. Subject— - Be Theatre et la Poesie lyrique de V. Hugo an XlXe. Siecle.

•45. CLASSICAL AND COMPARATIVE PHILOLOOT AND LOGIC— (1) Passages for translation from any Greek or Latin .authors. (2) Passages of English for translation into Greek and Latin prose and verse. (3) -Questions on the Phonology, Morphology and Grammar of Greek and Latin in particular. (4) General questions on the outlines of Greek and Roman history, antiquities, and geography. (5) The University. Course in Formal Logic. (6) The University Course in Advanced Logic for the ordinary degree.

THE W. T. MOLLISON SCHOLARSHIPS. a. FRENCH— Dictation, Beading and Conversation. A thorough knowledge of phonetics and French Grammar. Advanced Composition and Unseen Translation. Essay in French on a historical and literary sub­ ject. ' A sound knowledge of French History XVUth and XlXth century), Lavisse's Histoire de France is recommended. A sound knowledge of the following periods of French Literature:— ^ (a) La Tragedie et la Cbmedie classiquee au Xvile Siecle. -

2. ITALIAN— (1) Dictation, Reading and Conversation. (2) Composition and Essay Writing in Italian. (3) Translation from Englisb into Italian and vice- versa. (4) Italian Grammar. - (5) History of Italian Literature. Recommended:— Gamett—Italian Literature. (6) History of Italy, from 1815 to tbe present day., Recommended:— Orsi—L'ltalia Moderna.

3. JAPANESE— m (1) The elements of Grammar as contained in the- first part of Chamberlain's Handbook of Colloquial Japanese. (2) Translation of simple English sentences on the ordinary events of daily life into Colloquial' Japanese (Roman Characters). (3) Literal translation of any portion of the prac­ tical part of Chamberlain's Handbook of Colloquial Japanese contained in sections < 445-457 (inclusive). (4) Translation of simple sentences in Colloquial. Japanese in Roman Characters not contained in Chamberlain's' Handbook. (5) An oral test of fluency in speaking Japanese- confined to simple sentences on matters of daily life.

4. HINDUSTANI— 1. Knowledge of the Elementary Rules of Gram­ mar as contained in Section 1, Forbes'' 'Hindustani Manual (1917 Edition). 2. Knowledge of Elementary Syntax and of Idioms in general use as contained in Sec­ tion II., Forbes' Hindustani Manual. 3. Translation of simple English sentences into- Hindustani (Boman Characters) and vice versa. T744 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1920.

4. Transliteration of words in Roman Character into the Persian or Nagari Character. 5. An oral test of fluency in speaking Hindustani confined to simple sentences of daily life.

JESSIE LEGGATT SCHOLARSHIP.. This Scholarship is open tor competition in 1921. The work for the Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing and tbe Law of Contract and Personal Property will be .found in the details for Honours prescribed by the Faculty -of Law. Jn Roman Law, candidates should read Gibbon's Decline .and FaU of the Roman Empire, chapter XLIV.

THE H. B. HIGGINS SCHOLARSHIP.. ft919. Group A. (1) Tbe books of Greek and Latin Poetry set for First Year in 1916, for Second Year in 1917,. and for Third Year in 1918.

(2) Special books of EngUsh Poetry. (a) Chaucer—The Prologue to the Canterbury Tales. The Knight's Tale. (b) Dryden—Absalom and Achitophel. (c) Keats—Lamia, Isabella, Eve ot St. Agnes, The Odes, Hyperion (first draft). J920. Group B. The books of. French and German Poetry set for Pass and Honours for First Year in 1917, for Second Year in 1918, and for Third Year in 1919. Tbe books of English Poetry set for Pass for Part I., 1918, and Part II., 1919 (excluding Shakespeare's Plays except Mac­ beth). SCHOLARSHIPS, ETC. 745

THE COBDEN CLUB MEDAL. , ' The Examination shall be open to all Students who are -eligible to compete for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Political Economy. The Examination shall be the Examination for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Political Economy. If the Scholarship be awarded, the Medal shall be given to the Candidate who is placed second in'order of merit; but if the Scholarship be not awarded, the" Medal shall be given to the Candidate who is placed first in order of merit. Provided that if in any year there be no Examination for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Political Economy, the •Cobden Club Medal shall be awarded to the Candidate who obtains the highest marks in Political Economy at ithe Final Honour Examination in the School of History.

By order of the Professorial Board, '

' W. A. OSBORNE, President. 2ith May, 1919. 746 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOB 1920:

ANNOUNCEMENTS-

TERM EXAMINATIONS, 1920. In accordance with the provisions of Regulation III., Division I., Section 4, Term Examinations in substitution for the December Annual Examinations will* be held in 1920 in the foUowing subjects:— - (1) All subjects for Degrees in Engineering and for the Diplomas ot Mining and Metallurgy . with the exception of Pure and Mixed Mathe­ matics, Natural Philosophy, Chemistry, Geology, Surveying, and the subjects confined to the Final Years of courses for Engineering degrees, ex­ cepting Electrical Engineering, Fart I. (2) .Geometrical Drawing, Graphics, Mathematics, Strength and Elasticity of Materials, and •Elementary Surveying in the coarse for the- Diploma of Architecture.

. EVENING LECTURES, 1920. It is proposed to hold Evening Lectures at the University in 1920,. in the following subjects:— Natural Philosophy, Part I., French, Part II. with Laboratory Work.. German, Part 1. Chemistry (Diploma of Archi- British History, Part I. tecture). Ancient History. Pure Mathematics,. Part I. European History. Mixed Mathematics, Part I. History of Philosophy. Psychology,' Logic and Ethics. 'Advanced Ethics (1921), "Latin, Part I. . "Advanced Logic (1920). Greek, Part I. , English, Part II. English, Part I. Architecture. Education. Surveying. French, Fart I. Japanese. Certain ot these are held between 4 p.m. and 6 p.m., and are the ordinary lectures in the subject. Those held after 6 o'clock are for the most part tor Pass only. * The course in these subjects will be given in alternate yean. ANNOUNCEMENTS FOB 1MB. 747

The tees will be the some as for ordinary lectures; Entry for evening lectures, must be made on special1 forms, obtainable at the Registrar's Office, on or before Saturday, 6th March, 1920. Fees must be paid into- the University account at the Bank of Victoria not later than Saturday, 6th March: they may be paid by the term or by the year. Lectures begin on Monday, 22nd March. No lectures wiU be given in any subject unless the- number of entries is satisfactory. Students desiring Evening Lectures in any other subjects are requested to communicate with the Registrar,

CONCESSIONS TO STUDENTS ENGAGED IN WOEK DUBINO TBE DAT. The arrangement formerly known as the Two Subjects- concession is no longer necessary in tbe courses for Arts, -Education, Science, and Laws. Candidates in these courses- are entitled to retain credit for-passes in one or two sub­ jects without previously obtaining special permission. In the Engineering courses students who show that they are engaged in the full and regular work of a calling or profession may, with the permission of the Faculty pre­ viously obtained, have the course modified so as to reduce- the work to be done each. year. Applications for per­ mission must be made before the end of the First Term, and must state the subjects which it is proposed to take, and must be accompanied by a full statement of tbe work in which tbe student is engaged and the hours during- which he is occupied-; the-statement should besigned by the employer.

MASSAGE STUDENTS. Lectures and Demonstrations in Anatomy and Physiology specially adapted for Massage Students are provided as- follows:— First Year—Junior Anatomy, Physiology. Second Year—Senior Anatomy. 748- ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1920.

The Pees are as follows.—. First-Year — Lectures;. Junior Anatomy - £% . 8 b Dissections; Practical Anatomy 4 4 0 Lectures: Physiology - - 4 4 0' Examination (each subject) - 2 2 O

Second Year—Lectures : Senior Anatomy - 8 8 0 Dissections: Practical Anatomy 4 4 0 Examination • • 2 2 0

PUBLIC EXAMINATIONS.

EXHIBITIONS AND PBIZES. The following Exhibitions will be open for competition At the School Leaving Examination to be held in December, 1920, viz.:— Twenty-three Exhibitions of J£20 each, one in each ot the twenty-three subjects of the School Leaving Exam­ ination. Candidates mast be under 19 yean ot age, and must be classed ID two subjects, and most pats or have passed toe examination as a whole. List of Scholarships and Exhibitions on Special Foundations, Showing Date at which next open for Competition. oo Argus (£60) CivU Engineering - Annual - First Term, 1920 « Jj; Bage Memoria (£40) Engineering - Annual - First Term, 1920 O Baird Bursary (£22 p.a.) Medical Course - • Irregular - February 1st, 1926 > Beaney' (£70) - First Term, 1920 OB (£100) „ 1920 ito Dixson (.£60) - 1. Chemistry, Part III. - »» - Fourth Term, 1920 i

(£60) - 2. Natural Philosophy, Port III. • - ,, - „ „ 1920 >D (£20) - 3. Pure Mathematics, Part II. - ., • " „. „ 1920 i-3 (£20) - 4. Mixed „ „ „ - ,, ,. 1920 GO (£20) - 6. Mech. Engineering, Part II., with 6 **3 Design and Drawing • ., ... 1920 K Dixson (P. Hon. ) (£100) 1. Chemistry ... - a - First Term, 1920 (£100) 2. Natural Fhilsophy a - o„ „ 1920 s (£60)3. Mathematics „ „ 1920 5 (£80) 4. Electrical Engineering . „ „ 1920 5> (£80) 5. Mechanical Engineering „ - „ „ 1920 o Pulton (£50) Obstetrics and Gynaecology - n - ,. „ 1820 S Harbison-Higinbothom ~» 4^ (£100) Economic Research n - March 1st. 1920 CO Scholarships and Exhibitions on Special Foundations—(continued). •oi © H. B. Higgins (£30) The Study of Poetry - - - Annual - July, 1920 Howitt (£60) - - 1. Zoology ...... , -First Term, 1920 a (£50) - - 2. Botany ...... „ - „ „ 1920 om (£50) - - 3. Geology „ - „ ,, 1920 •t>" CorolineKoy(£100p.a.) 1. Botany Biennial -FirstTerm, 1920 (£100 p.a.) 2. Veterinary Anatomy ... „ - „ ,, 1920 Kemot (F. Hon.) (£50) 1. Chemistry - - - - -Annual ..- „ „ 1920 (£60)2. Notural Philosophy ... „ „ ' „ 1920 (Research) (£60)3. Geology ..-„... 1920 •5 George LanseU (£40) - Mining Engineering - >, - » „ 1920 Jessie Leggatt (£34 p.a.) Law ------Biennial - Fourth Term, 1921 © Levi Memorial (£45) - Medicine - - - - - Annual - First Term, 1920 DC John Madden (£20 p.a.) Law - Biennial - Fourth Term, 1920 > MoBain (Research) (£40) Biology ..... „ - „ „ 1920 Melvin Memorial (£45) Engineering Annual - First Term. 1920 Mollison (£58 p.o.) - I.French Triennial- „ ., 1922 s (£58 p.a.) - 2. Italian „ - 1920 (£58 p.o.) - S.Arabic -.-.-- „ - ;. „ 1920 o Ormond (£20) - - 1. Music, Entrance Diploma (3) - Annual - February, 1920 (£20) • . g. Music, Entrance Mus, Bac, (3). , „ - Fourth Term, 1980 Scholarships and Exhibitions on Special Foundations—(continued). Ormond (£20) - 8. Music, First Year Mus. Bac. (3) - Annual Fourth Tern:i,192 0 (£20) - 4. Music, Second Year Mus. Bac. (1) a a i» 1920 OD, Payne (£14) 4th year B.V.Sc. Course - „ .. .1 1920 m Shakespeare (£50 p.a.)i Triennial - a a 1922 © StaweU (Research) (£40) Engineering - Annual First Term, 1920 S Stewart (£100 p.a.) - Triennial - i, i. 1920 CD Stewart (£50 p.a.) - .. a a 1921 3 (£50 p.a.) - 3. Surgery -. - ,. - ., >. 1920 1 Wrixon (£22) - Agriculture - Annual First Term, 1920 > Wyselaskie (£60 p.a.) 1. Mathematics - , - Irregular - First Term, 1920 (£60 p.a.) 2. Natural Science - 1920 OB - „ i. a o (£60 p.a.) 3. EngUsh Constitutional History - „ II n 1921 (£60 p.a.) 4. PoUtical Economy - a f. *. 1921 (£50 p.a.) 6. Modem Languages - „ .. .* 1920 > (£60 p.o.) 6. Classical and Comparative Philo­ a -' logy and Logic - a • », .* 1920 ' >as , O Prizes. as Bowen (£6) .English Essay . Annual - March 1st, 1920 Cobden Club Medal - PoUtical Economy - a m First Term, 1920 ~» James Cuming (£84) - Agricultural Chemistry • ,» • First Term, 1920 Ol Prizes—(continued). ' to Dublin (£10) • - Original Contribution to Literature- - January 31st 1020 .00 or Science or Art • - - Annual a Dwight (£60) - - 1. History (Final Examination) • „ - First Term, 1920 a Dwight (£30) '- - 2. British History II. and Euro­ © pean History - - - Annual - Fourth Term, 1920 ' > (£25) - - 3., Education - ... - - „ ,, »» 1920 BS (£25) - - 4. Natural PhUosophy, Part I. - - „ a a 1920 2 (£25) - - 6. Chemistry, Port I. - - - ,", - .. a 1920 1 (£26) - - 6. Sociology - -. - - - „ - First Term, 1921 > (£25) - - 7. Parasitology and Pathology and Bacteriology - - - - „ - Fourth Term, 1920 s Grimwade (£34) - Chemical Research ... „ - March 1st, 1920 © Maude Harrington (30/-) Accompanying on Pianoforte - „ - Fourth Term 1920 93 Jamieson (£4) - - Clinical Medicine ... „ - First Term, 192Q > Laurie (£7) - 1920 K - Logic and Philosophy -' - - „ a i» ' two Professor Morris (£8)- Literary Criticism - - - Biennial . March 1st, 1920 3! > Alexander Sutherland (£4) English Language and Literature Annual - Fourth Term ,1920 H David Syme (£100) - Scientific Research . March 1st, 1920 ?o Professor Wilson (£4 16/-) Mathematics & Natural Philosophy „ - Fourth Term .1920 Wright (£20) - - 1. Mechanical Engineering, Part 1. - 1920 (£10) • - - - 2, Instrumental Music , , ,, ' l! »i 1920 WAR BUHSAB1K3. 755

WAR BURSARIES. Six War Bursaries may be awarded by the University each year. They may be granted to sons or daughters of persons, previously domiciled in Victoria, who have died on service with the Australian Expeditionary Forces, in cases wbere- there is evidence that without such assistance a University course could not be undertaken or continued. A bursary will, carry remission of lecture and examination fees for a , University course. Applicatious by candidates should be- lodged during November. ,

MINING AND METALLURGICAL BURSARIES AND SCHOLARSHIPS. The principal Australian Base Metal Mining Companies; have established a trust for the award of Bursaries aurT. Scholarships on the following terms :— Students who are British subjects and have completed or received credit for two years of the B.M.E. course may apply before 16th March for a Bursary, submitting evidence- ns to personality and scholarship. ' It is proposed to award two bursaries, one in Mining and one in Metallurgy,, and under the heading of Scholarship, chief consideration will be given to Mining and Metallurgical tendencies respect­ ively. Each wUl be worth £30 per.annum for the remaining two years of the course, tbe payment for the fourth year of the course being contingent ou the bursar's having suffi­ ciently distinguished himself in bis third year. It is further proposed to award two scholarships to candi­ dates, being British subjects, who have completed the- fourth year of tbe B.M.E. course. Applications and evi­ dence must be submitted as for Bursaries. Consideration will be given to proficiency in Mining Engineering and Geology and in Metallurgy and Chemistry respectively. Each scholar will be given an appointment for one year in. a mining or metallurgical works at a salary of £150; and. if satisfactory on endeavour will be made to obtainfor hint a permanent appointment at an equitable salary commencing; at £250 per annum. 754 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1920.

RHODES SCHOLARSHIP.

(REGULATIONS FOB THE ELECTION OF RHODES SCHOLABS FOB VICTORIA, 1920. 1. Candidates must be British subjects or sons of Bri­ tish subjects, unmarried, and not less than 19 or more than 26 years of age on the 1st of October in the year •for which they are elected. 2. Candidates must have been resident for at least .seven years in the Commonwealth of Australia or its dependencies, in New Zealand, or in Fiji, and for the three years-immediately preceding the election must have been resident in Victoria. 3. Candidates, other than those referred to in Section 4, must have passed the Responsions Examination of the University of Oxford, or its equivalent. The Senior FubUc Examination of the University of Melbourne is recognized AS equivalent to Responsionii. provided that the candidate . has satisfied tbe Examiners in Latin and in Mathematics. •Candidates who have not satisfied tbe Examiners at the Senior Public Examination in Greek, wiU be required to present that subject at Responsions. 4. Candidates who have completed two full years of any course in a University recognised for the purpose by :the University of Oxford:, and have passed in all sub- jects of those two years, may be admitted to the status -of Junior Colonial Student in the University of Oxford, and are not required to have passed in the subjects of 'Responsions, though they will have to pass in Greek before proceeding to a degree in the University of Ox­ ford. 5. In the selection of a scholar regard will be paid to (the following qualifications of candidates: — a) Literary and scholastic attainments, b) Fondness for and success in manly outdoor S sports. . (c) Qualities of manhood, truth, etc. (d) Exhibition during schooldays or subsequently of moral force of character, and of instincts to lead and take an interest in his schoolmates, etc. RU0DK8 SCHOLARSHIP. 755

6. Each candidate must furnish to the Chairman of ithe Committee of Selection:— (a) A certificate that be is within the eligible limits of age. (b) Evidence that he passed the Examinations pre­ scribed in Regulation 3. (c) A certificate from the Head of his School or Col­ lege, or other person competent to judge, stat­ ing that the candidate is, in his opinion, able to pass the Responsions Examination at Ox­ ford. (This will not be required in the case of candidates who are excused from Responsions under Section 4.) 7. Each candidate must furnish certificates dealing with the various qualifications set forth in Section 6. The Committee will give due weight to certificates from Heads of Colleges and Schools and from other persons and bodies competent to judge in regard to all or any -of these qualifications. _ 8. Should it seem advisable, the Committee of Selec­ tion will apply to the candidates or any selected number of them such further intellectual tests as it may deem •necessary. No candidate will be finally elected without •A personal interview. 9. The elected scholar will be furnisbed by the Chair­ man of the Committee of Selection with a memorandum prepared by the Representative of the Trustees at Oxford of the steps necessary to be taken to have his name en­ rolled at one of the Colleges of the University. Candidates must send in applications accompanied by the required certificates and statements not later than 30th November. 1020. All communications in regard to the Rhodes Scholar­ ship must be addressed to the President of the Profes­ sorial Board, University of Melbourne, and must be en­ dorsed with the words "Rhodes Scholarship." For the information of candidates, attention is drawn to the fact that the Scholarship, which is of the valne •of £300 per annum for three years, will be paid in quar­ terly instalments, the first on beginning residence at •756 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1920.

Oxford, and thereafter terminally on.' the certificate of his College that his work and conduct have been satis­ factory. Without such certificate the Scholarship lapses.

ORIENT FREE PASSAGES. Three first class return passages are granted annually by the Orient Line of Royal Mail Steamers to graduates of the- University nominated by the Council. Applications should be lodged before the end of February, and should deal with, the foUowing points :-(l) the course done iu Melbourne, (2) the course of study proposed in Europe, (3) the- appUcont's means. . The passages are available during the mouths, from June-. to. November.

SUPREME COURT PRIZES. 1. A prize of Twenty-five pounds open for competition to students at the University of Melbourne not pursuing the course for any degree in law, to be Awarded to the can­ didate who shall be recommended by tbe Examiners and placed first at the Honour Examination in November in the- subjects of the Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing and the Law of Contracts and Personal Property and who- has at that November Examination passed for tbe first time in each of those subjects. 2. A prize of Fifty pounds open- for competition to past, students at the University who have not pursued the course- for any Degree in Law to be awarded to the Candidato- who shall be recommended by. the Examiners and placed first in the subjects for the t'inal Honour Examination for the degree of Bachelor of Laws and who has within eighteen months of that examination completed tne pas­ sing of all the subjects as prescribed and set out in Rule- Five of tbe Rules of the Council of Legal Education. Any person winning this prize in one year shall not be- eligible to compete therefor in a subsequent year. 3. A prize of £25 in the first year and £100 in the- second year to be given to' tbe student to whom the s'ohoiar- ship is awai'ded at the Final Honour Examination for the- Degree of Bachelor of Lows in the University of Mel­ bourne. BARRISTERS AND SOLICITORS. '1ST

ADMISSION OP BARRISTERS AND SOLICITORS The admission of barristers and solicitors in Victoria is- govemed by the Rules of the Council of Legal Education, and is controlled by the Board of Examiners appointed by tbe Supreme Court. In the cose of persons not already admitted to practise in some other State of the Common­ wealth or in the United Kingdom, the main qualification is- either (1) graduation as a Bachelor of Laws in the Univer­ sity of Melbourne, followed by one year's service under- articles; or (2) the following course:— •(a) The candidate must before presenting himself for any of the examinati6ns mentioned in (b), have- obtained a certificate from the Registrar of the University of Melbourne either that he baa- matriculated or that he is qualified to matricu­ late, and in either case that he has passed at a Public Examination in Latin, (b) He must pass at the University of Melbourne, in> the manner prescribed herein in the following " subjects:— (1) Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing.. (2) Law of Contract and Personal Property. Tbe examination in these subjects must be- passed-before beginning the service under ar­ ticles provided for in (c). (3) Constitutional History and Law P.ait II.. (4) Private International Law. (5) Administrative' Law. (6) Equity. (7) Law of Wrongs (Civil and Criminal). (8) Law of Procedure and Evidence. (9) Constitutional History and Law Part III.. (Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia). - The subjects marked 8-9 or any of them may be - passed before, during, or after tbe service of . articles, but no student may present himself for examination in Equity, unless he has- passed in the Law of Property in Lend and Conveyancing at an examination held not less- than six months before the examination at which, he presents himself in Equity. 758 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOB 1M0.

A student (unless he requires one subject only to complete his course) is not entitled to credit for any subject passed at any examina­ tion unless he has passed thereat in two subjects at least; and A Supplementary Examination at the University is deemed to be not a part of the preceding Examination. But where a student has passed in two subjects in December, he may pass in March in any single subject in which he has failed in December. (c) He must serve for four years as a pupil under articles to a person practising as a barrister or solicitor, or as a barrister and solicitor. In all cases where service under Articles is required the -student must before entering into Articles satisfy the Board of Examiners in manner specified in the rules that be has passed all examinations required to be passed before enter­ ing into Articles, and must file with the Secretary of the Board copies of the certificates and evidence produced "before the Board. For further information regarding this and any other matter the student is referred to the rules, and to the Secretary of the Board of Examiners, Supreme Court, Melbourne.

SURGEONS TO THE NAVY.

The Commonwealth Naval Board will invite the Univer­ sities of Sydney, Melbourne, and Adelaide, from time to time as positions become, vacant to nominate candidates for Appointment as Surgeons in the Royal Australian Navy. Candidates should be not more than 28 years of age and unnst be graduates in Medicine and Surgery with at least •one year's experience in a recognised General Hospital.

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s: University of Melbourne

Title: University of Melbourne Calendar 1920

Date: 1920

Persistent Link: http://hdl.handle.net/11343/23471

File Description: 06_Details and Announcements

Terms and Conditions: Terms and Conditions: Copyright in works deposited in the University of Melbourne Calendar Collection is retained by the copyright owner. The work may not be altered without permission from the copyright owner. Readers may only, download, print, and save electronic copies of whole works for their own personal non-commercial use. Any use that exceeds these limits requires permission from the copyright owner. Attribution is essential when quoting or paraphrasing from these works.

Terms and Conditions: To request permission to adapt, modify or use the works outside of the limits of these terms and conditions, please complete the permission request form at: http://www.unimelb.edu.au/copyright/information/fastfind/externalrequest.html